February 2018environmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/EIA/17022018...Aue eq wag} os `JoleJeupu!...

Environmental Impact Assessment

Mohali District, Punjab by

Punjab Waste Management Project (PWMP).

Project Proponent

Punjab Waste Management Project

Consultant

Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited, Hyderabad

February 2018

For Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment,

Storage and Disposal Facility at Nimbua, Dera Bassi,

Submitted by

Punjab Waste Management Project (PWMP)Nimbua village, Dera Bassi tehsil, Mohali district, Punjab

NABET/EIA/1619/RA 0046

(Final Report)

Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change, New Delhi - 110003

Submitted to

Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited

Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage and Disposal facility at Nimbua, Dera Bassi, Mohali district,

Punjab by Punjab Waste Management Project (PWMP)

Ramky Grandiose, Ramky Towers, Gachibowli, Hyderabad

Table of Contents

Integrated Common Hazardous Waste TSDF at PWMP, Dera Bassi, Punjab

M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited Page i of x

Table of Contents

QCI/ NABET Certificate

Declaration of Experts

Terms of Reference (TOR)

TOR Compliance

Executive Summary

Description Page No.

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Preamble 1.1

1.2 Purpose of the Report 1.1

1.3 Identification of Project and Project Proponent 1.1

1.3.1 Background of the Project 1.1

1.3.2 Project 1.3

1.3.3 Project Proponent 1.3

1.4 Brief Description of the Project and its Importance 1.4

1.4.1 Importance of project 1.4

1.4.2 Location of the project 1.5

1.5 Scope of the Study 1.8

Chapter 2 Project Description

2.1 Need of the project 2.1

2.2 Project Location 2.1

2.3 Existing Components in TSDF of PWMP 2.4

2.3.1 Activities Associated with Operation of TSDF 2.7

2.3.2 Flow Path of Wastes at ICHWTSDF 2.7

2.4 Waste Disposable Operations 2.8

2.4.1 Waste Stabilization 2.8

2.4.2 Secured Landfill 2.9

2.5 Proposed Incinerator 2.12

2.5.1 Concept of Incineration 2.15

2.5.2 Incineration System Design 2.16

2.5.3 Collection and Transportation 2.18

2.5.4 Storage of Incinerable Hazardous Waste 2.19

2.5.5 Laboratory Facilities 2.20

2.5.6 Waste Feeding 2.20

2.5.7 Combustion Chambers 2.20


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited Page ii of x


2.6 Bio-medical Waste Management Facility 2.23

2.6.1 Categories of Bio-medical Waste as per BMW rules 2.24

2.6.2 Collection and Transportation 2.27

2.6.3 Disinfection and Destruction 2.27

2.6.4 Bio-medical Waste Incineration 2.27

2.6.5 Autoclave 2.27

2.7 E-Waste Management 2.28

2.7.1 Methodology 2.29

2.7.2 Process Description 2.30

2.8 Recycling Facilities 2.31

2.8.1 Spent Solvent Recycling 2.32

2.8.2 Used Oil Recycling 2.34

2.8.3 Alternative Fuels and Ram Materials Failicity 2.35

2.8.4 Lead Recycling 2.36

2.8.5 Waste Plastic Recycling 2.40

2.8.6 Waste Paper Recycling 2.42

2.9 Leachate Treatment Plant 2.43

2.9.1. Multiple Effect Treatment 2.43

2.9.2 Vertical Thin Film Dryer 2.45

2.10 Water Requirement 2.45

2.11 Energy and Power Requirement and its Source 2.46

2.12 Employment Details 2.46

Chapter 3 Description of the Environment

3.1 Introduction 3.1

3.1.1 Study Period 3.2

3.2 Micro Meteorology 3.2

3.3 Ambient Air quality 3.4

3.3.1 Methodology adopted for the study 3.4

3.3.2 Air quality scenario in the study area 3.9

3.4 Water Environment 3.12

3.4.1 Water Quality Assessment 3.13

3.4.2 Regional Scenario 3.17

3.5 Noise Environment 3.18

3.5.1 Source of Noise 3.19

3.5.2 Noise Levels in the Study Area 3.19

3.5.3 Regional scenario 3.23


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited Page iii of x


3.6 Traffic Study 3.23

3.7 Soil quality 3.25

3.7.1 Criteria adopted for selection of sampling locations 3.25

3.7.2 Soil sampling location 3.25

3.7.3 Regional scenario 3.29

3.8 Ecological and Biodiversity 3.30

3.8.1 Introduction 3.30

3.8.2 Terrestrial Ecology studies 3.31

3.8.3 Flora 3.32

3.8.4 Fauna 3.33

3.8.5 Aquatic ecology cropping pattern 3.34

3.8.6 Aquatic ecology 3.35

3.8.7 Biological environment 3.36

3.8.8 Green belt development and afforestation 3.36

3.9 Google imagery and Topomap for 10 km Radius 3.38

3.10 Land Use land Cover 3.38

3.11 Socio Economic Survey 3.42

3.11.1 Demography and Socio-Economics 3.42

3.11.2 Methodology Adopted for the Study 3.42

3.11.3 Socio-Economic profile of the study area 3.42

3.11.4 Social Structure 3.43

3.11.5 Suggestions for improvement of Socio-Economic Status 3.46

Chapter 4 Anticipated Impacts and Mitigation Measures

4.1 Identification of Impacts 4.1

4.2 Methodology 4.1

4.3 Potential Impacts 4.2

4.4 Prediction of Impacts 4.2

4.5 Impacts during Development Phase 4.2

4.5.1 Impacts on Air Quality 4.3

4.5.2 Impacts on Water Environment 4.4

4.5.3 Impacts on Noise Levels 4.5

4.5.4 Impacts Due to Solid Waste Generation 4.6

4.5.5 Impacts on Land Use 4.7

4.5.6 Imapcts on Demographic and Socio Economics 4.7

4.6 Impacts during Operation Phase 4.7

4.6.1 Impacts on Water Environment 4.7


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited Page iv of x


4.6.2 Impacts on Air Quality 4.10

4.6.3 Impacts on Noise Quality 4.19

4.6.4 Impacts on Land Use 4.20

4.6.5 Impacts Due to Solid Waste generation 4.21

4.6.6 Impacts on Socio Economics Conditions 4.21

4.6.7 Impacts on Topography and Landscape 4.22

Chapter 5 Analysis of Alternatives


5.2 Existing CHWMTSDF 5.1

5.3 Site selection criteria as per HWM Rule 5.1

5.4 Technological Aspects 5.2

5.4.1. Waste Minimization 5.3

5.4.2 Recycling Waste 5.3

5.4.3 Treatment of Waste 5.4

5.4.4 Collection, Transportation and Disposal 5.6

5.5 Disposal of Hazardous Waste 5.6

5.5.1 Landfill Disposal 5.6

5.5.2 Dumping at Sea 5.7

5.5.3 Underground Disposal 5.8

5.5.4 Incineration 5.9

5.6 Alternative technology - Plasma Gasification 5.10

5.6.1 Feedstock 5.10

5.6.2 Commercialization 5.11

5.6.3 Pros and Cons of Plasma Gasification 5.11

5.6.4 Conclusion 5.12

5.6 No Project option 5.12

Chapter 6 Environmental Monitoring Program

6.1 Environmental Monitoring Program 6.1

6.1.1 Construction phase 6.1

6.1.2 Operation phase 6.4

6.1.3 Post operation phase 6.6

6.2 Environmental Laboratory Equipment 6.7

6.3 Environmental Management Cell 6.7

6.4 Pollution Monitoring Facilities 6.8

6.4.1 Reporting Schedules of the Monitoring Data 6.8


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited Page v of x


6.4.2 Public Health Monitoring 6.8

6.5 Budgetary Provision for EMP 6.8

Chapter 7 Additional Studies

7.1. Risk Assessment & Disaster Management 7.1

7.1.1 Risk Analysis 7.1

7.1.2 Evaluating Hazards 7.1

7.2 Identification of Major Hazard Installations Based on GOI Rules, 1989 as amended in 1994 & 2000

7.2

7.2.1 Identification of Toxic, Flammable, Explosive Chemicals 7.2

7.2.2 Applicability of Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989 & subsequent amendment

7.3

7.2.3 Storage facilities of hazardous chemicals 7.5

7.2.4 Safety precautions for the storage of fuel 7.6

7.2.5 Fire Explosive Toxicity Index (FETI) for HSD 7.7

7.2.6 Nature of Hazard from oil storage 7.8

7.2.7 Heat Radiation and Thermal Damage Criteria 7.8

7.3 On site Emergency Plan 7.13

7.3.1 Elements of Planning 7.13

7.4. Infrastructure 7.14

7.5 Operational Systems during Emergency 7.15

7.5.1 Communication system 7.15

7.5.2 Warning System & Control 7.15

7.5.3 Mutual Aid 7.16

7.6 Disaster Management Plan 7.16

7.6.1 An Earthquake 7.17

7.6.2 Cyclone Leading to Landfill flood 7.18

7.6.3 Major explosion of chemicals / fire and toxic 7.20

7.6.4 Contamination of soil and water sources 7.23

7.6.5 Release of toxic gases from incinerator 7.23

7.7 Hazardous Control Measures 7.24

7.7.1 Fire 7.24

7.7.2 Natural Disasters 7.25

7.7.3 Electrical Accidents 7.27

7.8 Full Mock Drill Monitoring 7.30

7.8.1 Steps of Mock Drills 7.30

7.9 Hydrological and Geo-Hydrological Conditions 7.31


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited Page vi of x


7.9.1 Topography 7.31

7.9.2 Rainfall & Climate 7.31

7.9.3 Geology 7.31

7.9.4 Hydrogeological Studies 7.33

7.10 Public Hearing 7.34

Chapter 8 Project Benefits

8.1. Benefits of Hazardous Waste Management 8.1

8.1.1 Benefits of Landfill 8.2

8.1.2 Advantages of incineration Method 8.2

8.1.3 Benefits from Bio-medical Waste 8.2

8.1.4 Benefits of E-Waste Management 8.3

8.1.5 Benefits from Recycling Facilitites 8.3

8.1.6 Benefits of Alternative Fuel Raw material Facility 8.6

8.2. Improvement in Physical Infrastructure 8.7

8.2.1 Employment Benefits 8.7

8.2.2 Other Tangible Benefits 8.7

Chapter 9 Environmental Management Plan

9.1. Introduction 9.1

9.2. Environment Management during Construction 9.1

9.2.1 Air Quality Mitigation Measure 9.1

9.2.2 Water Quality Mitigation Measure 9.2

9.2.3 Noise Mitigation Measure 9.2

9.2.4 Solid Waste Mitigation Measures 9.3

9.2.5 Ecology Aspects 9.4

9.2.6 Site security 9.4

9.3 Environment Management during Operation 9.4

9.3.1 Air Quality Management 9.4

9.3.2 Odor Control 9.5

9.3.3 Gas Management 9.5

9.3.4 Water Quality Mitigation Measure 9.6

9.3.5 Noise Mitigation Measure 9.6

9.3.6 Solid Waste Mitigations 9.7

9.3.7 Post Operations of Landfill 9.7

9.4 Socio Economic Development Activities Under CEP 9.8

9.4.1 Planning 9.8


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited Page vii of x


9.4.2 Implementation 9.9

9.4.3 Possible Areas of Activities under CEP 9.11

9.5 Occupational Health Managment 9.13

9.6 Fire Protection System 9.13

9.7 Environment Management Cell 9.13

9.7.1 Record Keeping and Reporting 9.14

Chapter 10 Summary and Conclusion


10.2 Project Description 10.1

10.2.1 Project Importance 10.2

10.2.2 Land Details 10.3

10.2.3 Water Requirement and its Availability 10.3

10.2.4 Energy and Power Requirement and its Source 10.3

10.2.5 Employment Details 10.3

10.3 Baseline Monitoring Status 10.4

10.4 Anticipated Impacts 10.6

10.5 Environmental Monitoring Plan 10.7

10.6 Risk Analysis 10.9

10.7 Project Benefits 10.9

10.8 Environmental Management Plan 10.10

10.9 Cost Estimate of the Project 10.11

Chapter 11 Disclosure of Consultants

11.1 Ramky Group 11.1

11.2 Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited 11.1

11.2.1 Consultancy Services 11.1

11.2.2 Laboratory services 11.2

11.2.3 Training services 11.2

11.2.4 Field Services 11.3

11.2.5 Treatment Plant Services 11.3

11.2.6 Solid Waste Management Services 11.3


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited Page viii of x

List of Tables

Table No Description Page No.

1.1 Proposed Project details 1.3

1.2 Features of the Site 1.4

1.3 Chronology of Events for Obtaining EC 1.11

2.1 Site Features 2.2

2.2 Stabilization mechanism based on Waste Characteristics 2.9

2.3 Proposed Components for Incinerator setup 2.12

2.4 Technical Details of Incinerator setup 2.17

2.5 Categories of Bio-medical Waste 2.24

2.6 Key Features of the Proposed Autoclave 2.28

2.7 Technical Specification and Operational Parameters of MEE plant 2.43

2.8 List of components of MEE plant 2.43

2.9 Specification of Vertical Thin Film Dryer 2.45

2.10 List of components of Vertical Thin Film Dryer 2.45

2.11 Water requirement 2.46

2.12 Power and Fuel Requirement 2.46

3.1 Observed Meteorological Data 3.2

3.2 IMD Data of Ambala (1981-2010) 3.3

3.3 Season (March- 2016 to May - 2016)-Frequency Distribution Table 3.3

3.4 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations 3.5

3.5 Particulate Matter Levels in the Study Area (µg/m3) 3.6

3.6 Ambient Air Quality Levels in the Study Area (µg/m3) - SO2, NOX 3.6

3.7 Ambient Air Quality Levels in the Study Area (µg/m3) – O3, CO, NH3 3.7

3.8 Water Sampling Locations 3.13

3.9 Water Sample Analysis Results – Ground water 3.15

3.10 Surface Water Sample Analysis Results 3.16

3.11 Noise Monitoring Locations 3.20

3.12 Noise Levels in the Study Area – dB (A) 3.22

3.13 Traffic Survey at site connecting road 3.23

3.14 Traffic Survey at NH-73 3.24

3.15 Soil Sampling Locations 3.26

3.16 Soil Analysis Results 3.28

3.17 List of Flora in the Study Area 3.32

3.18 List of Fauna in the Study Area 3.33

3.19 Common crops/vegetables /pulses /fruits found in the study area 3.35

3.20 List of plants identified for greenbelt and avenue plantations. 3.37


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited Page ix of x


3.21 Present Land Use and Land cover details (10 km Radius) 3.39

3.22 Distribution of Population in the Study Area 3.43

3.23 Distribution of Population by Social Structure 3.44

3.24 Distribution of Literate and Literacy Rates 3.44

3.25 Occupational Structure 3.45

3.26 Demographic details in the study area of 10 Kms radius: 3.47

4.1 Wastewater Generation Details in KLD 4.8

4.2 Stack Emission Details 4.13

4.3 24 Hours Mean Meteorological Data for summer season 4.14

4.4 Post Project Scenario – Units: µg/m3 4.14

5.1 Site selection criteria 5.1

6.1 Environmental Measures during Construction Site 6.2

6.2 Environment Monitoring during Operation Phase 6.4

6.3 Environmental Monitoring during Post Operation Phase 6.6

6.4 Budgetary Implementation of Environmental Management Plan 6.8

7.1 Description of applicable provisions of GOI rules’1989 7.4

7.2 Details of Chemicals and Applicability of GOI rules 7.5

7.3 Nature of Possible Hazards 7.5

7.4 Hazardous Chemicals at Site 7.7

7.5 Summary Table on the Inventories 7.7

7.6 F&EI of fuels used for the proposed Industrial Area 7.8

7.7 F&EI Category 7.8

7.8 Effect of Heat Radiation 7.9

7.9 Heat Radiation and Fatality 7.9

7.10 Scenario (Pool Fire) 7.10

7.11 First Aid for Burns 7.30

7.12 Geological Succession of the Study Area 7.32

7.13 Dynamic Ground Water Resources of Dera Bassi block, Mohali 7.34

9.1 Mitigation Measures Proposed during Post Operation Period 9.7

9.2 Budget of CSR Activities 9.12

9.3 Record Keeping Particular 9.14

10.1 Proposed Project details 10.2

10.2 Site features 10.2

10.3 Power and Fuel Requirement 10.3

10.4 Ambient Air Quality Results (µg/m3) 10.4

10.5 Summary of Ground Water Analysis 10.5

10.6 Summary of Surface Water Analysis 10.5


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited Page x of x


10.7 Noise Levels – dB (A) 10.5

10.9 Post Project Scenario-Units: μg/m3 10.7

10.10 Environmental Monitoring during Operational Phase 10.7

10.11 Mitigation Measure Proposed during Operation Phase 10.10

List of Figures

Figure No Description Page No.

1.1 Location Map of Existing Hazardous Waste TSDF Site in Nimbuan 1.6

1.2 Topographical Map of the Study Area 1.7

2.1 Project Boundary on Google map 2.3

2.2 Site Photographs 2.5

2.3 Layout of the ICHWTSDF, PWMP 2.6

2.4 Cross Section of the Landfill 2.11

2.5 Schematic Diagram of Incineration Process 2.18

2.6 Autoclave Sterilization Process 2.28

2.7 E-Waste Proposed Flow Chart 2.31

2.8 Flow Chart of Spent Solvent Recovery 2.33

2.9 Waste/Used Oil Recycling Plant 2.34

2.10 Alternative Fuel and Raw Material Facility 2.36

2.11 Lead Recycling 2.37

2.12 Lead Alloy Manufacturing 2.38

2.13 Process Flow Sheet of Plastic Recycling 2.41

3.1 Wind Rose Diagram – Summer Season 3.4

3.2 Ambient Air Quality Sampling locations Map 3.8

3.3 Ground Water and Surface Water Sampling locations Map 3.14

3.4 Noise Sampling locations Map 3.21

3.5 Soil Sampling locations Map 3.27

3.6 Land use and Land cover Map 3.40

3.7 Satellite Imagery 3.41

4.1 Leachate Treatment Plant 4.10

4.2 Predicted 24- Hourly Avg GLCs of PM (μg/m3) at 10 km Radius 4.15

4.3 Predicted 24- Hourly Avg GLCs of SO2 (μg/m3) at 10 km Radius 4.16

4.3 Predicted 24- Hourly Avg GLCs of NOx (μg/m3) at 10 km Radius 4.17

5.1 Layout of Plasma gasification 5.10

6.1 Organization Setup 6.7

7.1 Risk Contours with Pool Fire Threat Zone for HSD 7.11


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited Page xi of x

Figure No Description Page No.

7.2 ALOHA Source point on the layout 7.12

List of Attachment

1. Annexure – 1 CTO Complianence Under Air and Water Act.

2. Annexure – 2 Trend Analysis of Environment Base Level Quality.

3. Annexure – 3 Trend Analysis of the Piezometer Wells.

4. Annexure – 4 Pieozometer Wells Monitoring Results 2005-2016.

5. Annexure – 5 Public Hearing Proceedings, Replies and Action plan.

QCI –NABET Accreditation

Certificate of Consultant

Declaration of Experts

Terms of Reference (TOR)

iii. List of waste to be handled and their source along with mode of transportation.

F.No:10-27/2016-IA.1IIGovernment of India

Ministry of Environment, Forest & Climate Change(IA.III Section)

Indira ParyavaranBhawan,Aliganj, JorBagh Road,

New Delhi - 3

Dated: 4thMay, 2016

ToThe Project HeadMis Punjab Waste Management Project (PWMP)Village Nimbuan, PO Rampur Sainia,Dera Bassi, Mohali,

Punjab

E-mail: [email protected] ; Fax.: 040-23105100;

Sub: Establishment of Hazardous Waste Incinerator Facility (500 kg/hr) at ExistingCommon Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facility at Nimbuan,DeraBassi, Mohali District, Punjab by Mis Punjab Waste Management Project(PWMP), Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited - Terms of Reference (ToR) reg.

Ref.: Your online proposal no. IA/PB/MIS/51358/2016 dated 9.3.2016.

Sir,

Kindly refer your online proposal no. IAlPB/MIS/51358/2016 dated 9.3.2016 alongwithproject documents including Form-I, Pre-feasibility Report and draft 'Terms of Reference' as perthe EIA Notification, 2006. It is noted that proposal is for establishment of Hazardous WasteIncinerator (500 kg/hr) at Existing Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and DisposalFacility at Nimbuan, Dera Bassi, Mohali District, Punjab by Mis Punjab Waste ManagementProject (PWMP), Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited.

2. Draft Terms of Reference (TOR) have been discussed and finalized by the 4th ExpertAppraisal Committee (Infrastructure -2) held during 28th - 29th March, 2016 for preparation ofEIAIEMP report. The Committee prescribed the following TOR in addition to Standard TORprovided at Annexure-1 for preparation of EIA-EMP report :

i. Importance and benefits of the project.

i. A separate chapter on status of compliance of Environmental Conditions granted byState/Centre to be provided. As per circular dated 30th May, 2012 issued by MoEF, acertified report by RO, MoEF on status of compliance of conditions on existing unit to beprovided in EIA-EMP report.

ii. Details of various waste management units with capacities for the proposed and existingproject.

Page 1 of 4

mailto:[email protected]

of 4

iv. Other chemicals and materials required with quantities and storage capacities.

v. Details of temporary storage facility for storage of hazardous waste at project site.

vi. Details of pre-treatment facility of hazardous waste at TSDF/incineration facility.

vii. Details of air Emission, effluents, hazardous/solid waste generation and theirmanagement.

viii. The report will present a trend analysis of base level quality before the existing facilitiescame into existence, present scenario (with the present activities being fullycommissioned) and the projected impacts of the proposed incinerator etc. as proposed.

ix. Ground water quality analysis of the peizometer wells installed in and around the TSDF.Trend analysis of results w.r.t. baseline data during initial project establishment to becarried out

x. Requirement of water, power, with source of supply, status of approval, water balancediagram, man-power requirement (regular and contract)

xi. Process description along with major equipments and machineries, process flow sheet(quantative) from waste material to disposal to be provided

xii. Hazard identification and details of proposed safety systems.

xiii. Layout maps of proposed Solid Waste Management Facilities indicating storage area,incinerator plant area, greenbelt area, utilities etc.

xiv. Details of effluent treatment and recycling process.

xv. Leachate study report and detailed leachate management plan to be incorporated.

xvi. Action plan for measures to be taken for excessive leachate generation during monsoonperiod.

xvii. Action plan for any pollution of ground water is noticed during operation period or postclosure monitoring period.

xviii. Detailed Environmental Monitoring Plan as well as Post Closure Monitoring Plan.

xix. Public hearing to be conducted and issues raised and commitments made by the projectproponent on the same should be included in EIAIEMP Report in the form of tabularchart with financial budget for complying with the commitments made.

xx. Any litigation pending against the project and/or any direction/order passed by any Courtof Law against the project, if so, details thereof shall also be included. Has the unitreceived any notice under the Section 5 of Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 orrelevant Sections of Air and Water Acts? If so, details thereof and compliance/ATR to thenotice(s) and present status of the case.

xxi. A tabular chart with index for point wise compliance of above TORs.

3. These 'TORs' should be considered for the preparation of EIA / EMP report forestablishment of 500 kg/hr Hazardous Waste Incinerator at Existing Common Hazardous WasteTreatment, Storage, and Disposal Facility at Nimbuan, DeraBassi, Mohali District, Punjab byPunjab Waste Management Project (PWMP), Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited in addition to allthe relevant information as per the 'General Structure of EIA' given in Appendix III and lilA in theEIA Notification, 2006. The EIAIEMP as per TORs should be submitted to the Chairman, Punjab ,

JbL-

of 4

Pollution Control Board, (PPCB)for public consultation. The SPCB shall conduct the publichearing/public consultation as per the provisions of EIA notification, 2006.

4. You are requested to kindly submit the final EIAIEMP prepared as per TORs andincorporating all the issues raised during Public Hearing / Public Consultation to the Ministry forconsidering the proposal for environmental clearance within 3 years as per the MoEF O. M. No.J-11013/41/2006-IA.1I (I) dated 8th October, 2014.

5. The consultants involved in the preparation of EIAIEMP report after accreditation withQuality Council of India / National Accreditation Board of Education and Training (QCI/NABET)would need to include a certificate in this regard in the EIAIEMP reports prepared by them anddata provided by other Organization(s)/Laboratories including their status of approvals etc.

(A.N. Singh)Scientist '0'

Copy to:

1) Additional Principal Chief Conservator of Forests (C), Regional Office (Northern Zone),MoEF&CC, Bay No.24-2S, Sector 31-A, Dakshin Marg, Chandigarh-160030.

2) The Chairman, Punjab Pollution Control Board, Vatavaran Bhawan, Nabha Road, Patiala,147001, Punjab.

xvii.

xviii.

..

••

Annexure-I

STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR CONDUCTING ENVIRONMENT IMPACT ASSESSMEN STUDY

FOR COMMON HAZARDOUS WASTE TREATMENT, STORAGE AND DISPOSAL FACILITIES {TSDFS}

INFORMATION TO BE INCLUDED IN EIA/EMP REPORT

i. Reasons for selecting the site with details of alternate sites examined/rejected/selected onmerit with comparative statement and reason/basis for selection. The examination shouldjustify site suitability in terms of environmental damages, resources sustainability associatedwith selected site as compared to rejected sites. The analysis should include parametersconsidered along with weightage criteria for short-listing selected site.Submit the details of the road/rail connectivity along with the likely impacts and mitigativemeasuresSubmit the present land use and permission required for any conversion such as forest,agriculture etcExamine the details of transportation of Hazardous wastes, and its safety in handling.Examine and submit the details of on line pollutant monitoring.Examine the details of monitoring of Dioxin and Furon.MoU for disposal of ash through the TSDF.MoU for disposal of scrubbing waste water through CETP.Examine and submit details of monitoring of water quality around the landfill site.Examine and submit details of the odour control measures.Examine and submit details of impact on water body and mitigative measures during rainyseason.Environmental Management Plan should be accompanied with Environmental Monitoring Planand environmental cost and benefit assessment. Regular monitoring shall be carried out forodour control.Water quality around the landfill site shall be monitored regularly to examine the impact on theground water.The storage and handling of hazardous wastes shall be as per the Hazardous WasteManagement Rules.Submit details of a comprehensive Disaster Management Plan including emergency evacuationduring natural and man-made disaster.Public hearing to be conducted for the project in accordance with provisions of EnvironmentalImpact Assessment Notification, 2006 and the issues raised by the public should be addressed inthe Environmental Management Plan. The Public Hearing should be conducted based on theToR letter issued by the Ministry and not on the basis of Minutes of the Meeting available onthe web-site.A detailed draft EIA/EMP report should be prepared in accordance with the above additionalTOR and should be submitted to the Ministry in accordance with the Notification.

ii.

iii.

iv.v.

vi.vii.

viii.ix.x.xi.

xii.

xiii.

xiv.

xv.

xvi.

Any further clarification on carrying out the above studies including anticipated impacts due tothe project and mitigative measure, project proponent can refer to the model ToR available onMinistry website ''http://moef.nic.in/Manual/lncinerator"

.... xxx ...

Page 4 of 4

F. No. 10-27/2016-IA-III Government of India

Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (IA.III Section)

Indira Paryavaran Bhawan, Jor Bagh Road, New Delhi - 3

Date:9 February, 2018 To,

The Project Head, Village Nimbua, PO Rampur Sainia, Tehsil Derabassi, District Mohali, Punjab - 140507. E- Mail: [email protected]

Subject: Establishment of 500 kg/hr Hazardous Waste Incinerator at Existing Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facility at Nimbuan, Dera Bassi, Mohali District, Punjab by M/s Punjab Waste Management Project (PWMP), by Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited -Amendment in Terms of Reference - reg.

Sir, This has reference to your online proposal No.IA/PB/MIS/51358/2016 dated

11.04.2017, submitted to this Ministry for seeking Amendment in Terms of Reference (ToR) in terms of the provisions of the Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification, 2006 under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.

3. The proposal for grant of Amendment in Terms of Reference (ToR) to the project was considered by the Expert Appraisal Committee (Infra-2) in its meetings held on 21-24 August, 2017 and 29-30 November, 2017.

3. The details of the project, as per the documents submitted by the project proponent, and also as informed during the above said meetings, are as under:

(i) Punjab Waste Management Project (TSDF), is proposing to enhance the existing Hazardous Waste Treatment and Disposal Facility of Punjab Waste Management Project (PWMP) at Nimbua Village, Dera Bassi Tehsil, Mohali District, Punjab State with more treatment facilities like Direct Landfill (DLF) -20,000 TPA Landfill after Stabilization - 40,000 TPA, Incineration (Common for HW and BMW) - 500 kg/hr, Biomedical Waste Management - 5 TPD, Alternative Fuels and Raw Material Facility - 18,000 TPA, E-Waste Management Facility -8,000 TPA, Used Oil Recycling - 2 KLD, Spent Solvent Recycling - 5 KLD, Lead Recycling - 2,000 TPA, Paper Recycling - 2 TPD, Plastics Recycling - 2 TPD.

(ii) This proposed expansion falls in schedule 7(d) Common hazardous waste Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facilities (TSDFs), Category A.

(iii) This proposed plant is located at Sy.No.1/7, 1/13, 1/14, 1/15, 1/16, /17, 1/18, 1/23, 1/24, 1/25, 2/20,2/21, 2/22, 2/23, 10/1, 10/2, 10/3, 10/8, 10/9, 10/10, 11/2, 11/3, 11/4, 11/5, 11/6, 11/7, 11/8 and 11/9 situated in Nimbua Village, Teh: Dera Bassi, Distt. Mohali, Punjab.

(iv) The primary objective of this project is to provide an Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage Disposal Facility (ICHWTSDF) to the hazardous waste disposal needs of the industries in the state of Punjab. Keeping in view of the diverse group of wastes generated by various existing and proposed industries in and around Dera Bassi as well as nearby sources, it is

Proposal No. IA/PB/MIS/51358/2016 Page 1 of 2

Jo Z aged 910Z/99£ lS/SI IN/EldNI "oN Tesodo,d

Jopeii (Is! = A telisnN)

.Alpoqlnv lualadwoo ay} }o lenoidde ql!m sanss! ski. .9

luawpuawy al; sp000e Aqwaq a6ueqo alewllo

pue TS0J0j 11.10LUUOJ!AU3 AJTSMIAJ ay} `OVA all suoppuawwoow Jed sv

.palonpuoo uaaq Apewie seq 6upeaq

ouqnd qo!qm JOI Alpedeo peoueque .1 0 j iodaH cun3/vi3 ;!wqns Tuauodaid

paroJd papuawwoow eamww00 lesodoid eq uo suoHalaq!leP Pel!eleP

Tuawaouequa Alpedeo pasodoad ay} JOI papnpuoo uaaq Apewie seq 6upeaH oinnd (!H)

-peal

uoHnHod asewou! Aue eq wag} os `JoleJeupu! Alpedeo Li! asewou! ou pue peoi ieuowppe ou s! Tan pamwqns seq Tuauodoid paraid au U!)

.91-0Z•g0.170 PoTelp

I I I.V1-9 1.0Z/LZ-0 I- •

palou

(0y3) aappwoo ies!eiddv padx3 ay} lesodoJd ay} uo suo!Twaqqap 6upna

.saHllpej. Tuawlewi. OJOW ql!m jasi 6uHs!xe ay} aouequa pasodoad s! 1! `saamos Acpeau se Ham se !ssee waa punwe pue u! sapTsnpu! pasodoad pue 6uHs!xa snopen Aq paleJaua6 salsem dnoi6 asJanHo eq ma!n 6u!daa>i .ainpniTswlu! kiessaoau e se paqs!peTsa eq osie sauHapp6 god° Jed se pegs abwols alsem anwaupui

ue `osIV -wag aisem ouppn Ainp aletpeal lesodsllo ay} Jo; pasn

osle s! Jolwaupu! all Japp /cads ap.1 'AMPeJ Tuawa6eueinj alsem snopRzeH uowwoo paleibalui ue awooaq 6uHs!xe ay} os enquiN jasi

6uHs!xa NT JH/leo>1 IN g 1 Aipedeo Joimaupui ue dn Tnd pasodoad

Si domAci `Jauuew owluaps e u! eisem alqwaupu! asodsp of .(vdi 9179) eisem anwaupu! s! alsem ay} %9.z tiefund awls eq u! sapTsnpui snopen

Aq palwaue6 alsem snopezeH VIIAI 9176`0Z 40 MO :parcud s;ijeueg (!!!A)

.ewe pafaid u! luawAoidwa paip srmemol Jeuuew anwsod e Li! alnqpwoo pafoid ̀os .aidoad pool all Jo; paieJaua6

eq /clam we awoou! pue wawAoldwa awos legualod luawAoldw3

'SOJOJO ge sal s! dmes Joleiaupu! pasodoad eq Jo Tsoo :13efoad aqi lo 1S03 wawisanui (!n)

*moue! pampas 01 pasodsHo Aueu!I pue paleag eq saimpel paleJaua6 alsem snopiezeH

.slas Ja pasodoad Aq poddns eq dn >peg Jamod pue luawaa!nbal Jaqpnd

.uoHelsqns Acpeau Aq paHddns eq iHm Au 092. s! sappej. pasodoad ay} pue

MN gc.z9 luawwinbaJ Alpppaia weld 6uHs!xa aqi .sJaNuelisHamaJoq q6ncuql s! JaTem aoinos eq j .cji>1 gg eq paroJd Jol luawannbai Jalem (n)

.Apoed Tuawa6eueinj else/NA snopezeH uowwoo palea6alui ue awooaq iHm Jas.". 6uHs!xa NT leg; OS seHllpej. Tuaugew; wow

ON'd op\ ood3on Aq pafoid panss! seen H°±

qwn jag' bugsixe aouequa 01 pasodoad


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited I/XIV

Terms of Reference Compliance

S.No. Terms of Reference Compliance to Terms of Reference

1 Reasons for selecting the site with

details of alternate sites

examined/rejected/selected on merit

with comparative statement and

reason/basis for selection. The

examination should justify site suitability

in terms of environmental damages,

resources sustainability associated with

selected site as compared to rejected

sites. The analysis should include

parameters considered along with

weightage criteria for short-listing

selected site.

Punjab Waste Management Project

(PWMP) has been providing hazardous

waste disposal services industries in Punjab

since 2007 through the Treatment Storage

and Disposal Facility (TSDF) with Secured

Landfill and Stabilization facilities. PWMP

wants to enhance the waste disposal

services through inclusion of hazardous

waste incinerator, bio-medical waste

management, Alternative fuels and Raw

material Facility (AFRF), E-waste management

and recycling facilities like used oil recycling,

spent solvent, lead recycling, paper recycling,

plastic recycling.

For the proposed project, site was

examined as per guidelines and details are

mentioned in Chapter 5 in Section 5.3.

2 Submit the details of the road/rail

connectivity along with the likely impacts

and mitigative measures.

The existing site is well connected by all

means, nearest National Highway is NH 73

at the distance of 1.6 km in East direction

from site, nearest railway station is

Ghaggar at the distance of 7.5 km in West

direction from site. Traffic study have been

carried out for NH 73 and connecting road

details given in Chapter 3 section 3.6

Minimal impacts as the proposed project is

expansion of the existing CHWTSDF.

3 Submit present land use &permission

required for any conversion such as

forest, agriculture etc.

PWMP CHWTSDF at Nimbua village,

Derabassi, Mohali, Punjab. As it is existing

CHWTSDF going for an expansion no

additional permission required.

4 Examine the details of transportation of The Transportation of Hazardous Waste will


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited II/XIV

Hazardous wastes, and its safety in

handling

be done as per the Hazardous and Other

Wastes (Management and Transboundary

Movement) Rules, 2016.

Packaging & Labelling:

(1) Any occupier handling hazardous or

other wastes and operator of the

treatment, storage and disposal facility

shall ensure that the hazardous and other

wastes are packaged in a manner suitable

for safe handling, storage and transport as

per the guidelines issued by the Central

Pollution Control Board from time to time.

The labelling shall be done as per Form 8.

(2) The label shall be of non-washable

material, weather proof and easily visible.

Transportation

(1) The transport of the hazardous and

other waste shall be in accordance with the

provisions of these rules and the rules

made by the Central Government under the

Motor Vehicles Act, 1988 and the

guidelines issued by the Central Pollution

Control Board from time to time in this

regard.

(2) The occupier shall provide the

transporter with the relevant information

in Form 9, regarding the hazardous nature

of the wastes and measures to be taken in

case of an emergency and shall label the

hazardous and other wastes containers as

per Form 8.


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited III/XIV

(3) In case of transportation of hazardous

and other waste for final disposal to a

facility existing in a State other than the

State where the waste is generated, the

sender shall obtain ‘No Objection

Certificate’ from the State Pollution Control

Board of both the States.


and other waste for recycling or utilisation

including co-processing, the sender shall

intimate both the State Pollution Control

Boards before handing over the waste to

the transporter.

(5) In case of transit of hazardous and other

waste for recycling, utilisation including

coprocessing or disposal through a State

other than the States of origin and

destination, the sender shall give prior

intimation to the concerned State Pollution

Control Board of the States of transit

before handing over the wastes to the

transporter.


and other waste, the responsibility of safe

transport shall be either of the sender or

the receiver whosoever arranges the

transport and has the necessary

authorisation for transport from the

concerned State Pollution Control Board.

This responsibility should be clearly

indicated in the manifest.

(7) The authorisation for transport shall be

obtained either by the sender or the

receiver on whose behalf the transport is


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited IV/XIV

being arranged.

Manifest system (Movement Document)

for hazardous and other waste to be used

within the country only.

(1) The sender of the waste shall prepare

seven copies of the manifest in Form 10

comprising of colour code indicated below

and all seven copies shall be signed by the

sender:

Copy 1 (White) : To be forwarded to the

SPCB/PCC by the occupier

Copy 2 (Yellow) : To be signed by the

transporter and retained by the occupier

Copy 3 (Pink) : To be retained by the

operator of a facility

Copy 4 (Orange): To be returned to the

transporter by the operator of facility after

accepting waste

Copy 5 (Green): To be forwarded to the

SPCB/PCC by the operator of facility after

disposal.

Copy 6 (Blue): To be returned to the

occupier by the operator of the facility after

disposal.

Copy 7 (Gray): To be sent by the receiver to

the SPCB of the sender in case the sender is

in another State.

(2)The sender shall forward copy 1 (white)

to the State Pollution Control Board, and in

case the hazardous or other wastes is likely

to be transported through any transit State,

the sender shall intimate State Pollution

Control Boards of transit States about the

movement of the waste.


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited V/XIV

(3) No transporter shall accept waste from

the sender for transport unless it is

accompanied by signed copies 3 to 7 of the

manifest.

(4) The transporter shall submit copies 3 to

7 of the manifest duly signed with date to

the receiver along with the waste

consignment.

(5) The receiver after acceptance of the

waste shall hand over copy 4 (orange) to

the transporter and send copy 5 (green) to

his State Pollution Control Board and send

copy 6 (blue) to the sender and the copy 3

(pink) shall be retained by the receiver.

(6) The copy 7 (grey) shall only be sent to

the State Pollution Control Board of the

sender, if the sender is in another State.

5 Examine and submit the details of on

line pollutant monitoring.

Online pollutant monitoring will be

provided as per CPCB guidelines for

monitoring particulate matter, SO2, NOx

and CO from the incinerator stack.

The results obtained will be uploaded into

State PCB server on regular intervals.

6 Examine the details of monitoring of

Dioxin and Furon.

The monitoring of Dioxins and Furans in the

Stack emissions will be carried out by third

party MOEF recognized laboratories as per

CFE conditions given by SPCB or EC

conditions given by MOEFCC and CPCB

protocol for TSDF. Air emission control

measure given in Chapter 6 Table 6.2.

7 MoU for disposal of ash through the

TSDF.

The ash generated from the incinerator will

be disposed to the secured landfill.

8 MoU for disposal of scrubbing waste The scrubbing wastewater generated from


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited VI/XIV

water through CETP. alkaline scrubber will be disposed through

spray drier / quencher which is used for

control of Dixon and Furan generation.

9 Examine and submit details of

monitoring of water quality around the

landfill site.

There are seven (7) peizometer wells

installed around the landfill site including

upstream and downstream sides and

Monitored monthly to examine the impact

on the ground water including heavy

metals.

The ground water and surface water

scenario of the study area details are given

in chapter 3 section 3.4

10 Examine and submit details of the odour

control measures.

Details of odour control measures are given

in the Chapter 9 Section 9.3.2

11 Examine and submit details of impact on

water body and mitigative measures

during rainy season.

There will not be any wastewater discharge

to any nearby water body and adopts the

zero wastewater discharge concept.

Wastewater generated from the TSDF shall

be treated and reused inside the facility.

The project design provides for diversion

and storage of this runoff water from

contaminated area to a dedicated

impermeable quarantined tank and a

storm-water pond and used for greenbelt.

12 Environmental Management Plan should

be accompanied with Environmental

Monitoring Plan and environmental cost

and benefit assessment. Regular

monitoring shall be carried out for odour

control.

Detailed Environmental Management Plan

is provided in Chapter 9, Detailed

Environmental Monitoring Plan is given in

Chapter 6 section 6.1.2 and budget for

implementation of EMP (capital cost of 300

lakhs and recurring cost 30 lakhs) is

provided in Chapter 6, Table 6.5.

13 Water quality around the landfill site

shall be monitored regularly to examine

the impact on the ground water.






metals.


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited VII/XIV

14 The storage and handling of hazardous

wastes shall be as per the Hazardous

Waste Management Rules.

The storage and handling of hazardous

wastes are followed as per the Hazardous

and Other Wastes (Management and

Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016.

15 Submit details of a comprehensive

Disaster Management Plan including

emergency evacuation during natural

and man-made disaster.

The disaster management plan including

precautions to be taken during natural and

manmade disaster are given in Chapter 7

section 7.6

16 Public hearing to be conducted for the

project in accordance with provisions of

Environmental Impact Assessment

Notification, 2006 and the issues raised

by the public should be addressed in the

Environmental Management Plan. The

Public Hearing should be conducted

based on the TOR letter issued by the

Ministry and not on the basis of Minutes

of the Meeting available on the web-site.

Public Hearing was conducted on 30.6.2017

at 11:00am held at the main gate of the

existing TSDF of Ramky Enviro Engineers

Ltd (Unit: Punjab Waste Management

Project) located opposite M/s Vardhman

Chemtech Ltd, Village Nimbuan, P.O.

Rampur Sainia, Tehsil Dera Bassi, District

Mohali (S.A.S. Nagar). Sh. Charandev Singh

Mann, P.C.S. Additional Deputy

Commissioner, on behalf of Deputy

Commissioner, S.A.S Nagar (Mohali) and Er.

S.S. Matharu, Environmental Engineer,

Regional Office, Punjab Pollution Control

Board, S.A.S Nagar (Mohali) were present

and supervise the PH Proceedings. PH

Proceedings minutes, action Plan and

replies for all the issues raised in PH were

given in Annexure 5.

17 A detailed draft EIA/EMP reports should

be prepared in accordance with the

above additional TOR and should be

submitted to the Ministry in accordance

with the Notification.

Noted and followed

18 Details of litigation pending against the

project, if any, with direction /order

passed by any Court of Law against the

Project should be given.

No litigations pending against the project

19 The cost of the Project (capital cost and

recurring cost) as well as the cost

The capital cost of the project is proposed

as INR 35.0 Crores, EMP cost for the


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited VIII/XIV

towards implementation of EMP should

be clearly spelt out.

proposed project is INR 3.0 Crores with INR

30 Lakhs as recurring cost. Details given in

the Chapter 6 section 6.5

Additional ToR

1 Importance and benefits of the project. There is a growing concern all over the

country for the disposal of hazardous

waste generated from anthropogenic

sources. The waste generators find it

difficult to dispose their hazardous waste

without causing environmental

disturbance, as very few appropriate

disposal facilities are available in the state.

To dispose the waste in a scientific

manner, Punjab Waste Management Project

proposed to put up an hazardous waste

incinerator, bio-medical waste management

facility, Alternative Fuels and Raw material

Facilities (AFRF), e-waste management and

recycling facilities like used oil recycling,

spent solvent, used lead acid batteries

recycling, paper recycling, plastic recycling

within the existing TSDF at Nimbua village so

that the existing TSDF will become an

Integrated Common Hazardous Waste

Management Facility (ICHWMF).

2 A separate chapter on status of

compliance of Environmental Conditions

granted by State/Centre to be provided.

As per circular dated 30th May, 2012

issued by MoEF, a certified report by RO,

MoEF on status of compliance of

conditions on existing unit to be

provided in EIA-EMP report.

The existing CHWSTSDF has been granted

CTO under the provisions of the Air

(Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act,

1981 and Water (Prevention & Control of

Pollution) Act, 1974 vide letter no. ZO-

I/SAS/Nagar/APC/2011-12/F-158 and letter

no. ZO-I/SAS/Nagar/WPC/2011-12/F-180

respectively and both Air and Water Act

were further extended till 3/11/2019 vide

letters dated 28/1/2015. Compliance of

PWMP for Consent to Operate under Air

and Water act 1974 has been attached as


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited IX/XIV

Annexure 1

3 Details of various waste management

units with capacities for the proposed

and existing project.

Existing Facility:

1. Secured Landfill and

Treatment/Stabilization – 36000 TPA

2. ETP/MEE – 10 KLD

Proposed facility

1. Secured Landfill – 20,000 TPA

2. Treatment/ Stabilization – 40,000 TPA

3. Hazardous waste Incinerator – 500 Kg/h

4. Biomedical Waste (BMW) – 5 TPD

5. AFRF – 18,000 TPA

6. E-Waste – 8,000 TPA

7. Used Oil Recycling – 2 KLD

8. Spent Solvent – 5 KLD

9. Lead Recycling – 2000 TPA

10. Paper Recycling – 2 TPD

11. Plastics Recycling – 2 TPD

4 List of waste to be handled and their

source along with mode of

transportation.

Hazardous wastes comprising viz. ETP

sludge, still bottom residues & process

sludge, spent carbon, evaporation salts,

Incineration ash, slags, spent catalysts &

resins, expired drugs, etc will be handled.

The sources of the hazardous waste are

industries present in the district and its

nearby districts.

The mode of the transportation is

dedicated trucks, having all necessary

documents, first aid kit, etc Transportation

will be done by dedicative vehicles having

manifest system.

5 Other chemicals and materials required

with quantities and storage capacities.

No major raw materials are required for the

proposed project

However typical reagents that would be


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited X/XIV

used for the stabilization process include

lime, fly ash, bentonite (clay), cement, saw

dust, etc., in combination with sodium

silicate solution, if required to create

additional binding properties of the wastes.

Diesel used as fuel for running DG set will

be stored in drums / tank.

6 Details of temporary storage facility for

storage of hazardous waste at project

site.

Wastes containing ignitable, reactive and

non-compatible characteristics will be

stored separately

Wastes containing volatile solvents or other

low vapour pressure chemicals will be

adequately protected from direct exposure

to sunlight

Storage of Incinerable hazardous waste:

Adequate storage space will be provided

with 15m distance between storage sheds,

fire break of at least 4m between two

blocks of stacked drums, maximum of 300

tons of waste storage limit in a block of

drums, at least 1m clear space between

two adjacent rows of drums in a pair for

routine inspection purpose.

7 Details of pre-treatment facility of

hazardous waste at TSDF/incineration

facility.

The hazardous waste shall be segregated

into direct landfillable and stabilization

followed by landfill, incinerable (calorific

value >/= 2500 K.Cal/kg), Recyclables, etc.

The hazardous waste which requires

stabilization will be sent to stabilization

shed, necessary ingredients suggested by

the laboratory will be added, properly

mixed and sent for landfill.


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited XI/XIV

The waste having high calorific value will be

sent to incinerator for incineration.

8 Details of air Emission, effluents,

hazardous/solid waste generation and

their management.

Details of air emissions proposed project

during construction and operation phases

are given in the chapter 4 section 4.5.1.

and section 4.6.2.

Details of the Effluents of the proposed

project is given in the chapter 4 section

4.6.1

Details of solid waste management for the

proposed project in given in chapter 4 and

section 4.6.5

9 The report will present a trend analysis

of base level quality before the existing

facilities came into existence, present

scenario (with the present activities

being fully commissioned) and the

projected impacts of the proposed

incinerator etc. as proposed.

Trend analysis of base level quality of Air

quality, ground water quality, noise, soil

quality of the existing facilities before came

into existence and present scenario given in

Annexure 2

The projected impacts of the proposed

incinerator is given in Chapter 4 section

4.6.2

10 Ground water quality analysis of the

peizometer wells installed in and around

the TSDF. Trend analysis of results w.r.t.

baseline data during initial project

establishment to be carried out

Total 7 piezometer wells installed in and

around the landfill site. Trend analysis of

the results are given in Annexure 3

Year wise monitoring report of Piezometer

wells given in Annexure 4

11 Requirement of water, power, with

source of supply, status of approval,

water balance diagram, man-power

requirement (regular and contract)

Details of water requirement is given in

Chapter 2 Section 2.10

Details of the power requirement for the

proposed project in given in chapter 2

section 2.11

Details of manpower requirement is given

in Chapter 2 Section 2.12


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited XII/XIV

12 Process description along with major

equipments and machineries, process

flow sheet (quantative) from waste

material to disposal to be provided

Process description of the proposed

facilities along with the major equipments

are discussed in details in chapter 2

13 Hazard identification and details of

proposed safety systems.

Hazard identification and proposed safety

systems are discussed detail in Chapter 7

14 Layout maps of proposed Solid Waste

Management Facilities indicating storage

area, incinerator plant area, greenbelt

area, utilities etc.

Layout of the existing PWMP TSDF site are

given in the Chapter 2 Figure 2-3

15 Details of effluent treatment and

recycling process

PWMP has been using Multiple Effect

Evaporator (MEE) to treat and reuse the

leachate collected from the secured landfill.

The capacity of the existing MEE plant is 10

KLD. Domestic Effluent will be 4 KLD is

treated through septic tank followed by

soak pit Details of the effluent treatment is

given in Chapter 2 section 2.5.

16 Leachate study report and detailed

leachate management plan to be

incorporated.

Collected leachate will be sent to grid

chamber thereafter sent to Oil & Gas Trap,

from O&G it will be further processed at

collection pit then it will be treated through

acid or alkaline or chemical precipitation.

After the treatment it will be further sent to

primary settling tank then to aeration

chamber. At next level the leachate will be

sent to secondary settling tank and finally

sent to treated water holding tank. Treated

Leachate will be finally reused as sprayer on

the landfill or sent for forced evaporation.

17 Action plan for measures to be taken for

excessive leachate generation during

monsoon period.

The following activities as a minimum

should be undertaken for the existing

landfill before on set of monsoon.

Cover the operating area of the landfill

temporarily during monsoon with

proper HDPE Liner (1.0 mm Thick)


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited XIII/XIV

Small operating area can be kept

available for disposing waste during non

-rainy days. To avoid or reduce storage

of waste in the temporary storage shed.

Provide proper gutter/drainage system

to drain off rain water fallen on the

waste storage sheds.

Ensure separation of leachate and storm

water drains carefully

Ensure cleaning of all the

sludge/dirt/soil in drainages (remove

blockages) for proper run off during

monsoon

Keep all the dewatering pumps (diesel

and electrical) ready including standby

pumps

Keep umbrellas, rain coats, gum boats

and other personal protective

equipment for the staff

Ensure proper insulation of all electrical

wire and avoid loose wires.

Avoid mixing rain water with leachate if

any.

Cover all the empty waste carrying

containers, drums etc., to avoid

generation of leachate

Avoid parking vehicles in the rain

18 Action plan for any pollution of ground

water is noticed during operation period

or post closure monitoring period.






metals.

19 Detailed Environmental Monitoring Plan

as well as Post Closure Monitoring Plan.

Detailed Environmental Monitoring Plan for

the proposed project given in Chapter - 6.

20 Public hearing to be conducted and

issues raised and commitments made by

Public Hearing was conducted on 30.6.2017

at 11:00am held at the main gate of the


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited XIV/XIV

the project proponent on the same

should be included in EIAIEMP Report in

the form of tabular chart with financial

budget for complying with the

commitments made.

existing TSDF of Ramky Enviro Engineers

Ltd (Unit: Punjab Waste Management

Project) located opposite M/s Vardhman

Chemtech Ltd, Village Nimbuan, P.O.

Rampur Sainia, Tehsil Dera Bassi, District

Mohali (S.A.S. Nagar). Sh. Charandev Singh

Mann, P.C.S. Additional Deputy

Commissioner, on behalf of Deputy

Commissioner, S.A.S Nagar (Mohali) and Er.

S.S. Matharu, Environmental Engineer,

Regional Office, Punjab Pollution Control

Board, S.A.S Nagar (Mohali) were present

and supervise the PH Proceedings. PH

Proceedings minutes, action Plan and

replies for all the issues raised in PH were

given in Annexure 5.

21 Any litigation pending against the project

and/or any direction/order passed by

any Court of Law against the project, if

so, details thereof shall also be included.

Has the unit received any notice under

the Section 5 of Environment

(Protection) Act, 1986 or relevant

Sections of Air and Water Acts? If so,

details thereof and compliance/ATR to

the notice(s) and present status of the

case.

No litigations pending against the project

22 A tabular chart with index for point wise

compliance of above TORs.

Noted and followed

Executive Summary

E x e c u t i v e S u m m a r y P a g e 1 | 7

Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal Facility at

Nimbua Village, Dera Bassi Tehsil, Mohali District, Punjab by

Punjab Waste Management Project (PWMP)

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

1. Introduction

Punjab Waste Management Project (PWMP), located at Nimbua Village, Dera Bassi

Tehsil, Mohali District, Punjab State has been providing hazardous waste disposal

services to industries in Punjab since 2007 through the Treatment Storage and Disposal

Facility (TSDF) having secured landfill and stabilization facilities (36,000 TPA Capacity).

PWMP proposes to enhance the waste disposal services by increasing the Capacities of

existing Direct Landfill (DLF) and Landfill after stabilization treatment (LAT) to 20,000 TPA

and 40,000 TPA respectively along with installing of hazardous waste incinerator – 500

kg/hr, bio-medical waste management facilities – 5 TPD , alternative fuels and raw materials

facility – 18,000 TPA, E-waste management facilities – 8,000 TPA and recycling facilities like

used oil recycling – 2 KLD, spent solvent – 5 KLD, lead recycling – 2000 TPA, paper recycling –

2 TPD, and plastic recycling – 2 TPD within the existing TSDF to make this facility an

Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage and Disposal Facility

(ICHWTSDF) in line with MOEF&CC guidelines.

2. Project Details

The TSDF facility is spread over an area of 20.74 acres in Nimbua Village. Power

requirement for the total facility is 813 KW and the water requirement is 56 KLD. Water

shall be sourced through borewells/tankers. The nearest city from the proposed site is

Dera Bassi (10 km –SW). Nearest railway station is Ghaggar railway station (7.5 km W)

and nearest airport is Chandigarh airport (14.5 km W).

3. Baseline Environmental Status

Field studies were carried out to establish the existing environmental status (air, water,

noise, soil, and ecology) and prevailing socio-economic conditions. A study area of 10 km

radius from the project site was identified to establish the present environmental and

socio-economic conditions. The baseline studies were carried out during the summer

season of March 2016 to May 2016.

During the study period, wind direction was predominantly recorded from NW to SE.

Calm condition prevailed for 12.4% of the total time and the average wind speed for the

season is 2.29 m/s.


Ambient Air Quality

High volume samplers were installed at 10 different locations for estimating the

particulate and gaseous pollutants. The monitoring locations were selected in downwind,

cross wind and upwind direction of the existing project location. At each location,

monitoring was carried out at a frequency of 2 days per week for 12 weeks during the

study period, as per the NAAQM guidelines.

PM2.5 levels were recorded in the range of 16.7-31.3 µg/m3 while PM10 levels were in the

range of 45.5-57.5 µg/m3. SO2 concentrations were in the range of 10.9-18.8 µg/m3 and

NOx concentrations were in the range of 18.8-25.6 µg/m3. Ammonia concentrations were

in the range of 10.3-16.6 µg/m3 and Ozone concentrations were in the range of 12.8-20.9

µg/m3. CO levels were in the range of 224-600 µg/m3. Benzene concentration was in the

range of 0.6 to 0.92 µg/m3. The observed concentrations were compared with CPCB

standards (National Ambient Air Quality Standards, 2009) and are found to be well within

the limits.

Water Quality Monitoring

A total of 10 ground water and 2 surface water samples were collected from different

sources within the study area and analyzed for all important physico-chemical

Characteristics to establish the quality of water prevailing in the project surroundings.

The ground water samples were drawn from the hand pumps and bore wells used by the

villagers for their domestic needs. Surface water samples were taken from the rivers in

the study area.

It is identified that the pH values of ground water were in the range of 7.08 to 7.57, while

pH values of surface water were in the range of 7.03 to 7.13. The TDS values of ground

water were in the range of 355 mg/l to 1330 mg/l, while the TDS values of surface water

were in the range of 402 to 424 mg/l. Chloride concentrations of ground water were in

the range of 10 mg/l to a maximum of 266 mg/l, while surface water values were in the

range of 52 to 54 mg/l. The hardness of ground water was in the range of 182 mg/l to

598 mg/l, while hardness of surface water was in the range of 180 to 222 mg/l.

Noise Monitoring

Noise levels were monitored at 10 locations within the study area, using a continuous

noise measurement device. The day levels of noise have been monitored during 6 AM to

10 PM and the night levels during 10 PM to 6 AM. The day equivalent values during the

study period were in the range of 51.1 to 53.6 dBA while the night equivalents were in

the range of 41.1 to 42.7 dB (A). From the results it can be seen that the day equivalent


values and the night equivalent values were within the ambient noise standards of

residential area.

Soil Quality

A total of 10 soil samples were collected from different locations within the study area.

The sampling locations were selected to assess the existing soil conditions representing

various land use conditions and geological features. From the analysis of soil samples, it is

found that in the study area, the pH values varied from 6.95 to 7.18, the organic carbon

varies from 0.43 to 0.65 %, the available Nitrogen from 189 to 286 kg/ha, the available

Phosphorus varies from 14 to 95 kg/ha and the available Potassium from 145 to 272

kg/ha.

Ecological Environment

A detailed study was carried out within 10 km radius area of the project site which

includes primary data generation through systematic studies to understand the existing

ecological status, fauna structure and important floristic elements. Secondary data was

collected from forest department. As per the primary survey details, some parts of the

land are fertile and support vegetation within some parts are devoid of any vegetation,

and agro- vegetation cover in the study area. There are no national parks, wildlife

sanctuaries, biosphere reserves and important bird areas within the study area. There are

no reports of occurrence of any Rare or Endangered or Endemic or Threatened (REET)

fauna in the study area. None of the species reported or recorded from the study area

are placed in Schedule I of the Indian Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972 and its subsequent

amendments.

Socio – Economic Environment

The socio-economic study adopts a two-fold methodology for data collection, namely,

review of published secondary data and analysis of primary data. The primary data was

collected through a range of research techniques and tools like transact walk,

administering structured questionnaire, Focus Group Discussions (FGDs), observation and

key stakeholder interactions in project area villages. Secondary data was collected from

district census statistics of 2011, which includes demography, occupational structure,

literacy profile and social structure etc.

The socio-economic study observed that 29.5% of the people belong to scheduled

category. The study area had an average family size of 5.3 persons per household. This

represents moderate family size and also found to be similar with other parts of the

district. To reiterate, the male and female constitute 53.6% and 46.4% respectively and

number of females per 1000 males is 867. The occupational structure of project area is


studied with reference to three categories viz. main workers, marginal workers and non-

workers. Non-workers are predominant in the study area with main workers, marginal

workers, and non-workers constituting to 34.3%, 4.6% and 61.1% of the total population

respectively. The study also noted that, a vast majority of the educated tribal youth are

also part of the non-working population as they do not have any job opportunities in the

area.

The socio-economic study revealed that the youth in the project area are devoid of

employment opportunities. They can be a potential source of workers with minimum

handholding and vocational education skills. The youth have expressed their willingness

to setting up of industries in the area as it provides them gainful employment

opportunities. The study also noted an active presence of women groups in the project

area villages. Many of these groups are acting as micro-finance entities, rotating small

amount of loans among the group members.

4. Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

The potential impacts on the environment from the proposed project are identified

based on the nature of various activities associated with the project implementation and

project operations (impacts during construction phase and operation phase).

Impacts during Construction Phase

Construction phase works include site clearance, site formation, building works,

infrastructure provision and any other infrastructure activities. The impacts due to

construction activities are short term and are limited to the construction phase. The

impacts will be mainly on air quality, water quality, soil quality and socio-economics. All

necessary control measures will be taken to minimize the impacts. As the project site is

already in operation and well maintained by levelling and developed with thick green

belt, there will not be any impact of dust or other pollution due to the proposed

activities.

Impacts during Operations Phase

During the operation phase of the proposed project there would be impacts on the air,

water and land environment and socio-economic aspects.

Impact on Air Quality

The main sources of air pollution include point source emissions from incinerator and DG

sets as well as emissions from landfill operations, bio-medical waste management facilities,

alternative fuels and raw materials facility, E-waste management and recycling facilities like

used oil recycling, spent solvent, lead recycling, paper recycling, and plastic recycling. For


estimation of post project scenario, maximum Ground Level Concentrations (GLC) of 24-

hour average for Particulate Matter (PM), SO2 and NOx were predicted and superimposed

on the corresponding maximum baseline concentrations. The overall scenario with

predicted concentrations over the maximum baseline concentrations of PM10 – 59.9

μg/m3, SO2 – 26.8 μg/m3, NOX – 36.9 μg/m3 and Lead – 0.12 μg/m3. All the predicted

concentrations falls within the prescribed National Ambient Air Quality Standards.

Incinerator will be equipped with all necessary Air pollution Control Devices (APCDs)

including spray drier, cyclone, high pressure venturi scrubber, wet alkaline scrubber, bag

filter etc. to comply with emission standards. Also incinerator will be provided with a

30m stack height. The emissions from DG sets will be minimal since they will be operated

only during power failure. All the vehicles will be regularly serviced and maintained

properly to minimize emissions. All the internal roads will be maintained properly to

maintain dust generation. Proper tree plantation/green cover will be maintained around

the project boundary.

Impact on Water Quality

The water requirement, 56 KLD for the proposed project shall be met through ground

water (i.e., existing borewell) or through tankers. Possible sources of wastewater from

the TSDF include: wastewater from APCDs of Incinerator, leachate from landfill

operations, vehicle washing, floor washing, blowdown from boiler and cooling tower etc.

Wastewater from incinerator, floor washing etc. shall be treated appropriately and

recirculated to fulfill water requirement of APCDs connected to incinerator. Leachate

from secured landfill shall be treated in Multiple Effect Evaporator (MEE). Sewage

generated will be treated in septic tank followed by soak pit or portable STP and the

treated water will be used for greenbelt development. Storm water drains shall be

provided throughout the facility and are connected to rain water collection chamber. The

rain water thus collected shall be used for greenbelt, vehicle washing etc. after

treatment, if necessary.

Impact on Land Environment

All the hazardous waste shall be stored in dedicated storage sheds with impermeable

flooring and closed roof, as per the applicable guidelines. Wastes such as incineration ash

generated during the process of incineration shall be stored in a separate area under

shed so as to avoid entry of rain water during the monsoon season. The leachate

generated from the land fill area is collected in the leachate holding tank and the

leachate is used back on the landfill for dust suppression, mixing in stabilization process,

etc. If any excess leachate is left over, it will be treated in spray dryer/MEE. As a result of


this there is no contamination of soil due to the wastewater generated and hence the

impacts due to the facility on the land environment are negligible.

Impact on Ecology

There are no ecological and otherwise sensitive areas viz. wildlife sanctuaries, national

parks, archeological important areas within 10km radius of the project site. There are no

known rare, endangered or ecologically significant animal and plant species. Due to the

development of green belt at the project vicinity, the impact on ecology will be minimal.

5. Impact on Socio Economics

The proposed facility is likely to provide direct and indirect employment and likely to

increase the socio-economic status of the nearby villages in the study area. Due to the

proposed project the facilities for public transport, water supply, telecommunications,

education, public health etc. are likely to improve. The proposed facility provides

treatment facility for all the hazardous waste generated from various industrial estates,

thus avoiding environmental damage due to unorganized disposal. The habitats in the

surrounding industrial estates are greatly benefited in terms of health status and

economy.

6. Environment Monitoring Program

Environmental monitoring program describes the processes and activities that need to

take place to characterize and monitor the quality of environment. Different activities

involved in the proposed project and their impact on various environmental attributes

have been taken into account while designing a detailed environmental monitoring

program. Environmental monitoring program has been prepared for the proposed

project for assessing the efficiency of implementation of Environment Management Plan

and to take corrective measures in case of any degradation to the surrounding

environment. Results of monitoring will be reviewed, analyzed statistically and submitted

to the concerned authorities.

Environmental Monitoring Program includes: (i) continuous online monitoring of the

incinerator stack emission for flue gas parameters, (ii) incinerator stack emission

monitoring to ensure compliance with emission standards, (iii) periodic analysis of water

from monitoring borewells, (iv) ambient air quality monitoring, (v) analysis of treated

wastewater, especially in case of discharge, (vi) periodic monitoring of incineration ash

and sludge etc., (vii) other parameters as prescribed in Consent for Operation (CFO) etc.

7. Environment Management Plan

The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is provided to ensure sustainable

development of the plant area and the surroundings. The EMP aims to control pollution


at the source level to the possible extent with the available and affordable technology

followed by the standard treatments before disposal of any effluents.

The proposed incinerator shall be equipped with all necessary APCDs including spray

dryer, cyclone, high pressure venturi scrubber, wet alkaline scrubber, bag filter etc. to

comply with prescribed emission norms. Necessary precautions shall be taken to

minimize odour and noise. Wastewater generated from the incineration plant, from floor

washing/vehicle and container washing shall be adequately treated and reused to meet

the water requirement of APCDs. Minimum 30% of the total plot area shall be developed

as greenbelt as per CPCB guidelines. The budget allocated for implementation of EMP is

Rs 3 Crores with a recurring cost of Rs. 30 lakhs per annum.

8. Project Benefits

The contribution of the proposed project on local social infrastructure is expected to be

significant. This Project will provide a significant amount of direct employment

opportunities to the local people. Budget allocated for under taking CSR activities is Rs.

20 lakhs initially for two years and 2% of net profit from third year onwards. Potential

benefits of the TSDF includes easy and economically viable waste disposal option for

industries, minimizing the pollution load on environment from industrial hazardous

waste, compliance with prescribed regulatory norms which in turn avoid the closure of

industry on account of violation of rules, reduction in number of hazardous waste dump

sites in the area, prevention of natural resource contamination etc.

9. Conclusion

The EIA study has made an overall assessment of the potential environmental impacts

likely to arise from the proposed project setting up in the existing Hazardous Waste

Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facility of Punjab Waste Management Project (PWMP).

Baseline data was collected for various environmental attributes so as to compute the

impacts that are likely to arise due to the proposed project which include emissions

arising out of the present TSDF activities.

The potential impacts on the environment from the proposed project are identified

based on the nature of various activities associated not only with the project

implementation and operation, but also on the current status of the environmental

quality at the project site. Mitigation measures are proposed to minimize the adverse

impacts if any due to the project in the form of Environment Management Plan. The

costing for each of the plant has been done based on land cost with respective civil,

building, plant and machineries. The total project cost is Rs. 35 crores.

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION


M/s Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited Page 1-1

Chapter 1

Introduction

1.1 Preamble

Punjab is an industrialized state of India accommodating almost all types of industries.

There are thousands of industries which generate hazardous solid waste. The hazardous

waste contain heavy metals, cyanides, complex aromatic hydrocarbons and other

chemicals which are toxic, flammable, reactive, corrosive or have explosive properties

affecting the environment.

1.2 Purpose of Report

The objective of this EIA study report is the description of those aspects of the project which

are likely to cause environmental impacts in and around the proposed project area and

identification of long-term, short-term, reversible and irreversible impacts on the

immediate environment. Based on the impact prediction, suitable management plan is to

be defined that will control and/or minimize the detrimental impacts. The environmental

impacts of any new or expansion project must be surveyed, forecasted and evaluated by

the project proponent in the process of designing the project. These results and findings

are then incorporated in the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Report.

Environmental Impact Assessment report has been prepared to comply with the Terms of

Reference (TOR) received from MoEF&CC F.No.10-27/2016-IA.III dated 4th May 2016 and

amended Terms of Reference (TOR) dated 9th February 2018. As per EIA Notification S.O.

No 1533 dated 14thSep 2006 and its subsequent amendments the proposed project falls

under Project / Activity 7 (d) Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage and Disposal

Facility (TSDFs), Category “A” (All integrated facilities having incineration & landfill or

incineration alone) and requires environmental clearance from the Expert Appraisal

Committee (EAC), MOEF&CC, New Delhi.

1.3 Identification of project, Project Proponent

1.3.1 Background of the Project

Supreme Court during the year 2003, issued directives to all the states for creating a hazardous

waste management facility in a time bound manner, and even appointed a monitoring

committee for overseeing the progress. Nimbua Greenfield (Punjab) Limited (NPGL) was, thus

promoted by a group of nine companies to develop and implement the project for creation of



IL&Fs which involved short listing of bidders in the 1st instance, NGPL awarded the contract for

design construction & operation of the facility to M/s Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited

Hyderabad, on design build and operate basis. Project was inaugurated on 3rd October 2007 by

Honourable Chief Minister of Punjab S. Parkash Singh Badal, in the presence of S. Manoranjan

Kalia Honourable minister of industries and S. Bikram Singh Majithi, Honourable Minister of

Environment, Science & Technology. Operations are continuing on the site since 2007, and

industry had already received about 170409 tonnes of waste for disposal till January 2016. The

existing CHWSTSDF has been granted CTO under the provisions of the Air (Prevention & Control

of Pollution) Act, 1981 and Water (Prevention & Control of Pollution) Act, 1974 vide letter no.

ZO-I/SAS/Nagar/APC/2011-12/F-158 and letter no. ZO-I/SAS/Nagar/WPC/2011-12/F-180

respectively and both Air and Water Act were further extended till 3/11/2019 vide letters dated

28/1/2015. The letters of the same are attached as Annexure – I.

a common facility for storage, treatment and disposal of hazardous waste being generated in

the state. NPGL appointed Infrastructure Leasing & Financial Service (IL&FS) for assistance in

the project development and in true spirit of private public participation, a grant of Rs. 12.69

crores for the project was sanctioned under Industrial Infrastructure Upgradation Scheme

(IIUS), by the Department of Policy Promotion, Ministry of Industry & Commerce Government

of India.

Project site at village Nimbua situated at about 10 Km from Dera Bassi, was finalized by Punjab

Pollution Control Board, after carrying out environmental impact assessment studies. Punjab

Government fully supported the project, and in the true spirit of Public/ Private sector

participation, concerted efforts were made by Principal Secretary & Technology as well as

chairman, PPCB for acquisition of 20.74 acres of land for the project, which was acquired by

Punjab Pollution Control Board and was given to the company for the Project on a nominal

lease. A high powered technical committee was constituted under the chairmanship of

Principal Secretary & Technology for approving all crucial matters like selection of

operators/pre- qualification of TSDF/ finalization of bids etc. Committee included

technical experts and representatives from PPCB, CPCB, Ministry of Environment & Forests,

NGPL as well as Punjab Industry.

M/s Tetra Tech. India Ltd. were appointed as consultants for carrying out detailed

inventorisation studies, and as per their report, about 1800 industries are generating about

36,000 tonnes of waste per annum. M/s Senes (India) Limited were appointed as technical

consultants for preliminary design and engineering study.

After going through a comprehensive and transparent bidding process, with the assistance of



1.3.2 Project

Punjab Waste Management Project (PWMP), a subsidiary of M/s. Ramky Enviro Engineers

Ltd, understands the increasing trend of waste disposal needs for industries. PWMP wants

to enhance the waste disposal services through inclusion of hazardous waste incinerator,

bio-medical waste management facilities, alternative fuels and raw materials facility, e-waste

management and recycling facilities like used oil recycling, spent solvent, lead recycling, paper

recycling, and plastic recycling within the existing TSDF. PWMP also wants to enhance the

existing treatment capacities of secured landfill/stabilization. The proposed facility details

are given in Table 1.1.

Table 1.1 Proposed Project Details

S.No. Facility Proposed Capacity

1 Direct Landfill (DLF) 20,000 TPA

2 Landfill after Stabilization Treatment (LAT) 40,000 TPA

3 Incineration (INC) – Common for HW and BMW 500 kg/hr

4 Biomedical Waste (BMW) 5 TPD

5 Alternative Fuels and Raw Materials Facility 18,000 TPA

6 E-Waste 8,000 TPA

7 Used Oil Recycling 2 KLD

8 Spent Solvent Recycling 5 KLD

9 Lead Recycling 2000 TPA

10 Paper Recycling 2 TPD

11 Plastics Recycling 2 TPD

1.3.3 Project Proponent

Punjab Waste Management Project is a division of Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited (REEL).

REEL set up India's first hazardous waste management facility at Hyderabad in 1998. Today,

the company operates 15 facilities in India that handle over a million tonnes of hazardous

waste annually. Over the course of thirteen years, the company has set up facilities in

abroad. Serving over 10,000 customers, the company manages 60% of the total industrial

waste generated in India and is present in 10 states.



1.4 Brief Description of Nature, Size, Location of the Project and its Importance to the

Country and Region

The project is proposed to treat and dispose the hazardous waste, bio medical waste, E

waste, Spent solvents and other miscellaneous waste generated in Punjab. The proposed

project will be designed on lines to meet the following rules.

Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules,

2016.

Details of the project site are given in Table 1.2

Table 1.2 Features of the Site

1 Total Land Area 20.74 acres

2 Survey Numbers 1/7, 1/13 to 1/18, 1/23, 1/24, 2/20 to 2/23, 10/1,

10/2, 10/3, 10/8, 10/9, 10/10, 11/2 to 11/9

3 Elevation Average elevation is 330 meters above MSL

4 Nearest Railway Station Ghaggar 7.5 km West

5 Nearest City Dera Bassi 10 km South West

6 Nearest Habitation Nimbua village 1 km South West

1.4.1 Importance of Project

There is a growing concern all over the country on the disposal of hazardous wastes, bio-

medical waste, e- waste generated from anthropogenic sources. The waste generators find

it difficult to dispose their hazardous wastes without causing environmental disturbance,

as very few appropriate disposal facilities are available. The Government of India has

promulgated the Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary

Movement) Rules, 2016 through the Ministry of Environment and Forests (MOEF) under

the aegis of Environment (Protection) Act EPA Act 1986. Also in order to encourage the

effective implementation of these rules, the MOEF has further amended the rules several

times.

The hazardous wastes need to be disposed of in a secured manner in view of their

characteristic properties such as toxicity, corrosivity, ignitability, reactivity and persistence.

A wide range of health hazards have been attributed to their contamination. A number of

Bio-Medical Waste Management Rules,2016

Plastic Waste Management Rules, 2016

E-Waste (Management) Rules, 2016

Battery management and handling rules 2010 and subsequent amendments.



options are available for the treatment and disposal of a variety of hazardous wastes

however the options available for hazardous waste management are not being efficiently

utilized by the waste generators resulting in severe pollution of land surface and ground

water.

At Treatment Storage Disposal Facility (TSDF), the wastes are collected from the waste

generators, treated as per their characteristics and finally disposed off. More than one unit

operation may be employed for the treatment and disposal of the wastes at TSDF.

However, the selection of a suitable site for an effective functioning of TSDF is the key

factor involved in the HWM. The site should be selected based upon several factors such

as waste characteristics, site characteristics, public acceptance and prevailing laws &

regulations.

1.4.2 Location of the Project

Punjab Pollution Control Board (PPCB) provided land to Nimbua Greenfield Punjab Ltd. on

lease basis. The land bearing Sy.No.1/7, 1/13 to 1/18, 1/23, 1/24, 1/25, 2/20, 2/21,2/22

2/23, 10/1, 10/2,10/3, 10/8, 10/9, 10/10, 11/2, 11/3, 11/4, 11/5, 11/6, 11/7, 11/8, 11/9

situated in Nimbua Village, Teh: Dera Bassi, Distt. Mohali (Punjab). This lease deed

between the Punjab Pollution Control Board as lesser and Nimbua Green Field Punjab Ltd,

as lessee (consortium) entered in 2005 at Chandigarh. The proposed site for setting up of

incinerator is located within the existing TSDF of PWMP at Nimbua Village, Dera Bassi

Tehsil, Mohali District, Punjab State. The location map of existing TSDF is shown in Figure

1.1.



Figure 1.1 Location Map of Existing Hazardous Waste TSDF at Nimbua Village



Figure 1.2 Topographical Map of the Study Area



1.5 Scope of the Study

The scope of the study is to carry out the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) studies

to identify, predict and evaluate potential environmental and socio-economic impacts

from the proposed facilities at existing Common Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage &

Disposal Facility.

The Study is aimed at:

Establishing the existing environmental conditions, identifying potential

environmental impacts and identifying areas of significant environmental concerns

due to the proposed project.

Prediction of impacts on environment, socio-economic conditions of the people

etc. due to the proposed project.

Preparation of Environmental Management Plan (EMP).

Development of post project environmental monitoring program.

The EIA study shall be conducted as per the applicable rules/guidelines of Ministry of

Environment and Forests, Govt. of India including general/sectorial provisions. The EIA

/study will necessarily include but not get restricted to the following:

a) Literature review

b) Field studies

c) Impact assessment and preparation of the EIA/EMP

Stage A

Establishing the relevant features of the project that are likely to have an impact on the

environment during construction and operation phase.

Stage B

Assessment of likely emissions from the proposed facility and impacts using scientific tools

to delineate post project scenario.

Stage C

Suggesting adequate pollution control measures to offset adverse impacts if any.

Preparation of the EIA and EMP document. Defense of the study findings before the

regulatory authorities.



An outline of the activities carried out in stages A, B, C are briefly described below.

Stage A

The study area shall be up to 10 km radial distance from the proposed project with

reference to air, water, soil, noise, socio economic and ecological studies. The baseline

environmental conditions shall be established using topo sheets, through literature survey

and field investigations. In addition to the above, information on the location of

towns/cities, national parks, wildlife sanctuaries and ecologically sensitive areas like

tropical forests, important lakes, bio-sphere reserves and sanctuaries within impact area

shall be furnished.

A review and analysis of the information available with various governmental, educational

and other institutions shall be carried out for each discipline. Based upon preliminary

review of the available data, detailed field work shall be planned to collect information on

the parameters critical to characterize the environment of the area. The baseline

environmental studies shall be undertaken for meteorology, air quality, noise, water

quality, water use, various aspects to be covered under different disciplines is as follows.

1. Meteorology

Following meteorological parameters of the area shall be measured at the project site. In

addition, data shall also be collected from the nearest IMD observatory for reference.

Temperature

Rainfall

Relative humidity

Wind speed and direction

2. Air Quality

Ambient Air Quality shall be monitored at requisite number of locations considering the

prevailing meteorological conditions, topography, nearby villages etc. The parameters for

monitoring shall be PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO, NH3, O3, lead, nickel, arsenic, benzene &

benzo (a) pyrene. Adequacy of the existing air pollution control measures shall be studied.

3. Noise

Noise monitoring survey shall be carried out to characterize the noise environment in the

study area. The noise level shall be measured using high level precision sound level meter

at suggested number of locations. Attenuation model shall be developed to predict the

noise level in the surrounding areas.



4. Water

Surface water samples and ground water samples within study area shall be collected and

analyzed for physico - chemical analysis covering major, minor ion and some important

heavy metals.

5. Land Environment

Soil samples were collected from the plant site, not only at its immediate vicinity but also

in the surrounding villages in a 10 km radial zone. Physico - chemical properties of the soils

shall be determined. Information on land use pattern in the study area shall be collected.

Information regarding existing cropping pattern, their types and yield of the crop shall be

collected from various sources. Based on the attenuation factors for dust aerosols and air

pollutants, green belt species shall be identified.

6. Ecosystem

Information on eco-system within 10 km radius shall be collected from the state

Agricultural and Forest departments. The important flora species native to the area shall

be enumerated. A test check survey shall also be under taken to judge the correctness of

the data collected.

7. Socio Economic Environment

A field survey shall be conducted within 10 km radius of the proposed project. The

parameters selected under socio-economic component shall be demographic structure of

the study area, provision of basic amenities, industries likely to come up in the study area,

welfare facilities proposed by the project proponent, safety training and management,

community and occupational health hazards. Relevant information shall be collected from

selected villages for analysis.

Stage B Assessment of Environmental Impacts of Proposed Project

With the knowledge of baseline conditions in the study area and proposed project

activities, impact on the environment shall be discussed in detail covering air emissions,

discharge of liquid effluents and particulates emission during construction, noise & solid

waste generation etc. Detailed projections shall be made to reflect the influence of the

proposed project on different environmental components.

Assessment of potential damage to terrestrial and aquatic flora and fauna due to air

emissions, discharge of effluents, noise pollution, ash disposal, and change in land use

pattern, habitat degradation and fragmentation, anthropogenic activities from the

proposed project and delineation of guidelines to minimize adverse impacts shall be done.

Assessment of economic benefits arising out of the project shall also be done.



Stage C Environmental Management Plan

At this stage, it may become apparent that certain mitigation measures are necessary to

offset the impacts from the proposed project. Environmental Management Plan and

pollution control measures shall be necessary to meet the requirements of the regulatory

agencies.

Environmental Management Plan shall consist of mitigation measures for item-wise

activity to be undertaken for construction and operation of the facility for its entire life

cycle to minimize adverse environmental impacts. It shall also delineate the environmental

monitoring plan for compliance of various environmental regulations.

1.6 Chronology of Events

Based on the proposed TOR and additional TOR issued by MOEFCC, the EIA report has been

prepared covering generic structure of Environmental Impact Assessment notification. To

chronology events for obtaining EC happened are given in Table 1.3

Table 1.3 Chronology of Events for Obtaining EC

Form 1 along with Pre-Feasibility

report uploaded MOEFCC online

portal to obtain TOR

Proposal No.

IA/PM/MIS/51358/2016

Dated 9th Mar 2016

Presented before EAC Committee

for obtaining TOR

F. No 10-27/2016-1A-III

4th Expert Appraisal Committee held

during 28th - 29th March 2016

Minutes Upload on Website F. No 10-27/2016-1A-III

Dated 11th April 2016

TOR Granted F. No 10-27/2016-1A-III

Dated 4th May 2016

TOR Amendment F.No 10-27/2016-1A-III

Dated 9th Feb 2018

CHAPTER 2

PROJECT DESCRIPTION



2. Chapter 2

Project Description

2.1. Need for the project

The primary objective of this project is to provide an Integrated Common Hazardous Waste

Treatment Storage Disposal Facility (ICHWTSDF) to cater the hazardous waste disposal needs

of the industries in the state of Punjab.

PWMP proposed to establish hazardous waste incinerator facility, bio-medical waste

management facility, Alternative Fuels and Raw material Facilities (AFRF), E-waste

management and recycling facilities for used oil, spent solvents, lead, paper, plastic within the

existing TSDF at Nimbua village so that the existing TSDF will become an Integrated Common

Hazardous Waste Management Facility (ICHWMF).

Objectives of the project include

To ensure that the environmental impacts are minimized.

To ensure that resource conservation is maximized.

To ensure techno-economic feasibility of the project.

To enable the TSDF to handle the hazardous wastes in a lawful manner.

To prevent accumulation of the hazardous wastes at the facility.

To establish an administrative framework and recommend necessary infrastructure to

ensure proper collection, transport, transit storage, treatment and disposal of the

hazardous wastes.

To minimize the health effects associated with hazardous waste handling and

management activities.

To ensure the technical reliability of the adopted technology in terms of safety,

flexibility and sustainability under local conditions.

To prevent or minimize waste generation.

To ensure compliance with regulatory requirements at every stage of hazardous waste

handling and disposal.

2.2. Project Location

The existing CHWTDSF is situated in Nimbua village, Dera Bassi, Mohali, Punjab. Figure 2.1

shows the site boundary on google map. Site features are presented in Table 2.1.



Table 2.1 Site Features Latitude & Longitude 30°36'40” N 76°55'20” E

Land Ownership PPCB to Nimbua Greenfeild Punjab Ltd. on lease basis

Land area Total land area - 20.74 Acres.

Nearest Village Nimbua – 1 km SW

Nearest City Dera Bassi - 10 km NW

Nearest Railway Station Ghaggar Railway Station – 7.5 km W

Nearest Airport Chandigarh - 14.5 km W

Nearest major Water bodies Medkhali nala - 1.2 km N, Dangri nadi - 3.4 Km N,

Ghaggar river - 5.5 km NW, Dudhdarh ki nadi - 3.0 km SE

Reserved Forests Kholhai Raitan reserve forest – 11.3 km N



Figure 2.1 Project Boundary on Google map

B



2.3. Existing Components in TSDF of PWMP

Following are the components existing in TSDF PWMP. Photographs of the existing sit is given

in Figure 2.2. The layout of the existing TSDF showing the location of the proposed incinerator

is shown in Figure 2.3.

Various components of the facility include:

Security room

Weigh bridge

Administration cum lab building

Vehicle maintenance shed

Vehicle parking area

Temporary waste stores

Waste stabilization unit

Multi Effect Evaporator (10 KLD) - Leachate treatment facility

D.G & Electrical panel room

Toilet block

Under ground water reservoir (4.40m depth)

Three solar evaporation pond (capacity 400 KL)

Storm water pond

Intractable waste stores

Secured landfill area

Sample collection platform

Water supply, electrical network, roads, storm water drainage, monitoring borewells

etc.

Firefighting& occupational safety equipment.



Figure 2.2 Site Photographs

Main Gate

Administration Block

Secured Landfill

Storage Facility

Laboratory Multiple Effect Evaporator



Figure 2.3 Layout of the existing Common Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage Disposal Facility, PWMP



2.3.1. Activities Associated with Operation of TSDF

The following general guidelines shall relate to daily activities associated with the operation of

TSDF:

The facility operates during day light hours throughout the year.

A security system has been maintained to avoid trespassing and hazard to the public.

The weigh bridge at the main entrance records all movements and weights and receive

waste tracking receipt as required by the waste manifest system.

A waste manifest system has been developed in accordance with the requirement of

the regulatory agencies to cover the transportation of the waste to TSDF and to provide

record of waste manifestation. The manifest system shall include details of the waste

generator, waste transporter, quantity of waste, characteristics of waste, physical

description, consistency of waste in terms of physical state and waste category number

as per HW (M&H) Rules, 2016.

Once a waste is received at the TSDF, a sample of waste is collected at the sampling

bay/temporary storage facility and undergoes laboratory analysis based on which its

pathway of treatment/ disposal shall be determined.

Each load of waste arriving at the facility shall be located properly and logged to identify

its pathway of treatment/ storage/ disposal by well-established laboratory as per

guidelines, waste analysis protocols and waste acceptance criteria as per Annexures I

to III.

The landfill will be staged in cells so that the minimum practical area of waste is exposed

and maximum practical area of waste has the final cap in place i.e., progressive filling

and capping of the landfill ensuring minimization of infiltration of wastes.

Monitoring and auditing of the facility shall be performed on a periodic basis.

Meteorological data is recorded on continuous basis round the clock.

2.3.2. Flow Path of Wastes at CHWTSDF

Outline pathway for waste manifestation within the HWTSDF shall be as below:

Comprehensive analysis of the waste - Laboratory facilities

Decision of waste pathway of treatment/ storage/ disposal

Collection and transportation of wastes.

Weighing and recording of waste receipt.

Sample collection (representative)

Storage at the temporary storage area.

Analysis (finger printing)

Waste disposal advise based on waste acceptance criteria

Waste treatment/ storage/ recycling /disposal.



2.4. Waste Disposal Operations

2.4.1. Waste Stabilization

Waste stabilization is designed to convert industrial wastes in the form of liquids, semi-

solids or reactive solids into low leachable materials that can be deposited into a secured

landfill. The stabilization operation will be carried out for all waste that requires this to

minimize their contaminant leaching potential. This will change the nature of these wastes

to a less hazardous category. Stabilization involves the immobilization of leachable

materials by fixation as non-reactive solids. The treated wastes shall be assessed for

compatibility with other wastes before being landfill and for compatibility with the HDPE

and the pipe network. The term stabilization covers a number of mechanisms including:

Immobilization / Chemical Fixation – the chemical binding of contaminants within

a cementing structure to reduce the mobility or leachability of the waste.

Encapsulation – the occlusion or entrapment of contaminant particles within a solid

matrix.

Solidification – the conversion of slurries that do not readily de-water, into solids

by addition of adsorption agents.

Typical reagents that would be used for the stabilization process include cement, lime, fly

ash, bentonite clay, saw dust and other. Where required sodium silicate solution would be

used as an additive binding agent. The reagent to be used for stabilization shall be decided

depending upon the type of the waste to be stabilized, price and availability. These regents

shall generally be Stored in sufficient quantities. The Infrastructure proposed for the

stabilization unit would include:

Storage facilities for regents

Tanks/Drums for storage of reagents as required

Stabilization bins for mixing the wastes

Earth moving equipment for movement of wastes and mixing.

Place for curing the treated waste

Trucks for hauling the wastes.

Treatment facility utilizes a range of techniques and processes designed to change the

physical, chemical or biological characteristics of the waste. This may include changing the

composition so as to neutralize the waste, to recover energy or natural resources from the

waste, to render the waste non-hazardous or less hazardous, safer to transport, store, or

dispose off or to reduce its volume. Typical operations at Stabilization unit are as follows:

Waste receive

Reagent addition



Mixing

Curing

Analysis of the stabilized wastes

Approval by the laboratory for disposal

Transfer of the waste materials to the truck

Disposal in the secured landfill

Application criteria: A study of the waste characteristics carried out as an integral part of

the project indicates the following applicability to the processed described below in Table

2.2

Table 2.2 Stabilization Mechanism based on Waste Characteristics

Mechanism Applicability

Immobilization / Chemical

Fixation

Heavy metal and metal plating sludge

Copper-chromium-arsenic wood preservative wastes

Mercury waste

Bag house dust

Tannery wastes

Spent catalysts

Others

Solidification Effluent treatment plant sludge

Oil and paint sludge

Bitumen wastes

Textile industry sludge

Wool scouring slurries

Others

Encapsulation

Aluminum powder

Asbestos

Filer aids

Others

2.4.2. Secured Landfill

The landfill will be designed and constructed as a secure facility to contain the waste

material and any leachate, which is formed by the entrapped moisture or by infiltration of

rainfall. To meet these requirements, the base of the landfill has been designed as an

engineered liner constructed prior to the placement of waste and also an engineered

capping over the surface after completion of filling to minimize the infiltration of rainfall.



permeability less than 10-9 m/s and above this shall be a HDPE liner with permeability less

than 10–14 m/s above which a complete drainage system shall be placed. Above the

secondary base liner shall be placed a primary liner comprising of primarily clay layer and

HDPE membrane which will prevent infiltration into the secondary layer. A leachate

collection and removal system shall also be placed over the primary liner to collect and

remove any leachate generated by infiltration of precipitation or by the moisture

entrapped in the waste. This makes the secondary system to serve as a leak detection

system and an early warning of potential future liabilities to necessitate action for

remediation. Above the drainage system of the primary liner shall be placed a geo-textile

filter to act as a filter/ barrier between the waste and the drainage system. This entire

system would make the base liner a double composite liner meeting the national laws.

Clay Liner consists of a varying proportions of hydrated aluminum silicates (e.g. kaolnite,

bentonite, illite and montmorillonite) which, when properly compacted, form a soil mass

with a very low hydraulic conductivity. The clay material for use as the liner at this landfill

shall be analyzed and permeability testing shall be carried out to ascertain its low

The base liner of the landfill containment system is proposed to be a double composite

liner with synthetic geo-membrane plus clay. Adequate leachate collection system shall be

incorporated at the base to collect and remove the leachate. These shall incorporate HDPE

pipes embedded in drainage layers of sand/ gravel and /or geonet/ geotextile. The

composite liner (Secondary liner) shall comprise of a 450mm thick clay compacted to a

permeability. Design permeability of the clay liner has been fixed at 10–9 m/s and with

availability of clay liner; we will be able to achieve better results than the design values.

Placement of clay liner shall be most critical in terms of its efficiency of functioning. Clay

should be placed in layers not exceeding 600-mm and shall be compacted to attain the

required permeability. The clay layer after attaining the 450mm thickness should be

then checked for its permeability. Further to this, clay shall be kept moist to ensure that it

does not dry up and cause cracks to the lining system. To ensure this we intend to keep

the clay for the purpose at +4% wet of optimum moisture content.

Synthetic Liners consists of various synthetic flexible membrane liners have been

considered for use as the primary liner at the proposed landfill. Both Poly-Vinyl Chloride

(PVC) and High – Density Polyethylene (HDPE) liners are generally suitable for this landfill.

Tensile strength is a fundamental design consideration in order to assess the ability of the

liner to resist uniaxial and biaxial strains, which occurs in the landfill. Another stress strain

consideration is the coefficient of thermal expansion. Considering various membrane

properties it is decided to use HDPE liner with appropriate thickness as primary liner for

the base of the landfill. HDPE was selected for the following reasons:



Adequate strength to withstand mechanical strength during construction,

placement and operations.

Acceptable weathering performance.

Superior physical properties under chemical and environmental exposure to wastes

Capability to withstand the seaming process.

The hydraulic conductivity of HDPE is of the order of 0.5*10–16 m/sec, which is effectively

impermeable. Construction of the seam welding process shall be subjected to strict QA/QC

measures to ensure the integrity of the liner.

Secure Landfill is the final placement area for land fillable hazardous wastes which are

treated or wastes does not require treatment. Waste directly or after treatment will be

disposed in the landfill as per the laboratory advice. Waste will be spread in the landfill

using heavy earth machinery and then compacted using vibro compactor. At the end of the

landfill operations 10 – 15 cm soil cover is placed as a daily cover.

During rainy season a flexible geo-membrane cover shall be placed over the uncapped area

of the landfill minimize infiltration of rainfall into the landfill; the rain water shall be

diverted to join the surface water drains. At the end of the total landfill operations the final

capping shall be done using composite liner with clay and synthetic geo-membrane, with

vegetative soil cover grass cover. The cross section of the landfill meeting MOEF Guidelines

is given in Figure 2.4

Figure 2.4 Cross section of the landfill



2.5. Proposed Hazardous Waste Incinerator

The list of components proposed to be setup along with incinerator are given in Table 2.3

Table 2.3 Proposed Components for Incinerator setup

S.No List of Components Description

1.

Rotary Kiln System with

Shell of IS : 2062 Grade “A”

Riding rings with mountings

Girth gear with support brackets and

bolts

Kiln drive assembly with VVVF drive

Support roller assembly

Trunnion & thrust roller assembly

Sealing arrangement

Refractory material

Cart dumping system

Charging hopper

2. Inlet head with following material

handling arrangement

Ram feeding system

Refractory for inlet head

Ash conveyor

Refractory material

3. Discharge breeching with CS shell

Emergency vents

4. Single drum pyrolyser with the

following

Isolation damper

Refractory material

Combustion system

Ducting

Emergency stack

Refractory material

5. Secondary combustion chamber

with

CS vessel

SS distributor

6. Spray dryer with the following

Disc atomizer with motor

Refractory material

Effluent pumping unit

Pipe line connections

Cooling air fan

Rotary valve

Shell of SS construction with CS

supports




Rotary valve

7. Multi cyclones

Lime silo with discharge bin

Carbon storage hopper with bag

holding mechanism

8. Reagent System which includes

the following

Screw feeder for both Lime &

activated carbon

Venturi Injection system with roots

blower

Interconnecting pipe lines

CS Housing, hopper and manifold

Compressed air header and blow-

tubes

9. Bag filter modules

Rotary air lock

Filter bags of PTFE membrane on fiber

glass

Bag cages

Pulse valve

Timer and sequence controller

Inlet butterfly valve, Outlet poppet

valves and bypass valve

Internal coating,

External insulation.

Hopper heaters & pneumatic

vibrators

CS packed bed chamber

Pre quench

10. Wet scrubber with the following

Packing materials

Scrubbing liquid circulation system

Caustic dosing system

Re-circulation tank

Sampling ports

Platform with ladder

11. Stack of 40m height with the

following:

Aviation lamp

Lightning arrestor

Drain point

Man hole

As per layout with refractory material.




Kiln energetic liquid / waste oil lance

12. Interconnecting ducting Kiln aqueous waste / water spray

lance

13. Combustion system for rotary kiln

with

Kiln auxiliary clean fuel oil burner with

supply train

Burner and lance supply train

components

Fuel supply piping train components

Energetic liquid / waste oil lance

Auxiliary clean fuel oil burner with

supply train

14. Combustion System for SCC with

Burner and lance supply train

components

Fuel supply piping train components

Fuel pump with motor

Liquid waste pump with motor

15. Rotary equipment includes

Aqueous waste pump with motor

Evaporator cooler pump

Scrubber recirculation pumps

Caustic dosing pumps

C.A. fan

ID fan

Local push buttons

Electrical cables and connectors

16. Electrical panel as per drive list

Cable trays and supports

Allen Bradley make

Power supply with cable

17. PLC system

PC interface with PC and laser printer

Analog input and output cards

Fused digital input and output cards

KT interface card

I/O chassis

Fuel

High energy liquid waste

18. Day tanks Aqueous waste

Caustic lye

19. Instruments as per P& I diagrams




20. Piping within the battery limit

21. Piping with fittings, valves, hardware required

2.5.1. Concept of Incineration

Incineration is an ultimate treatment process, applied to certain wastes that cannot be recycled,

reused or safely deposited into a landfill. It is a high temperature, thermal destruction oxidation

process in which hazardous waste is converted in the presence of oxygen in air into gases and

incombustible solid residue. The gases are vented into the atmosphere after cleaning as

deemed necessary, while the solid residue is sent to landfill for disposal.

The proposed incinerator would cater for the disposal/ destruction of the following wastes:

Spent solvents

Waste oils, oil emulsions and oil mixtures

Pesticide waste

Refinery waste

Pharmaceutical waste

Phenolic waste

Grease and wax waste

Organic waste containing halogens, sulfur, phosphorous or nitrogen compounds

Solid materials contaminated with oils.

Organics with high calorific value.

The Incineration system is designed to handle the following wastes from various Industries:

Solids, semi-solid and tarry drummed wastes as made available in packets of definite

size and weight.

Pumpable energetic liquid organic wastes free from suspended solids.

Pumpable aqueous wastes with limits as to TDS& free from suspended solids.

Advantages of Incineration

The following advantages of incineration of hazardous wastes

Ability to handle heterogeneous waste.

High efficiency due to.

o Vigorous mixing in the bed.

o High retention time.

Low NOx formation due to

o Lower operating temperature.

o Low excess air.



In bed neutralization possible for removing acid gasses.

Quick restart due to heat stored in the bed.

Absence of moving parts hence low maintenance.

Flexibility to handle diverse fuels.

Residence time can be adjusted by varying kiln speed.

Waste feeding without much preparation.

Waste heat recovery is possible.

Gas cooling systems can be fixed.

Well Scrubbing systems can be added.

Temperature control for constant efficiency

Air control for adequate excess air.

Interlocks for safe operational shut down.

2.5.2. Incineration System Design

An incinerator consists of a burner which ignites the supplied fuel and combustibles in the waste

feed in a combustion chamber. Thermal destructions of most organic compounds occur at a

temperature between 850oC to 1150oC. To achieve thermal destruction, residence time usually

ranges from 30 to 90 minutes for solid waste and 0.5 to 2.0 seconds for liquid waste. Turbulent

mixing is important because the waste and fuel must contact the combustion gases if complete

combustion has to occur. Sufficient oxygen must be present and is supplied as ambient air or

as pure oxygen through an injection system.

A typical incineration system consists of several distinct units. The first unit is the kiln or primary

combustion chamber, in to which waste is fed and in which initial volatilization and destruction

of contaminants take place. Gases formed during incineration in the kiln include incombustible

organics or combustion by-products, which are generally referred as Products of Incomplete

Combustion (PIC). These PIC's are drawn to a secondary combustion chamber to inverse the

efficiency of destruction of PIC's. Residual bottom ash produced typically exits in the kiln

through a gravity drop and then cooled before disposal into the landfill. The off-gases from

secondary chamber is routed through an air pollution control system in which gases are cooled,

particulate matter is removed and final flue gases are emitted through a stack. The capacity

details of proposed incinerator are given in Table 2.4.



Table 2.4 Technical Details of Incinerator setup

S.No. Details

1 Incinerator capacity 1.5 Million Kcal/hr

2 Quantity of hazardous waste 500 kg/hr

3 Calorific value 2500 - 4500 Kcal/kg

4 Water requirement 10 KLD (MEE Codensate)

6 Fuel requirement HSD/ Furnace oil: 30L/ hr,

The incinerable wastes shall be pre-processed if necessary for making it to make its calorific

value uniform. The norms of halogen concentrations are maintained to less than 1%. Waste fed

through cart dumper and ram feeder into the rotary kiln and the hot gases are sent to the

secondary combustion chamber. Temperature at SCC will be min. 1100°C for waste with a gas

residence time of 2 seconds. The residence time and the desired temperatures are maintained

at both primary and secondary combustion chambers for complete combustion as per

guidelines for hazardous waste incineration. The gases after complete combustion shall be sent

to spray dryer/evaporative cooler for cooling followed by gas cleaning equipment. The

Schematic diagram of incineration process is shown in Figure 2.5.

The gases are passed through multi cyclones for removal of particulates. Then dry lime and

activated carbon are injected for neutralization of acidic gases and removal of organic

constituents if any. The flue gases are then passed through bag filters for complete removal of

particulates and then through wet alkaline scrubber for neutralization. The flue gases after

complete cleaning in all respects shall be sent out through a 30 m stack.



Figure 2.5 Schematic Diagram of Incineration Process

2.5.3. Collection and Transportation

For collection and transportation, own vehicles as per demand will be provided. Type of

vehicles used will be of relevant capacity (crane mounted / containerized collection and

loading vehicles /covered trucks / trucks having pneumatic loading / unloading

arrangements). For the existing vehicles the 7 copy manifest system and TREM card system

as per the Hazardous Waste Rules are implemented.

Experienced drivers are selected for the purpose. Eligibility shall be minimum 10th Standard

pass. They are trained in operating the manifest system and management of TREM card

system. As a practice a trained driver and helper was accompany the truck to ensure that

the manifest system and TREM card arrangement are properly maintained. Drivers and

helpers shall be trained to take care of pollution arising out of emergency and first aid in

case of injuries.

Washing of tanker/ container and disposal of effluent: Each container of vehicle shall be

thoroughly washed prior to being sent to the industry for collection of waste. The collected

water shall be treated and shall be taken to the leachate treatment facility.



The manifest system shall contain information regarding:

Details of waste generator

Details of waste transporter

Quantitative and qualitative description of waste materials.

Consistency of the waste

Waste category number and characteristics

Precautionary measures for handling the wastes

Emergency procedures to be followed.

The 7 copies of the system shall be distributed as outlined below:

Copy 1 (White): To be forwarded to SPCB/PCC by the occupier

Copy 2 (Yellow): To be signed by the transporter and retained by the occupier

Copy 3 (Pink): To be retained by the operator of a facility

Copy 4 (Orange): Too be returned to the transporter by the operator of facility after

accepting the waste

Copy 5 (Green): To be forwarded to the SPCB/PCC by the operator of facility after

disposal.

Copy 6 (Blue): To be returned to the occupier by the operator of the facility after

disposal.

Copy 7 (Grey): To be sent by the receiver to the SPCB of the sender in case the

sender is in another State.

All other records in respect of the TSDF operation shall be maintained properly and kept

available to regulators as and when required.

2.5.4. Storage of Incinerable Hazardous Waste

An incinerable waste storage shed with adequate capacity as per guidelines will also be

established as a necessary infrastructure. The design of storage shed will be considered as per

following requirements.

Minimum of 15m distance between storage sheds.

Deck wall of at least 1-2 m between two blocks of stacked drums.

Maximum of 300 T incinerable waste storage limit in a block of drums.

At least 1m clear space between two adjacent rows of drums in a pair for routine

inspection purposes.

Spillage or leakage control measures to be adopted in the event of any leakage or

spillages.

Record keeping and maintenance of shed.



Fire detection, protection and safety measures as well as performing safety audits every

year by the operator of the facility and externally once in two years by a reputed expert

agency.

Storage area shall be designed in such a way that the floor level is at least 150m above

the maximum flood level.

Signboards showing precautionary measures to be taken, in case of normal and

emergency situations shall be displayed at appropriate locations.

2.5.5. Laboratory Facilities

The existing laboratory facility will be used for tests to be conducted at incineration facility with

an objective to study the following:

Storage and feeding requirements: Physical form of waste, pH, hazardous waste

properties such as inflammability, reactivity, compatibility with other wastes etc. for

segregating the waste and to store accordingly, in order to suit feeding mechanism.

Operating conditions of the furnaces: Viscosity, moisture content, total organic carbon,

calorific value, volatility of the waste, special incompatible wastes, inorganic salts,

metals etc.

Air pollution control devices: Chlorides and other halogens, sulfur, nitrates, mercury,

other heavy metals etc. The laboratory of the TSDF facility shall be capable of

monitoring all the parameters prior to disposal.

2.5.6. Waste Feeding

Waste-feeding plays an important role to achieve desired combustion efficiencies. Continuous

feeding of homogeneous waste having same/similar calorific value to the combustion

chambers is the desired option. However, often maintaining homogeneous feed of waste is not

feasible due to incompatibility of different wastes for mixing. Conventionally, hazardous wastes

in solid form are fed through a hydraulic system, which will have automatic two gates i.e. once

the outside plate is closed, inner side plate is opened and solid waste mass is hydraulically

pushed inside the kiln and once the inner side plate is closed, outer plate is opened for the next

batch of solid waste. This system, besides negative pressure in the combustion chamber is

required to ensure safety and to prevent workmen exposure to thermal radiation.

2.5.7. Combustion Chambers

Incineration plant shall be designed, equipped, built and operated in such a way that after the

last injection of combustion air, the gas resulting from the process is raised in a controlled and

homogenous fashion.



Incineration plant will be equipped with one auxiliary burner which would be switched on

automatically with the temperature of the combustion gases after the last injection of

combustion air falls below specified temperature. It will also be used during plant startup and

shut-down operations in order to maintain the minimum specified temperature at all times

during operation and as long as unburnt waste is in the combustion chamber.

The burners will be pressure-atomized type with approved certification from the Bureau of

Indian Standards or equivalent.

Kiln and secondary combustion chamber of the incinerator will be made of mild steel

conforming to IS: 2062 and of suitable thickness lined with high-grade refractory and insulation,

so as not to buckle in or bulge out.

Combustion chambers (kiln & secondary combustion chamber) will be designed to supply with

excessive air to ensure complete burning of wastes. The blower will be provided with

appropriate capability to supply combustion air. Incinerator facility will have a window fitted

with safety view glass to view the kiln (axially) and flame in secondary combustion chambers.

As the common incineration systems will be handling wastes having varying heat value, and

while ensuring Total Organic Carbon (TOC) and Loss on Ignition (LOI) requirements in the

ash/slag, there are possibilities for sudden rise of temperatures in the kiln. Therefore, the

facilities will be designed with thermal refractory bricks and insulation capable of withstanding

a minimum temperature of 1,300°C (typically, corundum / chromium bricks). Interlocking

arrangements for CO and temperature controls (in primary and secondary chamber) with

feeding devices will also be provided.

All the burners will be equipped with automatic flame control system. Exit doors will be

provided at suitable place, one each on the primary kiln and the secondary chamber of the

incinerator for ease in inspection and maintenance.

2.5.7.1. Rotary Kiln

To maintain designed heat capacity of the kiln, quantity of the solid waste injection package

(kg/single injection) will be adjusted w.r.t. calorific value of the waste feed. When a high calorific

value possessing solid waste is injected in packets, the size of each injection will be reduced,

such that the peak CO concentration in the kiln does not exceed too high in the initial stage,

creating shooting of emissions to the secondary chamber, thereby crisis in ensuring the

required retention time.



Appropriate slope (in general, 3 degrees), rotation rates (around 10 RPH) and solid waste

residence time (1-10 hr) will be adjusted for the kilns, in order to achieve total organic carbon

(TOC) and loss on ignition (LOI) requirements in the ash/slag.

In the rotary kiln, the temperature will be maintained at 800+°C in order to complete burning

of solid waste. Controlled flow of air will be maintained for complete volatilization of solid

waste.

2.5.7.2. Secondary Combustion Chamber

Minimum temperature requirement in the secondary combustion chamber is 1100 °C. The

design and operating conditions will be a minimum of 2 seconds residence time in the

secondary combustion chambers, under critical feed conditions, so as to bring complete

combustion of volatile matter evolved from the primary combustion chamber.

2.5.7.3. Pollution Control Devices

There are many combinations of treatment units installed for gas cleaning and removal of air

pollutants, to comply with the standards. Designed treatment scheme will comprise of

following equipment, in combination, with adequate efficiencies to meet the emission

standards:

Dioxins: Keeping De-novo synthesis in the backdrop, steps must be taken to prevent

reformation of dioxins by rapidly lowering the flue gas temperatures, particularly from 500 °C

to less than 200 °C by adopting rapid quench/catalyst/adsorption by activated carbon etc.

Particulate matter: Fine particulates in the flue gases require specific dust separation

technologies such as bag filters, electro static precipitator etc. in order to meet flue gas

standard. In case of electro static precipitators, special care is required to avoid electric sparks

due to the dust to avoid reformation of dioxins and adsorption to the fine dust.

Mercury: If the feeding waste contains mercury and its compounds, there is a chance of these

emissions to get air borne. Therefore, requires specific treatment for control of these emissions.

(Ex. activated carbon, conversion into mercuric chloride and then to mercuric sulphide etc.)

SO2: Sulfur in the feeding waste upon thermal oxidation forms sulfur dioxide, which requires

control measures to meet the standard. Conventional method is followed in which scrubbing

by alkali (alkali dry / wet scrubber with hydrated lime or sodium hydroxide injection) is done.

HCl & HF: In order to control halogen emissions to the desired level, in particular chlorides and

fluorides, conventional water/alkali scrubbers are in use.



Mist: Often there is a need to eliminate the mist in the stack emissions, therefore, wherever

necessary de- mister may be provided.

Stack height: Stack height shall not be less than 30 meters, in any case. A Stack height

requirement based on sulfur dioxide emissions by using the equation - stack height = 14 (Q)0.3

[Where, Q is the emission rate of SO2 in kg/hr] By using simple Gaussian plume model to

maintain ambient air quality requirements for all concerned parameters, in the receiving

environment.

2.6. Bio-medical Waste Management Facility

Growth in population, industrialization and changing life styles and food habits have

brought with it various health related issues. More and more people are suffering from

ailments. Alongside this is the growing awareness towards utilizing proper medical

facilities. This has created the need for a whole range of health care establishments,

hospitals, clinics, laboratories which are generating “Bio-Medical Wastes” that are

incompatible with the environment. These wastes need professional attention for effective

management as the infectious nature of the waste can cause irreparable damage to the

human health and the environment. It has become imperative to monitor and control the

management and handling of these wastes.

The concern about disposal of infectious wastes generated by the hospitals is increasing

rapidly due to the fear of the spread of viruses such as Acquired Immune Deficiency

Syndrome (AIDS) and Hepatitis B. These wastes (bio-medical wastes generated from health

care establishments) present a high risk of causing potential damage to the human health

and the environment by way of spreading. To prevent the spread of such infectious wastes

that finds its genesis in bio-medical wastes (from hospitals, clinics, laboratories,

dispensaries etc.) a scientific approach is required. It is essential that professionally trained

personnel should handle the wastes and that the wastes should be disposed scientifically.

To enable effective management and handling of the bio-medical wastes, the Ministry of

Environment and Forests Climate Change (MOEFCC) has issued regulations for the

management and handling of these wastes. In response to these rules, Government and

major Private Hospitals initiated their arrangements for treatment and disposal of bio-

medical wastes. However, the smaller nursing homes, clinics and other similar institutions

which do not have or can afford such facilities need alternate modalities and arrangements

to dispose their wastes, in accordance with the Rules.



In view of the difficulties faced by private hospitals, nursing homes and clinics that could

not make their own arrangements due to high cost involved in setting up treatment and

disposal facilities, the need for a centralized system for treatment was felt.

Consequentially, in September 2003, the Central Pollution Control Board enunciated the

“Guidelines for Common Bio-Medical Waste Treatment Facility” which in addition to

providing common facilities discouraged the setup of individual incineration facilities by

health care establishments.

2.6.1. Categories of Bio-medical Waste as per BMW Rules, 2016.

According to the BMW Management Rules 2016, the waste is classified in to four categories. A brief description of different categories of BMW, type and colour coding of bags/container along with treatment and disposal are given in Table 2.12.

Table 2.5 Categories of Bio-medical Waste

Category

Type of Waste Type of Bag/ Container

Treatment and Disposal options (as per BMW Rules, 2016)

Treatment / Disposal

Yellow (a)Human Anatomical Waste

Yellow coloured non-chlorinated plastic bags

Incineration or Plasma Pyrolysis or deep burial

Incineration (b)Animal

Anatomical Waste Incineration

(c)Soiled Waste Incineration deep burial or Plasma Pyrolysis/ Autoclaving or micro-waving/ Treated waste to be sent for energy recovery.

Incineration

(d)Expired/Discarded Medicines

antibiotics, cytotoxic drugs including all items contaminated with cytotoxic drugs along with glass or plastic ampoules, vials

Yellow coloured

non-chlorinated

plastic bags

Expired cytotoxic drugs to be returned back to the manufacturer for incineration at temperature >12000C or to Common facility for incineration or Encapsulation or Plasma Pyrolysis.

Incineration



Category




(e)Chemical Waste

Chemicals used in production of biological and used or discarded disinfectants.

Yellow coloured containers/ non-chlorinated

plastic bags

Disposed of by incineration/or Plasma Pyrolysis/ Encapsulation in hazardous waste treatment, storage and disposal facility.

Incineration

(f)Chemical Liquid Waste: Liquid waste generated due to use of chemicals in production, Silver X-ray film developing liquid, discarded Formalin, infected secretions

Separate collection system leading to effluent treatment system

After resource recovery, the chemical liquid waste shall be pre-treated before mixing with other wastewater. The combined discharge shall conform to the discharge norms

Not accepted at the CBWTF

(g)Discarded linen, mattresses, beddings contaminated with blood or body fluid.

Non-chlorinated yellow plastic bags or suitable packing material

Non- chlorinated chemical disinfection followed by incineration/Plasma Pyrolysis/ for energy recovery.

Incineration

(h)Microbiology, Biotechnology and other clinical laboratory waste: Blood bags Lab cultures, stocks or specimens of microorganisms, live or attenuated vaccines, human and animal cell cultures used in research, industrial laboratories, residual toxins, dishes and devices used for cultures.

Autoclave safe plastic bags or containers

Pre-treat to sterilize with non- chlorinated chemicals on-site as per National AIDS Control Organisation or World Health Organisation guidelines thereafter for Incineration.

Incineration



Category




Red Contaminated Waste (Recyclable) Wastes generated from disposable items such as tubing, bottles, intravenous tubes and sets, catheters, urine bags, syringes (without needles

Red coloured non-chlorinated plastic bags or containers

Autoclaving/microwaving/hydroclaving followed by shredding or mutilation Treated waste to be sent to registered or authorized recyclers or for energy recovery

Autoclave

White (Translucent)

Waste sharps including Metals: Needles, syringes with fixed needles, needles from needle tip cutter or burner, scalpels, blades, or any other contaminated sharp object that may cause puncture and cuts. This includes both used, discarded and Contaminated metal sharps

Puncture proof, Leak proof, tamper proof containers

Autoclaving/Dry Heat Sterilization followed by shredding/mutilation/ encapsulation in metal container or cement concrete, combination of shredding cum autoclaving, and sent for final disposal to iron foundries or sanitary landfill or designated concrete waste sharp pit.

Autoclave

Blue (a)Glassware: Broken or discarded and contaminated glass including medicine vials and ampoules except those contaminated with cytotoxic wastes.

Cardboard boxes with blue coloured marking

Disinfection by soaking the washed glass waste after cleaning with detergent and Sodium Hypochlorite treatment/autoclaving/ microwaving and then sent for recycling.

Autoclave

(b)Metallic Body Implants

Cardboard boxes with blue coloured marking



2.6.2. Collection and Transportation

Bio-medical waste will be collected from each health care establishment on a regular basis.

Wastes shall be segregated as per the color coding, properly packed and placed at a secure

designated point by the health care establishment from where it will be collected. Upon

collection wastes shall be placed into closed containers enclosed in a containerized vehicle

and transported to the site. The vehicles shall be dedicated for the purpose and shall adopt

the conditions specified in the BMW (Management & Handling) Rules-2016.

2.6.3. Disinfection and Destruction

Upon receipt of the waste at the facility, wastes containers shall be unloaded. Wastes

based on their colour codes shall be separated and properly treated and disposed off.

Categories 1, 2, 3 and 6 (as per MOEFCC rules) shall be directly loaded into the incinerator

while categories 4 and 7 shall be loaded into the autoclave for dis-infection. Ash, residue

from high temperature incineration and other material residues from the process shall be

collected into containers and shall be disposed into a secured landfill.

2.6.4. Bio Medical Waste Incineration

The incinerator proposed for Hazardous waste will be used for incineration of Bio-medical

Waste, hence it is a common facility for incineration of all incinerable wastes coming to the

facility.

2.6.5. Autoclave

The primary purpose of autoclave is to sterilize / disinfect the waste with steam.

Microorganisms which contribute to infection do not survive beyond 80oC. However, as a

precaution MOEFCC has stipulated a temperature of 120oC with 15 psi pressure and 60 min

duration to ensure distribution of temperature. At this temperature and pressure,

microorganisms are completely destroyed and thus render the wastes infection free. The

dis-infected waste shall then be segregated into HDPE, PP, rubber, latex, glass and metal.

The segregated materials shall then be shredded completing the process of disinfection

and ensuring non-recycling of the waste materials for medical / food grade purposes. All

the process control conditions will be as per the applicable Bio medical rules.

2.6.5.1. Autoclave Features

A vacuum type (programmable) autoclave which can operate at all the specifications

mentioned by MOEFCC is proposed. The autoclave shall have continuous and automatic

recording of temperature, pressure, date, time and batch of loading. Every batch shall be



monitored with a strip chart recorder and once in a month the spore validation test and/or

spore monitoring shall be done. The Layout of typical autoclave process is given in Figure

2.6

Table 2.6 key features of the proposed autoclave

Type: Vacuum Type, automatic with documentation

Capacity: 432 liters per hour

Temperature: 120°C

Pressure: 15 psi

Automation: PLC with MMI ( Man-Machine interface)

Documentation/ Recording: Computerized recording

Figure 2.6 Autoclave Sterilization Process

2.7. E-Waste Recycling

The assessment of e-waste recycling sector in India indicates that e-waste trade starts from

formal dismantling sector and moves to informal recycling sector. There are no large scale

organized e-waste recycling facilities in India at present except few in some states of India,

while most of the e-waste recycling units are operating in un-organized sector. So, this will

be an opportunity for us to serve the industries by handling their E-waste. The main

objective of the proposed E-Waste facility is given below.



To provide Safe and Secured Destruction services at project site to ensure

intellectual property assurance.

To provide innovative and pollution-free technology for recycling of E-waste.

To provide Environmental management system and solutions.

To recover up to 99% of total waste received

To enhance customer service through online account access.

To conserve natural resource & ensuring working towards global warming

The proposed project consists of the following facilities

World class security systems

Certified, Safe and Secured destruction services

Comprehensive EHS practices

Logistics, warehousing facility

Highly skilled manpower

2.7.1. Methodology

The methodology proposed to be followed at the E-Waste facility is as follows. Upon client

request, project management shall arrange a suitable and secured transport to collect the

material from Clients premises.

Collected material shall be weighed, if desired by clients at their premises using

their own weighing machine and witnessed by both parties.

Manifest to be issued by generator to transport with 7 colored copies as per HW

Rules, 2016.

Delivery Order will be issued by Client prior to collection from their premises.

Collected material is to be provided in good packaging condition and thereafter will

be transported to the facility.

After inspection by project security guard, material shall be weighed at site

weighbridge to determine the gross weight of the material and will then be sent to

its warehouse for acceptance.

Goods Receive Note (GRN) for the gross weight will be issued upon receiving the

material at the warehouse.

Material will then be sent for dismantling section under IDO (Internal Delivery

Order) for dismantling.

Destruction process can be witnessed by Client, if required.

Upon data destruction completed, official destruction certificate will be issued to

Client for records.

Dismantled material will then be sent to suitable recycling process.



2.7.2. Process Description:

The process involved in proposed integrated E Waste recycling facility is basically physical

destruction and recovery of Platinum Group Metals (PGM’s). The steps of proposed process

is described in following paragraphs

The e-waste received from generator shall be stored at earmarked covered shed

having concrete floor and leak proof roof. Wooden or plastic pallets shall be

provided to store the waste.

Waste which may contain mainly electronic and electrical material and monitors of

computer or TV’s, shall be shifted to manual dismantling section in hand trolleys

A set of 8 to 10 no. of work stations are proposed with a suction hood for any dust

particle coming out of the dismantling process. A team of experts in dismantling

shall be deputed for dismantling purpose with all the required tools and tackles. The

tools and tackles shall be identified with best available brand to ensure optimization

in working and to avoid small accidents in the process. The employees at this section

shall be provided with all the required PPE’s i.e. apron, safety shoes, gloves, dust

mask etc. Fire extinguishers shall be provided in the working area.

The team deputed shall dismantle all the waste articles Eg. Computer CPU box, hard

drive, CD ROM, cables, PCB’s etc. and monitor into back cover and picture tube. The

hard drive, PCB’s shall be further dismantled into components attached and naked

PCB’s.

The dismantled PCB’s shall be sent for shredding followed by crushing and

pulverizing. The product shall be powder of PCB from which metal and non-metal

part which shall be segregated by physical process. Both the products shall be

stored in bags for disposal for recovery (metal part) and for making of toys and

monuments (non-metal part). In case the non- metal part fails to be recycled, the

same shall be disposed into incinerator as this consists of residue with high C.V.

The dismantled picture tube shall send to Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) cutting m/c,

which is a closed chamber attached with a hood connected to cyclone and

bughouse.

The CRT shall be put into the control panel connected automatic CRT cutting frame.

The CRT shall be cut into two pieces i.e. front glass and funnel glass.

The glass which is free from all coating etc shall be crushed further and stored in

bags to be dispatched for recycling

The components removed from PCBs shall be segregated and stored in bags for

further disposal and/or reuse.

The ferrous material i.e. cabinet, body of monitor etc shall be baled and disposed

for recycling



Plastic from cabinet, monitor shall be shredded in the shredder and sold out for

recycling to authorized recyclers

The chemical process for recovery of PGM shall be established during phase – I

The waste generated from above process shall be stored at earmarked area and not

allow the waste to be exposed to the environment. The process flow sheet is given

in Figure 2.7.

Figure 2.7 E-Waste proposed Flow Chart

2.8. Recycling Facilities

The recycling facilities proposed for the site are

Spent solvent recycling

Used oil recycling

Alternative fuel and raw material facility

Lead recycling facility

Waste plastic recycling

Waste paper recycling



2.8.1. Spent Solvent Recycling

Spent solvents are recovered using a distillation methodology. Following are few solvents

proposed to be separated /distilled initially:

Isopropyl alcohol

Butanol

Dimethyl formamide

Toluene and

Ortho dichloro benzene

Storage of spent solvents

The waste solvent shall be received in drums (MS/Plastic) and shall be stored in

shed which will be provided with garland drain, fire hydrant system, lined floor etc.

The drums shall be stacked as per the best practices. The leakages shall be avoided

at any point of time.

A separate storage shed sized 35x40 m is proposed adjacent to facility to store the

solvent drums.

The stacking of drums shall be in the manner that mixing of solvent drums shall be

avoided at maximum extent.

Distillation process is suitable for the recovery of many spent solvents. Distillation can be

a batch or continuous operation. It is proposed to adopt batch process in the proposed

facility. The process involves pre-treatment of neutralization and separation of spent

solvent feed mixture in a Reactor. After layer separation, the spent solvent mixture will be

sent to distillation still connected to distillation column. The solvent mixture is heated by

steam and the distillation column will be under total reflux for a specific period.

Fractionation of solvent takes place solvent / water as the case may be are separated

initially under atmospheric pressure and later under vacuum (if required). Distilled solvents

are analyzed, stored and recycled, liquid effluent mostly condensate will be recycled back

into system and solid residue sent for incineration / landfill. Steam for heating will be donor

from the boiler. The process diagram of the solvent recovery is depicted below:

2.8.1.1. Process Description

Distillation can be a batch or continuous operation. It is proposed to adopt batch process

in the proposed facility. The process involves pre-treatment of neutralization and

separation of spent solvent feed mixture in a Reactor. After layer separation, the spent

solvent mixture will be sent to distillation still connected to distillation column. The solvent

mixture is heated by steam and the distillation column will be under total reflux for a

specific period. Fractionation of solvent takes place solvent / water as the case may be are



separated initially under atmospheric pressure and later under vacuum (if required).

Distilled solvents are analyzed, stored and recycled, liquid effluent mostly condensate will

be recycled back into system and solid residue sent for incineration / landfill. Steam for

heating will be donor from the boiler. Flow chart for Spent Solvent recovery is shown in

Figure 2.8.

Figure 2.8 Flow Chart of Spent Solvent Recovery

Incinerator

Cooling Tower

Chiller

Main Product

receiver

Solvent received in

Drums

Pre - Treatment

( Adjusting pH,

removal of SS etc.)

Pump

Feed Tank

Pump

Agitated Vessel

Sludge

Column

Condenser

Cooler

Trail product receiver

Collection Tank Collection Tank

Pump

Feed Tank/

Incinerator

Pump

Drums



2.8.2. Used Oil Recycling

Used oil is termed as hazardous. Lube oil does not wear out with use it only gets

contaminated with water, carbon and fuel etc. that means used oil when it is ready for

rejection can be re-used. The methods of disposal being followed are Dumping, Burning or

Reprocessing. The Used / Waste Oil generated are not easily biologically degradable.

Therefore, dumping of Used / Waste oil is harmful to environment.

Burning of Used / Waste Oil is not desirable for the following reasons:

Waste Fuel Oil contains substantial quantity of water that will prevent proper

burning of fuel and lead to generation of carbon monoxide.

The Used Oil (used lubricants, Transformer oils etc), they may contain chemicals,

metallic compounds, Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCBs) etc which when burned will

release gas to the atmosphere. Therefore, burning of used / Waste Oil should not

be encouraged.

The other option is Repressing. Improper reprocessing methods can lead to

generation of waste which is even more hazardous than Used / Waste Oil.

Therefore, reprocessing should be allowed only with approved methods.

Reprocessing of Used / Waste will not only be a solution for disposal of waste but it

will have tremendous economic advantage.

The process diagram of the waste/ used oil recycling plant will be as below in Figure 2.9

Figure 2.9 Waste/ Used Oil Recycling Plant



2.8.3. Alternative Fuel and Raw Material Facility

Alternative fuel platforms will be developed as below:

“S” Type

Alternative Fuel Preparation Facility

“L” Type

Alternative fuel preparation Facility

‘L’ Type Alternative Fuels Area

‘L’ Type Alternative Fuels are basically Liquid Type Incinerable Waste which are more

than 2500 Kcal.

1. Common Neutralization Tank to maintain pH level 7

2. 25 KL Mixing Tank with Cooling Coil and External Jacket to control the heat

for Exothermic Liquid Waste

3. 25 KL Mixing Tank for the Non-Exothermic Liquid Waste

4. Agitator set up made by Stainless Steel

5. Pump

‘S’ Type Alternative Fuels Area:

‘S’ Type Alternative Fuels are basically Solid Type Incinerable Waste which are more

than 2500 Kcal

1. Common Neutralization Tank to maintain pH level 7

2. Mixing pit of 5 x 5 m

3. Jaw mixer for premixing of the solid and semisolid Waste.

4. Blender

Solid blend is prepared through mixing in an appropriate quantity of solid/ semi

solid waste with binders. The first step of preparing solid blend is to selection of

waste.

The segregation of waste according to their pH & calorific value helps in it. Source

materials for solid substitute fuel include Paint Sludge, Oily Filter Cake, Spent

Carbon, Organic waste, Tarry waste, Biomass, Resin, Distillation Residues, Grease,

ETP sludge, and alumina sludge etc.

Assortment of waste is done according blending norms.

A general waste selection criteria for high calorific value fuel is Low moisture

content, High LOI & TOC, High calorific value, Good compressibility, Less ash

content, non-toxic, Less pollutant, Sustainable combustion.

Schematic Diagram for the Alternative Fuel and Raw Material Facility is shown in Figure

2.10.



Figure 2.10 Alternative Fuel and Raw Material Facility

2.8.4. Lead Recycling

Lead is one of the most vital nonferrous metal having multiple uses like in lead acid

batteries, cable covering, alloying elements in solders, nuclear shield etc, and in terms of

its chemical it is used in glass, paint and as an important stabilizers in PVC as lead striate

etc.

Almost 70 to 80 % of lead productions come from recycling and balance 20 to 30% from

virgin sources that is lead concentrates. The requirement of lead is going up at the rate of

15 to 20 % annually. Its requirement is going up more in developing countries like India

and China. Further almost 70% of the lead goes in to the production of lead acid batteries.

Demand for lead acid batteries is going up almost at the rate of 20 to 25% in India & China.

In India only Hindustan Zinc Limited and two other producers in smaller quantities produce

lead from lead concentrates. Rest of the lead production is either from recycling or

imports. Since more & more scrap lead acid batteries and other scrap of lead will be

available there is a good scope to recover lead in and environmentally friendly manner.



2.8.4.1. Lead Recycling Process

Extraction of Lead from used Lead Acid Battery Plates, Lead Scrap, lead dross and other

lead bearing wastes is carried out by using Rotary Furnace and Reverberatory Furnace.

Conventional method of lead extraction from used lead acid battery plates, lead scrap, lead

dross and other concentrate generates huge amount of sludge which becomes very difficult

for disposal in the landfill. However, the combination of Rotary furnace and Reverberatory

furnace with high calorific furnace oil as fuel reduces the quantum of slag generation and

improves the recovery of lead metal considerably. Furnace oil will be used as fuel to melt

the battery and other scrap. The schematic diagram of the lead recycling is shown in Figure

2.11 & Schematic Diagram of Lead and Lead alloys manufacturing is shown in Figure 2.12.

Figure 2.11 Lead Recycling



Figure 2.12 Lead Alloys Manufacturing

The Reverberatory furnace is filled with the charcoals and ignited by using the blower. The

blower supplies the required combustion air for burning the charcoal. After a sustained

fire, the lead scrap (raw material) is fed into the furnace. The metallic lead in the scrap

melts and the oxides of lead are reduced by the carbon present in the charcoal.

The charging of charcoal and raw material are repeated and the molten metal is collected

in a pot at the downstream side of the furnace. The fuel used in the manufacturing process

is charcoal and the quantity used in one shift (8 hrs) is approximately 30 Kg per furnace.

The rotary furnace is manufactured from steel Plates with refractory lining inside the

furnace to withstand temperature up to 1600°C. It is cylindrical in shape at the center and

conical at both ends. The entire structure is supported by four numbers antifriction double

row spherical bearings and shafts which are firmly mounted on a common base frame.

The rotary furnace is driven by electrical Motor (which is 7.5 HP) and the Motor shaft is

connected with rotary furnace shaft through a double reduction worm gear box, chain and

sprockets. A low stage burner with high speed blower is fitted at one end of the Rotary

Furnace to inject oil and for ignition. The other end of the Rotary Furnace is connected with

a suitably designed chute to carry the dust particles to the pollution control equipment.

The fuel burner receives fuel continuously from a oil storage tank through insulated pipe

line. A heater and a pump are used to heat and pump the fuel during winter season to

overcome the slow discharge rate due to viscosity of the fluid. Battery scrap, lead bearing

members of the slag containing lead are charged inside the furnace manually and heated

up to 800 to 900°C. After certain time the recharging process of scrap continues, and the



disintegrated tiny particles along with dust are conveyed to the air Pollution Control System

for filtration.

1. The rotary furnace is closed while processing the metal. The ambient air quality

around the furnace will be kept in accordance with the latest norms prescribed

the Central Pollution Control Board. The smelting process proposed in lead

recycling unit is explained in detailed below:

2. The raw materials namely, the batteries are received at the unit. The battery

casing are broken with the help of cutting machine and sorted accordingly.

3. The plastic containers, polypropylene wastes are processed in plastic grinding

machine and the PVC separator waste is sold to the PVC recyclers.

4. Initially, the lead scrap is fed into the rotary furnace and the flux agent like

charcoal, iron boring are added for ignition.

5. The burner supplies the heat required for melting the scrap. After a sustained

fire is established, the lead in the scrap (raw material) is melted gradually.

The metallic lead in the scrap melts and the oxides of lead are reduced by carbon from

charcoal. The chemical reaction shown is below:

PbO + C ---------Pb + CO or CO2

The chemical reaction taking place during smelting process is as follows:

2PbO + C -----------------2Pb + CO2

2 PbO2 + 2C ------------- 2Pb + 2 CO

PbSO4 + 2C -------------PbS + 2 CO2

PbSO4 + PbS -----------2Pb + 2SO2

Sb2O3 + 3 Pb -------------2Sb + 3PbO

2Pbo + C -------------2Pb + CO2

While heating up the battery plates. Sulphur dioxide gas generated.

PbSO4 + 2C -------------PbS + 2 CO2

PbSO4 + PbS -----------2Pb + 2SO2

3Pb + Sb2 O3-----------2Sb + 3 PbO

1. The fuel used in the manufacturing process is furnace oil.

2. The lead obtained from rotary furnace and reverbatory furnace is stored in a

separate place and it is known as impure lead. These lead are refined for making

lead alloys and lead oxides depending upon customer’s requirement.

3. The pot furnace is used for refining and alloying process. The alloy pot is

connected to the air pollution control system for filtration. The dust particles

obtained from the alloy pot burner is fed into a carbon arrestor and then passed

to chimney which is 10 m high.

4. The disintegrated tiny particles and dust particles like SO2, NOx and lead

particles are carried to the air pollution control system for filtration.



The following machinery will be employed for the processing.

Rotary furnace

Charcoal Furnace 1

Charcoal Furnace 2

Charcoal Furnace 3

Charcoal Furnace 4

Melting Pot 1

Melting Pot 2

Gravity Chamber

Cyclone Chamber

Bag House

Gen Set

ID Fan Flower

Chimney

Furnace Oil Tank

Air Compressor

EB Connection

2.8.5. Waste Plastic Recycling

A recycling plant uses seven steps to turn plastic trash into recycled plastic:

Segregation

The plastic shall be segregated manually into 2 major components i.e. dirty plastic

not suitable for granulation and plastic can be used for granulation.

Mechanized Cleaning

Since the plastic drums contain hazardous material, mechanized cleaning is done

with some cleaning agents to remove any types of hazardous substances. The

cleaned drums can be re-used or further processing can be done based on the

requirement.

Chopping

The washed drums are chopped into flakes for further processing.

Drying

The plastic flakes are dried in a tumble dryer.

Melting

The dried flakes are fed into an extruder, where heat and pressure melt the plastic.

Different types of plastics melt at different temperatures.

Filtering

The molten plastic is forced through a fine screen to remove any contaminants that

slipped through the washing process. The molten plastic is then formed into strands



Pelletizing

The strands are cooled in water, and then chopped into uniform pellets.

Manufacturing companies buy the plastic pellets from recyclers to make new

products.

Production of liquid fuel

Through the process of random depolymerization, plastic can be converted to liquid

fuel. This fuel can be utilized in various plants as a fuel supplement.

The process flow sheet of plastic recycling is given in below Figure 2.13

Figure 2.13 Process flow sheet of plastic recycling

The process is having following steps

Shredding of plastic waste: a simple shredder will be deployed to shred the plastic

into the pieces of 3-4” size, ease to fed into pyrolysis unit.

Pyrolysis: the temperature of the column will be maintained around 300-500oC.

Catalytic Converter: A catalyst (metal compound) will be catalyze the reaction of

de polymerization. The plastic converted into fuel (mixed of liquid and gaseous

fraction both).

Condenser: the gaseous fraction of fuel shall be condensed to liquid fraction at

maximum possible extent. Part of gaseous fraction that cannot be condensed

shall sent be to pyrolysis section for heating purposes as a supplement to fuel.

The liquid fuel can be stored in tanks or vessel for FURTHER use in various

applications.



2.8.6. Waste Paper Recycling

Paper Recycling is the process of recovering waste paper and remaking it into new paper

products. There are three categories of paper that can be used as feedstock for making

recycled paper:

Mill broke: Paper trimmings and other paper scrap from the manufacture of paper,

and is recycled internally in a paper mill.

Pre-consumer waste: Material which left the paper mill but discarded before it was

ready for consumer use.

Post-consumer waste: Post-consumer waste are the material discarded after

consumer use such as old magazines, old newspaper, office wastes, old telephone

directories, residential mixed paper, industrial packaging , waste multi-wall cement

paper bags.

2.8.6.1 Process for Paper Recycling:

ICWF focuses on recovering waste paper and sending to paper manufacturing industry. It

is proposed to carryout baling in the following steps:

Step 1: Waste Paper Collection: Collection of waste paper material shall be done

through special color coded recycling bins (segregated directly at Generator’s

premises). However, at some locations, all kinds of papers may be collected in a

single bin.

Step 2: Manual Segregation: The waste paper collected is segregated according to

variety / thickness of paper like newspaper, office stationary, packaging paper, Card

boards etc.

Step 3: Compaction and Baling: The waste paper is manually fed to the Baling press.

It is equipment which utilizes Hydraulic pressure on the loose paper in an enclosed

chamber to compact them into Bales. The bale weight can be varied from 40 – 60

kg, making them very convenient to handle manually.

Baling Wire and Tape



Step 4: Transportation: Transportation of bales to paper mills and other paper

related product manufacturing units.

2.9. Leachate Treatment Plant

2.9.1. Multiple Effect Evaporator

PWMP has been using Multiple Effect Evaporator to treat and reuse the leachate collected

from the secured landfill. The capacity of the existing MEE plant is 10 KLD. The feed shall

be received in a level controlled balanced tank and passed through pre-heaters, calandrias

and vapor separators of various effects. The evaporation takes place under vacuum, which

is maintained mainly by vacuum system. Steam is supplied through Thermal Vapor

Compressor (TVR) as a heating medium to the first effect jacket. The concentrated product

at the desired concentration is continuously taken out from the plant and sent it to the

vertical film dryer. Salts from the vertical film dryer are sent to secured landfill after

stabilization. MEE condensate will be reused in the process. Technical details of the existing

MEE plant shown in Table 2.7.

Table 2.7 Technical Specification and Operational Parameters of MEE plant

S.No Parameters Units Range

1. Feed Rate kg/h 500

2. Feed Temperature °C 30

3. Initial Solids % 8

4. Total Suspended Solids ppm <1000

5. Final Solids % 40

6. Concentrate output Kg/h 100

7. Water Evaporation Kg/h 400

8. Power Consumption kW 13.6

2.9.1.1. Components of MEE Plant

The Multiple Effect Evaporator plant will comprise the following components.

Table 2.8 List of components of MEE plant


1. Balance Tank Fitted with the feed inlet connection along with float,

operated valve to maintain the liquid level in the tank and

outlet connection




2. Inline Filter Filter the effluent to remove the foreign suspended

particles. Fitted in line with the balance tank and

evaporator.

3. Feed Pump Centrifugal pump with sanitary design and SS mechanical

shaft seal capable of pumping the required feed rate. The

pump will have sealing arrangement and will be coupled

to the electric motor

4. Pre Heater Straight tube type of heating the feed up to boiling point

by means of vapor from all effects of the plant.

5. Calandrias Calandrias are shell and tube vertically arranged heat

exchangers. Preheated feed is pumped by recirculation

pump through the bottom of the calandrias tubes with

high velocity from down to upward in case of forced

circulation evaporator. Dry saturated steam/vapor is

supplied as heating medium in the jacket which causes

high heating of feed through the tubes.

6. Vapor Separators Vapor separators, separate the vapor from concentration

and normally placed in front of the calandrias. These are

connected to calandria top with a tangential inlet with a

central top outlet vapor duct.

7. Thermal Vapor Re-

Compressor

Thermal vapor re- compressor will have steam nozzles of

stainless steel, will be insulated and covered with

aluminum sheet. The re-compressor will have a pressure

gauge located at the steam inlet.

8. Condenser The water is circulated in the tubes and vapor gets

condensed on the shell side

9. Recirculation

Pumps

Pump is to recirculate the liquid from the bottom of forced

circulation type calandria the pump will have adequate

capacity to pump the feed to the calandrias and its

separators. The pumps will be supplied with suitable

horsepower rating motors

10. Concentrate

Discharge Pump

Pump will have adequate capacity to extract the final

concentrated product from last effect. The pumps will be

supplied with suitable horsepower rating motors.

11. Condensate Pump One pump for extracting out the condensate from all the

effects through condenser.

12. Vacuum Pump Liquid ring water sealed type coupled to an electric motor

of suitable rating through a flexible coupling




13. Seal Water Tank The function is to supply seal water for all SS Pumps

14. Operational cum

instrumental panel

with MCC

Operational and instrumental panel for switching all the

electrical motors in the plant with corresponding

indication lamps

2.9.2. Vertical Thin Film Dryer

The concentrate from MEE plant is collected and sent it to the vertical thin film dryer. Dryer

converts the concentrated liquid into salts, which are later on sent to the secured land fill

after stabilization process. The capacity of the existing Vertical thin film dryer is 57 kg/hr.

Specifications and components of the vertical thin film dryer is shown in Table 2.9 and

Table 2.10.

Table 2.9 Technical Specification and Operational Parameters of

Vertical Thin Film Dryer

S.No Parameters Units Range

1. Feed Rate kg/h 100

2. Feed Moisture % 60

3. Final Moisture % 6-8

4. Water Evaporation Rate Kg/h 57

5. Dried salt output Kg/h 43

6. Power Consumption kW 8

Table 2.10 List of components of Vertical Thin Film Dryer

S.No List of Components

1. Balance Tank

3. Feed Pump

4. Vertical Thin Film Dryer

6. Vapor Exhaust Duct

7. Vacuum Pump

8. Condenser

9. Operational cum instrumental panel with MCC

2.10. Water Requirement

Total water requirement for the proposed facilities are 56 KLD. The source of water is from

bore well located within the exiting TSDF facility or through tankers and MEE Condensate

which is recycled and reused in incinerator cooling tower. The detailed water requirement



for the proposed facility is shown in Table 2.11.There will be no discharge of process

effluent outside the plant. Domestic waste water is sent to soak pit/ septic tank or treated

in portable STP. Industrial effluent sent to Multiple Effect Evaporated (MEE) and MEE

condensate will be reused in the incinerator for cooling, MEE salt will be sent to secured

landfill.

Table 2.11 Water requirement

Sl. No Utility Total

Cum/day

1 Domestic 5

2 Floor Washings 4

3 Hazardous waste treatment, 6

4 Recycling 10

5 Bio-medical waste facility 5

6 Boiler 12

7 Cooling Tower 10

8 Green belt 4

Total 56

2.11. Energy and Power Requirement and its sources

The energy requirement for operating the proposed facilities is about 750 KW and power

load for the exiting TSDF is about 62.3 KW. The details of the power required for operation

of the facility and fuel required for running DG sets for emergency use during power failure

are given in Table 2.12.

Table 2.12 Power and Fuel Requirement

S.No Details Capacity Remarks

1. Total Power Required 813 KW From State electricity board

2. Auxiliary Fuel for Incinerator HSD/Furnace Oil

30 KLD From Local Dealers

3. DG Sets 500 KVA DG set is used for emergency power backup, Fuel will be procured from local dealers

2.12. Employment details

The man power deployment will not be found lacking and conforms to the organizational

hierarchy. The manpower for the proposed project during construction phase 50 Nos. and

during operation phase 30 Nos.

CHAPTER 3

DESCRIPTION OF THE

ENVIRONMENT



3 Chapter 3

Description of the Environment

3.1 Introduction

Baseline environmental status in and around the existing project depicts the existing

environmental conditions of air, noise, water, soil, biological and socio-economic

environment. With existing project as the centre, a radial distance of 10 km is considered

as the ‘study area’ for baseline data collection and environmental monitoring. Baseline data

was collected for various environmental attributes so as to compute the impacts that are

likely to arise due to the Proposed Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment,

Storage, and Disposal Facility at Nimbua, DeraBassi, Mohali District, Punjab.

The main aim of the baseline study is to identify the critical environmental attributes which

will be affected and have adverse impacts on the surrounding systems due to the present

scenario. This study is carried out during the project planning stage itself, so that the

proposed facilities can be implemented in a technically, financially and environmentally

sustainable long term basis.

The study depends mainly upon two factors. First is estimation of impact from existing

project on the environment and the second is assessment of the baseline environmental

condition. Both are key factors to arrive at the post project scenario. The estimated impact

due to the proposed project can be superimposed over the existing conditions to arrive at

the post project scenario. The scope of the baseline studies includes detailed

characterization of the following environmental components.

Meteorological conditions

Ambient Air Quality

Noise Levels

Water Quality (Surface & Ground water)

Soil Quality

Biological Environment and

Socio Economic studies.



3.1.1 Study Period

The baseline data generation for the TSDF has been carried out during the summer season of

(March 2016 to May 2016). The data collection with respect to meteorological conditions, air

pollution levels, noise levels, water quality, soil quality and socio economic conditions were

carried out during the study period.

3.2 Micro-meteorology

The study of micro-meteorological conditions of a particular region is of utmost importance to

understand the variations in ambient air quality status in that region. The prevailing

micrometeorology at project site plays a crucial role in transport and dispersion of air

pollutants released from the project site. The persistence of the predominant wind direction

and wind speed at the project site will decide the direction and extent of the air pollution

impact zone. The principal variables, which affect the micrometeorology, are horizontal

transport and dispersion (average wind speed and directions), convective transport and

vertical mixing (atmospheric stability) and also topography of the area towards local

influences.

The micro-meteorological data recorded in the study region as well as surface meteorological

data procured from IMD corresponding to nearest available observatories are appropriately

used in this study. The hourly record of wind speed and wind direction during study period

was used for computing the relative percentage frequencies of wind occurrences in various

directions. The observed meteorological data at site is given in Table 3.1. The wind rose

diagram for summer season is presented in Figure 3.1. Secondary meteorological data has

been mentioned in Table 3.2 obtained from the nearest IMD station of Ambala.

Table 3.1 Observed Meteorological Data

Period Temperature (o C) R. Humidity (%) Predominant wind

direction from Min Max Min Max

March 2016 12 34 14 92

NW-SE April 2016 17 41 6 77

May 2016 19 43 5 91

During the summer season the winds were predominantly recorded from NW to SE

direction. Calm condition prevailed for 12.4% of the total time and the average wind speed

for the season is 2.29 m/sec. Wind frequency distribution for season March to May 2016 is

given in Table 3.3



Table 3.2 IMD Data of Ambala (1981-2010)

Month

Temperature °C Humidity

% Rainfall

Pre

Dominant

Direction Mean

Max

Mean

Min Highest Lowest Min Max

Monthly

mm

No of

rainy

days

Jan 18.9 6.4 24.1 2.7 63 87 27.3 1.9 NW

Feb 22.4 9.1 27.3 5 54 81 35.1 2.2 NW

Mar 27.8 13.8 33 8.9 45 70 27.2 1.8 NW

Apr 34.9 19.1 40.1 13.7 28 51 12.3 1.2 NW

May 38.1 23.4 42.6 18 31 50 31.5 2.7 NW

Jun 38.1 25.4 42.8 20.3 42 62 86.6 4.5 SE

Jul 34.4 25.5 38.9 21.8 67 81 264.7 9.1 SE

Aug 33.3 25 36.3 22.2 72 84 239.2 9 SE

Sep 33.1 23 35.7 19.3 64 82 134.8 4.8 NW

Oct 31.7 17.1 34.6 12.4 51 76 15.1 0.8 NW

Nov 27.1 11.1 30.5 6.6 53 81 4.5 0.6 NW

Dec 21.7 7.1 25.5 3.3 60 86 19.7 1 NW

Table 3.3 Season (March- 2016 to May - 2016)-Frequency Distribution Table

Directions/ 0.5 - 1.5 1.5 - 2.5 2.5 - 3.5 >= 3.5 Total (%)

Wind Classes (m/s)

N 1.31 0.77 0.59 1.22 3.89

NNE 1.00 0.91 1.04 0.77 3.71

NE 1.18 0.82 0.50 1.04 3.53

ENE 1.45 0.72 0.72 1.13 4.03

E 1.36 0.86 0.63 1.40 4.26

ESE 1.13 1.04 0.63 1.31 4.12

SE 2.36 2.08 1.09 1.81 7.34

SSE 0.86 0.63 1.09 0.95 3.53

S 1.40 0.82 0.59 0.77 3.58

SSW 1.09 1.00 0.54 1.31 3.94

SW 1.09 0.91 0.50 1.13 3.62

WSW 0.91 0.45 0.41 1.36 3.13

W 4.17 2.63 1.90 3.58 12.27

WNW 3.03 1.81 1.22 2.58 8.65

NW 3.03 2.49 3.03 5.53 14.09

NNW 1.09 0.54 0.77 1.45 3.85



Directions/ 0.5 - 1.5 1.5 - 2.5 2.5 - 3.5 >= 3.5 Total (%)

Wind Classes (m/s)

Sub-Total 26.45 18.48 15.26 27.36 87.55

Calms (< 0.5 m/s) 12.4

Total 100 %

Note: 1.Average Wind Speed – 2.29 m/s

2.All values are in Percentage

Figure 3.1 Wind Rose Diagram – Summer Season (March 2016 –May 2016)

3.3 Ambient Air Quality

The ambient air quality was monitored in the impact study area as per MoEFCC guidelines.

The primary objective of the baseline air quality study is to assess the existing ambient air

quality of the area with reference to conventional air pollutants.

3.3.1 Methodology Adopted for the Study

The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through a scientifically

designed ambient air quality network. The design of monitoring network in the air quality

surveillance programme has been made based on the following considerations:



Topography of the study area

Representation of regional background

Populated and sensitive areas

Screening of maximum ground level concentrations and distances of their

likely occurrences as per climate

Representation of valid cross sectional distribution in downwind direction

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) stations were installed at 10 different locations

with due consideration to the above mentioned points. AAQ locations were selected in

downwind, cross wind and upwind direction of the existing project location. The details of

the monitoring stations are given in Table 3.4. The Ambient Air Quality sampling location

map is given in Figure 3.2.

Ambient air quality monitoring stations were selected on the basis of surface influence,

demographic influence and meteorological influence. At each sampling station monitoring

was carried out for a frequency of 2 days per week for 12 weeks during study period. The

common air pollutants namely Particulate Matter (PM<2.5µm, PM<10µm), Sulfur dioxide

(SO2), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) and Ozone (O3), Carbon Monoxide (CO) and Ammonia (NH3)

were sampled on 8/24 hourly and results were averaged to 24 hours to meet the

requirements of the MOEFCC and observed concentrations were compared with CPCB

standards (National Ambient Air Quality Standards, 2009).

Table 3.4 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations

Code Name of the

Locations

W.R.T. Site

Latitude

(North)

Longitude

(East) Wind Type Distance

(km) Direction

1 Site (PWMP) - - - 30°36'30.75" 76°55'32.98"

2 Ramgarh Upwind 5.3 NW 30°38'54.91" 76°53'15.78"

3 Naggal Down Wind 2.8 SE 30°35'34.54" 76°57'01.99"

4 Rehwar Down wind 6.0 SE 30°33'53.55" 76°57'50.36"

5 Pangwada Up Wind 4.2 W 30°38'54.91" 76°53'15.78"

6 Behra Cross Wind 6.0 SSE 30°33'23.37" 76°54'14.56"

7 Derabassi Cross Wind 8.0 WSW 30°34'43.35" 76°50'28.84"

8 Bila Cross Wind 3.0 N 30°38'13.95" 76°55'45.16"

9 Rattewali Cross Wind 7.0 NE 30°38'19.12" 76°58'59.35"

10 Sukhdarshanpur Cross Wind 5.5 E 30°36'03.71" 76°58'49.66"



Figure 3.2 Ambient Air Quality Sampling Locations Map



The existing values of air pollutants of concern as mentioned above are presented in Table

3.5-3.9. Statistical parameters like minimum, maximum and 98th percentiles have been

computed from the observed raw data for all sampling stations. These are compared with

the standards as prescribed by MoEFCC for industrial, residential and rural zone.

Table 3.5 Particulate Matter Levels in the Study Area (µg/m3) – 24hrs

Code Location

Particulate Matter <2.5µ Particulate Matter <10µ

Min Max 98th

Percentile Min Max

98th

Percentile

A1 Site (PWMP) 26.4 31.3 31.3 51.7 57.5 57.5

A2 Ramgarh 14.1 16.8 16.7 42.0 46.1 46.0

A3 Naggal 21.5 24.0 24.0 46.4 51.2 51.1

A4 Rehwar 20.4 23.9 23.9 43.0 49.3 49.3

A5 Pangwada 14.7 17.2 17.0 42.2 45.6 45.5

A6 Behra 15.5 18.9 18.8 43.8 47.0 46.9

A7 Derabassi 20.7 25.1 25.1 48.6 54.8 54.8

A8 Bila 18.0 21.3 21.1 47.0 52.3 52.1

A9 Rattewali 16.6 19.4 19.3 44.3 53.9 53.7

A10 Sukhdarshanpur 15.8 19.5 19.4 47.6 51.4 51.3

98th Percentile 16.7-31.3 45.5-57.5

NAAQS (2009) 60 for 24 hrs 100 for 24 hrs

Table 3.6 Ambient Air Quality Levels in the Study Area (µg/m3)

Code Location

SO2 µg/m3 NOx µg/m3

Min Max 98th

Percentile Min Max

98th

Percentile

A1 Site (PWMP) 15.3 18.8 18.8 21.0 25.6 25.6

A2 Ramgarh 8.7 12.2 12.0 17.4 19.2 19.0

A3 Naggal 11.5 13.9 13.8 19.0 22.7 22.7

A4 Rehwar 11.2 13.4 13.3 18.8 22.4 22.3

A5 Pangwada 8.8 11.0 10.9 16.9 19.0 18.8

A6 Behra 9.9 12.0 11.8 17.7 19.7 19.6

A7 Derabassi 12.8 15.0 15.0 19.6 22.9 22.8

A8 Bila 10.1 13.5 13.4 17.9 20.0 19.9

A9 Rattewali 9.7 11.8 11.7 17.5 19.7 19.6


98th Percentile 10.9-18.8 18.8-25.6





Code Location

O3 µg/m3 CO µg/m3

Min Max 98th

Percentile Min Max

98th

Percentile

A1 Site (PWMP) 16.8 20.9 20.9 466 600 600

A2 Ramgarh 11.2 13.1 13.0 205 278 277

A3 Naggal 14.8 17.5 17.5 319 425 425

A4 Rehwar 14.3 17.2 17.1 298 401 400

A5 Pangwada 10.6 12.9 12.8 191 226 224

A6 Behra 10.9 13.2 13.1 217 269 268

A7 Derabassi 15.2 18.6 18.6 367 478 478

A8 Bila 10.9 13.1 13.0 217 258 257

A9 Rattewali 10.8 13.2 13.1 210 237 236

A10 Sukhdarshanpur 10.6 13.0 13.0 200 228 227

98 Percentile 12.8-20.9 224-600



Code Name of the

Location

Benzene (C6H6) Ammonia (NH3)

Min Max 98th

Percentile Min Max

98th

Percentile

A1 Site (PWMP) 0.75 0.92 0.92 12.8 16.6 16.6

A2 Ramgarh 0.62 0.71 0.7 8.9 10.8 10.7

A3 Naggal 0.75 0.82 0.82 10.7 13.0 13.0

A4 Rehwar 0.68 0.78 0.78 10.5 12.8 12.8

A5 Pangwada 0.54 0.61 0.6 8.3 10.4 10.3

A6 Behra 0.58 0.66 0.66 8.6 10.9 10.8

A7 Derabassi 0.65 0.88 0.87 11.2 15.6 15.6

A8 Bila 0.53 0.75 0.74 9.5 11.8 11.7

A9 Rattewali 0.56 0.69 0.68 9.2 11.3 11.2


98th Percentile Range 0.6-0.92 10.3-16.6

NAAQ Standards 2009 5 for Annually 400 for 24 hrs



Table 3.9 Ambient Air Quality Levels in the Study Area

Parameter Lead - μg/m3 Nickel - μg/m3 Arsenic - μg/m3 Benzo (a)

Pyrene - ng/m3

98th Percentile Range *BDL BDL BDL BDL

BDL Value 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.01

NAAQ Standards

2009

1.0 0.02 (20

ng/m3)

0.006 (6 ng/m3) 1.0

*BDL – Below Detectable Limit

3.3.2 Air Quality Scenario in the Study Area

3.3.2.1 Particulate Matter <2.5µm &<10µm

Particulate Matter (PM) is the term used for a mixture of solid particles and liquid droplets

suspended in the air. These particles originate from a variety of sources, such as power

plants, industrial processes, and diesel trucks, and they are formed in the atmosphere by

transformation of gaseous emissions. Their chemical and physical compositions depend on

location and time of year. Particulate matter is composed of both coarse and fine particles.

Coarse particles (PM10) have an aerodynamic diameter between 2.5µm and 10µm. They

are formed by mechanical disruption (e.g. crushing, grinding, and abrasion of surfaces)

evaporation of sprays, and suspension of dust. PM10 is composed of alumina silicate and

other oxides of crustal elements, and major sources including fugitive dust from roads,

industry, agriculture, construction and demolition, and fly ash from fossil fuel combustion.

The lifetime of PM10 is from minutes to hours and its travel distance varies from <1km to

10km.

Fine particles have an aerodynamic diameter less than 2.5µm (PM2.5). They differ from

PM10 in origin and chemistry. These particles are formed from gas and condensation of

high temperature vapours during combustion, and they are composed of various

combinations of Sulfate compounds, Nitrate compounds, Carbon compounds, Ammonium,

Hydrogen ion, organic compounds, metals (Pb, Cd, V, Ni, Cu, Zn, Mn and Fe), and Particle

bound water. The major sources of PM2.5 are fossil fuel combustion, vegetation burning,

and the smelting and processing of metals. Their lifetime is from days to weeks and travel

distance ranges from hundreds to thousands of kilometers.

The 98th percentile of Particulate Matter <2.5µm recorded within the study area were in

the range of 16.7-31.3µg/m3

The 98th percentile of Particulate Matter <10µm recorded within the study area were in

the range of 45.5-57.5µg/m3.



The 24 hourly average values of Particulate Matter <2.5µm & Particulate Matter <10µm

were compared with the national ambient air quality standards and found that all sampling

locations recorded values within the applicable limits of residential and rural area limits for

all locations in study area.

3.3.2.2 Sulfur Dioxide

Sulfur dioxide gas is an inorganic gaseous pollutant. Sulfur dioxide emissions are expected

to be emitted wherever combustion of any fuel containing sulfur takes place. The sulfur in

the fuel will combine with oxygen to form sulfur dioxide. Sulfur trioxide and sulfuric acid

mist are the other important pollutants in the sulfur group. In general some of the

important sources of sulfur dioxide are Power stations, sulfuric acid plants, oil refining,

boilers in utilities in any industry and domestic use of coal. The following sources of Sulfur

dioxide in the study area are identified:

Emissions from domestic fuel (coal, diesel, etc.)

Emissions from DG sets used by industries and local residents

Sulfur dioxide in atmosphere is significant pollutant because of its toxicity. Sulfur dioxide is

capable of producing illness and lung injury. Further it can combine with water in the air to

form toxic acid. Aerosols can corrode metal surfaces, fabrics and the leaves of plants. Sulfur

dioxide is irritating to the eyes and respiratory system. Excessive exposure to sulfur dioxide

causes bronchial asthma and other breathing related diseases as it affects the lungs.

The 98th percentile of SO2 recorded within the study area was in the range of 10.9-

18.8µg/m3.

The 24 hours average values of SO2 were compared with the national ambient air quality

standards and it was found that all sampling locations recorded values much lower than

the applicable limit of 80 µg/m3 for residential and rural areas.

3.3.2.3 Oxides of Nitrogen

Oxides of Nitrogen are inorganic gaseous pollutant like Sulfur dioxide. Oxides of Nitrogen

emissions are expected to be emitted wherever combustion at high temperatures takes

place. Nitrous oxide and Nitric Acid Mist are the other important pollutants in the inorganic

nitrogen group. In general some of the important sources of oxides of Nitrogen are Boilers

(utilities) in any industry and Auto exhaust. In a metropolitan towns NOx levels are



predominantly due to automobile emissions. The following sources of oxides of nitrogen in

the study area are identified:

Emissions from industrial and domestic burning of coal.

Emissions from automobiles.

Oxides of nitrogen have far greater significance in photochemical smog reaction than any

of the other inorganic gaseous contaminants. NOX in the presence of sunlight will undergo

reactions with a number of organic compounds to produce all the effects associated with

photochemical smog. NOX has inherent ability to produce deleterious effects by themselves

like toxicity. It acts as asphyxiate when in concentrations great enough to reduce the

normal oxygen supply from the air.

The 98th percentile of NOX recorded within the study area was in the range of 18.8-

25.6µg/m3.

The 24 hourly average values of NOX were compared with the national ambient air quality

standards and it was found that all the sampling locations recorded values much lower than


3.3.2.4 Ammonia (NH3)

Ammonia (NH3) in the atmosphere results primarily from the decomposition and

volatilization of animal wastes. As such it is in principle a natural trace gas. Other sources

of ammonia emission include direct volatilization from mineral fertilizers (particularly

urea), agricultural crops and a wide range of non-agricultural sources including sewage,

catalytic converters, wild animals, seabirds and industrial processes.

Atmospheric ammonia has impacts on both local and international (transboundary) scales.

In the atmosphere ammonia reacts with acid pollutants such as the products of SO2 and

NOX emissions to produce fine ammonium (NH4+) containing aerosol. While the lifetime of

NH3 is relatively short (<10-100 km), NH4+ may be transferred much longer distances (100-

>1000 km). In addition to the transboundary effects, NH3 has substantial impacts at a local

level: emissions occur at ground level in the rural environment and NH3 is rapidly deposited.

As a result some of the most acute problems of NH3 deposition are for small relict nature

reserves located in intensive agricultural landscapes.

The 98th percentile of NH3 recorded within the study area was in the range of 10.3-

16.6µg/m3.



3.3.2.5 Ozone (O3)

Ozone (O3) or Trioxygen, is a triatomic molecule, consisting of three oxygen atoms. It is an

allotrope of oxygen that is much less stable than the diatomic allotrope (O2). Ozone in the

lower atmosphere is an Air pollutant with harmful effects on the respiratory systems of

animals and will burn sensitive plants. The Ozone layer in the upper atmosphere is

beneficial, preventing potentially damaging ultraviolet light from reaching the Earth’s

surface. Ozone is present in low concentrations throughout the Earth’s atmosphere.

The 98th percentile of Ozone recorded within the study area was in the range of 12.8-

20.9µg/m3. The 8 hour average values of Ozone were compared with the national ambient

air quality standards and found that the recorded values were within the applicable limits

of residential and rural area limits for all the locations in study area.

3.3.2.6 Carbon Monoxide (CO)

It is a colourless, odourless, and tasteless gas that is slightly less dense than air. It is toxic

to humans and animals when encountered in higher concentrations, although it is also

produced in normal animal metabolism in low quantities, and is thought to have some

normal biological functions. In the atmosphere, it is spatially variable and short lived,

having a role in the formation of ground-level ozone. Along with aldehydes it is part of

series of reactions that form photochemical smog.

Carbon monoxide is present in small amounts in the atmosphere, chiefly as a product

of volcanic activity but also from natural and man-made fires (such as Forest and bush fires,

burning of crop residues and sugarcane fire-cleaning).

Carbon monoxide is a temporary atmospheric pollutant in some urban areas, mainly from

the exhaust of internal combustion engines (including vehicles, portable and back-up

generators, lawn mowers, power washers, etc.), but also from incomplete combustion of

various other fuels (including wood, coal, charcoal, oil, paraffin, propane, natural gas, and

trash).

The 8 hourly average values of CO were compared with the national ambient air quality

standards and it was found that all the sampling stations recorded values much lower than


The 98th percentile of CO recorded within the study area was in the range of 224-

600µg/m3.



3.3.2.7 Benzene (C6H6)

Benzene is a clear, colorless, highly flammable and volatile, liquid aromatic hydrocarbon

with a gasoline-like odor. Benzene is found in crude oils and as a by-product of oil-refining

processes. Benzene is found in the air from emissions from burning coal and oil, gasoline

service stations, and motor vehicle exhaust. Acute (short-term) inhalation exposure of

humans to benzene may cause drowsiness, dizziness, headaches, as well as eye, skin, and

respiratory tract irritation.

The 98th Percentile of Benzene recorded within the study area was in the range of 0.6

μg/m3to 0.92 μg/m3

Remaining Parameters (Lead, Nickel, Arsenic and Benzo (a) Pyrene) are all falling below

detectable Limits.

3.4 Water Quality

Surface water and ground water samples were collected from different sources within the

study area and some important physical & chemical parameters including heavy metals

were considered for depicting the baseline status of the study area.

3.4.1 Water Quality Assessment

Total 10 ground and 2 surface water samples were identified and collected from the study

area to assess the water quality during the study period. The ground water samples were

drawn from the hand pumps and bore wells used by the villagers for their domestic needs.

Surface water sampling was carried out from the river in the study area. The details of the

locations are given in Table 3.10 and Figure 3.3.

The water samples collected from the below locations were analysed for important water

quality parameters and the analytical results of the water samples were compared with IS:

10500-2012 drinking water standards and the results are shown in Table 3.11 ,surface

water results are shown in Table 3.12.



Table 3.10 Water Sampling Locations

Code Name of the

Locations

Source

Type

W.R.T. Site Latitude

(North)

Longitude

(East) Distance

(km) Direction

Groundwater

GW1 Site Borewell - 30°36’37.37” 76°55’29.12”

GW2 Ramgarh Borewell 5.3 NW 30°38’58.24” 76°53’14.70”

GW3 Naggal Borewell 2.8 SE 30°35’36.85” 76°57’01.11”

GW4 Rehwar Hand Pump 6.0 SE 30°33’53.55” 76°57’50.36”

GW5 Pangwada Hand Pump 4.2 W 30°37’03.82” 76°52’45.89”

GW6 Behra Hand Pump 6.0 SSE 30°33’24.16” 76°54’20.85”

GW7 Derabassi Hand Pump 8.0 WSW 30°35’05.75” 76°50’37.90”

GW8 Bila Bore Well 3.0 N 30°38’13.99” 76°55’31.19”

GW9 Rattewali Hand Pump 7.0 NE 30°38’18.77” 76°59’14.90”

GW10 Sukhdarshanpur Hand Pump 5.5 E 30°36’04.66” 76°58’49.18”

Surface Water

SW1 Ghaggar River (Up Stream)

SW2 Ghaggar River (Down Stream)



Figure 3.3 Ground Water and Surface Water Sampling locations Map



Table 3.11 Water Sample Analysis Results – Ground water

S. No Parameter Unit GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5 GW6 GW7 GW8 GW9 GW10 IS:10500-2012 Standards

Acceptable Permissible

1 Odor - Unobjectable Agreeable

2 pH - 7.24 7.38 7.57 7.25 7.08 7.15 7.29 7.12 7.22 7.31 6.5-8.5 No relaxation.

3 Turbidity NTU 2.2 0.5 0.5 2.5 4.6 2.1 1.3 4.4 2.4 0.5 1 5

4 Elec. Conductivity µs/cm 700 647 576 1187 1227 2105 823 860 558 722 - -

5 Total Dissolved solids mg/l 452 414 366 760 780 1330 526 552 355 458 500 2000

6 Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 303 255 243 412 322 434 262 327 210 287 200 600

7 Chlorides as Cl mg/l 10 18 15 39 120 266 24 50 19 29 250 1000

8 Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 11 12 16 109 98 142 104 20 26 21 200 400

9 Nitrate as NO3 mg/l 1.2 3.3 1.0 0.8 18 40 2 2.0 2.0 2.0 45 No relaxation.

10 Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 258 245 230 363 394 598 295 316 182 253 200 600

11 Calcium as Ca mg/l 64 62 56 86 92 144 72 74 45 60 75 200

12 Magnesium as Mg mg/l 24 22 22 36 40 57 28 32 17 25 30 100

13 Sodium as Na mg/l 36 31 22 97 96 140 46 50 39 43 - -

14 Potassium as K mg/l 5 5 5 7 6 24 5 5 5 5 - -

15 Flouride as F mg/l 0.7 1.2 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.4 0.9 1.1 0.5 0.5 1 1.5

16 Zinc as Zn mg/l 2.1 1.9 2.1 3.1 <1 2.3 2.1 1.9 2.1 <1 5 15

17 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.21 0.23 0.24 0.21 0.21 0.22 0.26 0.22 <0.2 <0.2 0.3

No relaxation.

18 Lead as Pb mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 0.01

19 Mercury as Hg mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 0.001

20 Cadmium as Cd mg/l <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 <0.003 0.003

21 Chromium as Cr mg/l <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 0.05

22 Copper as Cu mg/l <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 0.05 1.5

23 Cyanide as CN- mg/l <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 0.05 No relaxation.

24 Arsenic as As mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 0.01 0.05

25 Boron as B mg/l 0.36 <0.1 0.46 0.48 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 0.5 1



Table 3.12 Surface Water Sample Analysis Results

Parameter Unit SW1 SW2 IS 2296 – 1992 Inland surface water Stds

A B C D E

Color Pt-Co 2.1 1.5 10 300 300 - -

pH - 7.03 7.13 6.5 – 8.5

Odor Un Objectionable Un

Objectionable - - - -

Turbidity NTU 108 153 - - - - -

TSS 36 42 - - - - -

Elec. Cond µs/cm 633 654 - - - - 2250

Total Dissolved solids mg/l 402 424 500 - 1500 - 2100

Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l 187 196 - - - - -

Chlorides as Cl mg/l 52 54 250 - 600 - 600

Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 38 41 400 - 400 - 1000

Nitrate as NO3 mg/l 0.5 0.5 20 - 50 - -

Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l 180 222 200 - - - -

Calcium as Ca mg/l 42 52 - - - - -

Magnesium as Mg mg/l 18 22 - - - - -

Sodium as Na mg/l 54 56 - - - - -

Potassium as K mg/l 8 12 - - - - -

Flouride as F mg/l 1.1 1.2 1.5 1.5 1.5 - -

Iron as Fe mg/l 0.24 0.26 0.3 - 0.5 - -

Lead as Pb mg/l <0.01 <0.01 0.1 - 0.1 - -

Copper as Cu mg/l 0.56 0.61 1.5 - 1.5 - -

Zinc as Zn mg/l <1 1.1 15 - 15 - -

Cadmium as Cd mg/l <0.003 <0.003 0.01 - 0.01 - -

Arsenic s As mg/l <0.01 <0.01 0.05 0.2 0.2 - -

Mercury as Hg mg/l <0.001 <0.001 0.001 - - - -

Cyanide as CN mg/l <0.05 <0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05

Boron as B mg/l <0.1 <0.1 - - - - 2

DO mg/l 5.1 5.0 6 5 4 4

COD mg/l 64 81 - - - - -

BOD mg/l 18 22 2 3 3 - -

Residual chlorine as Cl2 mg/L <0.01 <0.01

Oil & Grease mg/L <15 <15

Phenolic compounds mg/L <0.1 <0.1



3.4.2 Regional Scenario

3.4.2.1 Groundwater

The pH limit fixed for drinking water samples as per IS: 10500-2012 standard is 6.5

to 8.5 beyond this range the water will affect the mucus membrane and or water

supply system. In the study area, the pH was varying from 7.08 to 7.57 showing that

they are within the acceptable range.

The acceptable limit for total dissolved solids as per IS: 10500-2012 Standard is 500

mg/l whereas the permissible limits in absence of alternate source are 2000 mg/l,

beyond this palatability decreases and may cause gastro intestinal irritation. In

ground water samples collected from the study area, the total dissolved solids are

varying from 355 mg/l to 1330 mg/l. The TDS of five samples are above the

acceptable limit but within the permissible limit; rest all the samples are below the

acceptable limit.

The acceptable limit for chloride is 250mg/l as per IS: 10500-2012 Standards

whereas the permissible limit of the same is 1000 mg/l beyond this limit, taste,

corrosion and palatability are affected. The Chloride levels in the ground water

samples collected in the study area were ranging from 10 mg/l to a maximum of

266 mg/l. The chloride of one sample is above the acceptable limit but within the

permissible limit; rest all the samples are below the acceptable limit

The acceptable limit as per IS:10500-2012 Standards for hardness as CaCO3 is 200

mg/l whereas the permissible limit for the same is 600 mg/l beyond this limit

encrustation in water supply structure and adverse effects on domestic use will be

observed. In the ground water samples collected from the study area, the hardness

is varying from 182 mg/l to 598 mg/l. Hardness as CaCO3 in nine samples are above

acceptable limit but within permissible limit, whereas one sample is within the

acceptable limit.

Fluoride is the other important parameter, which has the acceptable limit of 1 mg/l

and permissible limit of 1.5 mg/l. However the optimum content of fluoride in the

drinking water is 0.6 to 1.5 mg/l. If the fluoride content is less than 0.6 mg/l it causes

dental carries, above 1.5 mg/l it causes staining of tooth enamel, higher

concentration in range of 3 - 10 mg/l causes fluorosis. In the ground water samples

of study area the fluoride value were in the range of 0.5 to 1.4 mg/l. Fluoride in five

samples are above acceptable limit but within permissible limit, whereas five

samples are within the acceptable limit.



3.4.2.2 Surface Water

The pH is in the range of 7.03 to 7.13. The pH values for all the samples collected in

the study area during study period were found to be within the limits as per IS:

2296-1992.

The total dissolved solids were in the range of 402 to 424 mg/l which were within

the Class A norms as per IS: 2296-1992.

The chlorides were in the range of 52 to 54 mg/l, which are within the limits of Class

‘A’ norms as per IS: 2296-1992.

The Hardness as CaCO3 in samples varies between 180 to 222 mg/l.

The fluoride in the above samples varies between 1.1 to 1.2 mg/l which are within

the limits of Class ‘A’ norms as per IS: 2296-1992.

The BOD in the above samples were found to be in the range of 18 to 22 mg/l.

3.5 Noise Environment

Noise can be defined as unwanted sound or sound in the wrong place at the wrong time.

It can also be defined as any sound that is undesirable because it interferes with speech

and hearing, is intense enough to damage hearing or is otherwise annoying. The definition

noise as unwanted sound implies that it has an adverse effect on human beings and their

environment including land, structures, and domestic animals. Noise can also disturb

natural wildlife and ecological systems.

Sound can be transmitted through gases, liquids, and solids. Noise impacts can be of

concern during the construction and the operational phases of projects. Noise should also

be considered in relation to present and future land use zoning and policies.

Construction noise can be a significant source of community noise. Of concern are impacts

on people near the construction site, who are totally unrelated to construction activities

(e.g. area residents, office workers, school children, staff, etc.) Factors which are important

in determining noise levels that will potentially impact such populations include distance

from the noise source, natural or man-made barriers between the source and the

impacted population, weather conditions which could potentially absorb, reflect or focus

sound (such as wind speed, direction, temperature inversions), the scale and intensity of



the particular construction phase (excavation, erection, or finishing).

The Environment/health impacts of noise can vary from Noise Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL)

to annoyance depending on loudness of noise levels and tolerance levels of individual.

While measuring the day-night equivalent noise levels (Ldn), it is considered that one

event at night is equivalent to ten similar events during the day time. Ldn is similar to 24

hours equivalent sound level (LEq) except that, during the daytime 10 dB (A) weighing is

added. The Ldn for a given location in a community may be calculated from the hourly

(LEq) equivalent sound levels with a 10 dB (A) correction added to the night time value

(Ln).

Ldn=10 Log (0.0416 [15(10Ld/10]+9(10Ln+10/10]) +......

Where Ldis the Equivalent noise levels at day (6.00A.M to 10.00 P.M) and

Ln is the Equivalent noise levels at night (10.00P.M to 6.00 A.M)

3.5.1 Sources of Noise

The main sources of noise in the study area are domestic activities, industrial activities and

vehicular traffic.

3.5.2 Noise Levels in the Study Area

Baseline noise levels have been monitored at 10 locations within the study zone, using a

continuous noise measurement device. Random noise level measurement locations were

identified for assessment of existing noise level status, keeping in view of the land use

pattern, residential areas in villages, schools, bus stands, etc., the day levels of noise have

been monitored during 6 AM to 10 PM and the night levels during 10 PM to 6 AM. The

noise monitoring stations are shown in Table 3.13 and Figure 3.5. The results are presented

in Table 3.14.



Table 3.13 Noise Monitoring Locations

S. No Code Name of the

Locations

W.R.T. Site Latitude

(North) Longitude (East) Distance

(km) Direction

1 N1 Site - 30°36’37.37” 76°55’29.12”

2 N2 Ramgarh 5.3 NW 30°38’47.93” 76°53’14.70”

3 N3 Naggal 2.8 SE 30°35’26.70” 76°56’59.11”

4 N4 Rehwar 6.0 SE 30°33’53.55” 76°57’50.36”

5 N5 Pangwada 4.2 W 30°37’01.70” 76°52’35.33”

6 N6 Behra 6.0 SSE 30°33’25.69” 76°54’12.96”

7 N7 Derabassi 8.0 WSW 30°35’05.75” 76°50’37.90”

8 N8 Bila 3.0 N 30°38’13.99” 76°55’31.19”

9 N9 Rattewali 7.0 NE 30°38’18.77” 76°59’14.90”

10 N10 Sukhdarshanpur 5.5 E 30°36’04.66” 76°58’49.18”



Figure 3.4 Noise Sampling locations Map



Table 3.14 Noise Levels in the Study Area – dB (A)

Time (Hours) N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10

AA

Q S

tan

dar

ds

in r

esp

ect

of

No

ise

SO

123

(E)

dt

14th

Fe

b 2

000–

Res

iden

tial

Are

a

AA

Q S

tan

dar

ds

in r

esp

ect

of

No

ise

SO

123

(E)

dt

14th

Feb

200

0–

Co

mm

erci

al A

rea

1.00 41.2 40.6 41.2 40.5 40.1 40.3 40.8 40.8 40.9 41.3 2.00 42.3 41.3 42.3 42.3 40.9 41.3 42.1 41.9 41.3 42.9 3.00 43.4 42.3 43.6 43.6 41.4 43.1 43.2 42.4 42.9 45.1 4.00 44.3 42.9 44.9 44.7 44.7 46.9 44.5 42.9 44.8 44.7 5.00 45.6 43.2 48.5 45.9 44.9 49.4 45.3 44.7 45.8 44.7 6.00 51.5 47.6 51.2 53.4 48.7 44.3 43.1 45.9 51.8 45.2 7.00 53.4 52.4 52.1 54.3 52.3 53.2 46.3 53.2 52.9 53.4 8.00 52.1 54.3 54.7 55.4 54.3 53.7 46.9 54.9 54.5 54.3 9.00 54.3 55.4 55.9 56.6 55.4 54.6 55.4 56.5 55.6 52.3

10.00 55.4 56.4 55.7 56.3 55.8 55.4 54.5 55.4 54.5 52.1 11.00 54.3 53.2 56.4 55.4 54.3 54.8 54.4 54.6 56.4 51.7 12.00 52.1 54.6 54.3 54.3 53.2 53.8 51.1 54.5 54.3 50.8 13.00 53.2 52.1 52.6 52.3 52.4 51.2 50.8 46.1 49.9 55.6 14.00 54.3 53.4 54.3 53.4 51.2 52.4 51.6 54.5 48.9 53.3 15.00 52.3 52.1 53.6 52.1 53.3 51.2 53.4 55.7 55.4 47.9 16.00 52.1 53.4 55.2 51.2 54.9 53.2 45.5 56.0 54.5 54.0 17.00 52.1 52.3 54.0 50.3 53.2 54.4 50.6 52.6 52.6 51.3 18.00 50.6 51.7 53.4 49.7 53.2 51.2 46.9 52.9 52.0 52.7 19.00 48.6 50.6 45.8 48.2 48.7 49.5 50.1 44.3 45.1 55.4 20.00 47.5 45.4 47.6 47.4 46.5 47.6 49.8 46.1 46.4 43.1 21.00 45.6 44.3 43.9 45.4 45.4 43.2 47.8 45.5 46.9 44.7 22.00 42.4 42.3 42.7 42.3 43.5 42.1 45.4 44.6 42.5 42.8 23.00 41.3 41.3 42.4 41.2 41.2 42.1 41.2 42.3 42.1 43.1 24.00 40.6 40.8 41.2 40.7 40.3 41.3 40.8 41.2 40.7 42.1

Minimum 40.6 40.6 41.2 40.5 40.1 40.3 40.8 40.8 40.7 41.3 Maximum 55.4 56.4 56.4 56.6 55.8 55.4 55.4 56.5 56.4 55.6

Day Equivalent 52.5 52.8 53.6 53.2 52.9 52.5 51.1 53.4 53.1 52.3 55 65 Night Equivalent 41.8 41.1 42.2 41.9 41.5 42.4 42.3 41.9 41.8 42.7 45 55




The values of noise observed in some of the rural areas are primarily owing to vehicular

traffic and other anthropogenic activities. In rural areas wind blowing and chirping of birds

would contribute to noise levels especially during the nights. The day equivalents during

the study period are ranging between 51.1 to 53.6 dB (A) areas the night equivalents were

in the range of 41.1 to 42.7 dB (A). From the results it can be seen that the day equivalents

and the night equivalents were within the Ambient Noise standards of residential.

3.6 Traffic Study

Traffic studies are required to assess the traffic density pattern of the region and to assist

the proponent in planning vehicular movement during the project activity.

The methodology adopted for carrying out the traffic study was to select the major roads

around the project site and count the various categories of vehicles moving on these roads.

The traffic survey was carried out at site connecting road & NH 73. The details of the

vehicular movement is given in Table 3.15 and Table 3.16. From the studies it was observed

that the project site connecting road, the highest peak observed was 58 PCU/hr during 10

to 11 AM and the existing level of service is excellent and NH-73 was 822 PCU/hr during 10

to 11 AM and the existing level of service is good.

Table 3.15 Traffic Survey at site connecting road

Hours Two wheeler Three Wheeler

Passenger cars &Pick-up Vans

Heavy commercial

Vehicles (HCV) Total vehicles

v/hr PCU/hr(0.75)

v/hr PCU/hr v/hr PCU/hr v/hr PCU/hr Total Total

PCU/hr

6-7 am 5 4 3 6 2 2 0 0 10 12

7-8 am 8 6 2 4 4 4 1 4 15 18

8-9 am 13 10 6 12 5 5 2 7 26 34

9-10 am 16 12 11 22 6 6 3 11 36 51

10-11 am 23 15 14 28 8 8 2 7 47 58

11-12 pm 21 16 12 24 6 6 3 11 42 57

12-1 pm 18 14 11 22 5 5 0 0 34 41

1-2 pm 15 11 9 18 4 4 2 7 30 41

2-3 pm 14 11 8 16 3 3 2 7 27 37

3-4 pm 16 12 6 12 4 4 0 0 26 28

4-5 pm 19 14 9 18 7 7 0 0 35 39

5-6 pm 21 16 12 24 9 9 2 7 44 56

6-7 pm 20 15 11 22 3 3 2 7 36 47

7-8 pm 15 11 5 10 2 2 1 4 23 27

8-9 pm 12 9 3 6 2 2 0 0 17 17

9-10 pm 9 7 2 4 0 0 0 0 11 11



Hours Two wheeler Three Wheeler

Passenger cars &Pick-up Vans

Heavy commercial

Vehicles (HCV) Total vehicles

v/hr PCU/hr(0.75)

v/hr PCU/hr v/hr PCU/hr v/hr PCU/hr Total Total

PCU/hr

10-11 pm 6 5 1 2 0 0 0 0 7 7

The highest peak observed is 58PCU/hr during 10 to 11 am

Total width of the Road in meters ( Sub-Arterial Road) 7

Carrying capacity of the road (the road is 2 lane 2 way road) As per IRC:106-1990 (PCU’s per hour)

1500

Existing V/C Ratio 0.04

LOS=Level of Service (Existing ) A

V/C LOS Performance

0.0-0.2 A Excellent

0.2-0.4 B Very good

0.4-0.6 C Good

0.6-0.8 D Fair/Average

0.8-1.0 E Poor

1.0 &above F Very poor

Table 3-16 Traffic Survey at NH-73

Hours Two wheeler

Three

Wheeler

Passenger

cars &Pick-

up Vans

Heavy

commercial

Vehicles

(HCV)

Total vehicles

v/hr PCU/hr(0.75) v/hr PCU/hr v/hr PCU/hr v/hr PCU/hr Total Total PCU/hr

6-7 am 46 35 14 28 42 42 19 70 121 175

7-8 am 67 50 24 48 58 58 43 159 192 315

8-9 am 124 93 35 32 87 87 74 274 320 486

9-10 am 135 101 47 94 155 155 94 348 431 698

10-11 am 155 116 64 128 174 174 109 403 502 822

11-12 pm 146 110 62 124 167 167 103 381 478 782

12-1 pm 126 95 53 106 156 156 99 366 434 723

1-2 pm 99 74 44 88 140 140 78 289 361 591

2-3 pm 79 59 42 84 133 133 63 233 317 509

3-4 pm 70 53 56 112 124 124 74 274 324 562

4-5 pm 93 70 62 124 166 166 85 315 406 674

5-6 pm 113 85 58 116 156 156 65 241 392 597

6-7 pm 135 101 46 92 145 145 54 200 380 538

7-8 pm 111 83 32 64 138 138 45 167 326 452

8-9pm 93 70 27 54 99 99 43 159 262 382

9-10pm 37 28 12 24 57 57 32 118 138 227

10-11pm 24 18 8 16 44 44 12 44 88 122

The highest peak observed is 822PCU/hr during 10 to 11 am



Hours Two wheeler

Three

Wheeler

Passenger

cars &Pick-

up Vans

Heavy

commercial

Vehicles

(HCV)

Total vehicles

v/hr PCU/hr(0.75) v/hr PCU/hr v/hr PCU/hr v/hr PCU/hr Total Total PCU/hr

Total width of the Road in meters ( Sub-Arterial Road) 7

Carrying capacity of the road (the road is 2 lane 2 way road)

As per IRC:106-1990 (PCU’s per hour) 1500

Existing V/C Ratio 0.5

LOS=Level of Service (Existing ) C

V/C LOS Performance

0.0-0.2 A Excellent

0.2-0.4 B Very good

0.4-0.6 C Good

0.6-0.8 D Fair/Average

0.8-1.0 E Poor

1.0 &above F Very poor

3.7 Soil Quality

The present study on soil quality establishes the baseline characteristics in the study area

surrounding the project site. The study has been addressed with the following objectives.

To determine the base line characteristics

To determine the soil characteristics of existing project site.

To determine the impact of industrialization/ urbanization on soil characteristics

To determine the impacts on soils from agricultural productivity point of view.

3.7.1 Criteria Adopted for Selection of Sampling Locations

For studying the soil types and soil characteristics, 10 sampling locations were selected to

assess the existing soil conditions representing various land use conditions and geological

features. The homogenized soil samples collected at different locations were packed in a

polyethylene plastic bag and sealed. The sealed samples were sent to laboratory for

analysis. The important physical, chemical parameter concentrations were determined

from all the samples.

3.7.2 Soil Sampling Locations

Details of the soil sampling locations are given in Table 3.17 and the soil sampling location



map is given in Figure 3.6.

Table 3.17 Soil Sampling Locations

S.No Locations Distance

(km)

Directions

wrt site

Coordinates

Latitude

(North)

Longitude

(East)

1 Site - 30°36’30.50” 76°55’27.88”

2 Ramgarh 5.3 NW 30°38’47.93” 76°53’14.70”

3 Naggal 2.8 SE 30°35’40.44” 76°57’03.43”

4 Rehwar 6.0 SE 30°33’55.84” 76°57’49.34”

5 Pangwada 4.2 W 30°37’03.82” 76°52’45.89”

6 Behra 6.0 SSE 30°33’39.63” 76°54’25.13”

7 Derabassi 8.0 WSW 30°35’05.75” 76°50’37.90”

8 Bila 3.0 N 30°28’10.15” 76°55’37.19”

9 Rattewali 7.0 NE 30°38’18.77” 76°59’14.90”

10 Sukhdarshanpur 5.5 E 30°36’04.66” 76°58’49.18”



Figure 3.5 Soil Sampling Locations Map



Table 3.18 Soil Analysis Results

Parameter Unit S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 Standard Soil Classification – Indian Council of

Agricultural Research, New Delhi

Texture Sandy loam

Sandy loam

Sandy loam

Sandy loam

Sandy loam

Sandy loam

Sandy loam

Sandy loam

Sandy loam

Sandy loam

Color Light Brown

Light Brown

Light Brown

Light Brown

Light Brown

Light Grey

Light Brown

Light Brown

Light Brown

Light Brown

pH ( 1:5 extract) -- 7.03 7.18 7.05 7.02 7.13 7.01 6.98 7.03 6.95 7.01

Acidic <6.0

Normal to saline 6.0 – 8.5

Tending to become alkaline 8.6-9.0

Alkaline > 9.0

EC ( 1:5 extract) µs/cm 212 179 124 114 193 121 136 192 150 155

Normal <1000

Critical for germination 1000 – 2000

Critical for growth 2000- 4000

Injurious to most crops > 4000

Bulk Density g/cc 1.39 1.3 1.43 1.36 1.42 1.39 1.31 1.21 1.38 1.23

Total organic Carbon % 0.54 0.65 0.43 0.54 0.62 0.51 0.48 0.58 0.65 0.54 Low <0.5%, Medium 0.5-0.75%, High >0.75%

Organic Matter % 0.93 1.11 0.74 0.93 1.12 0.88 0.83 1.11 1.12 0.94

Calcium as Ca mg/Kg 3731 4046 982 4124 4399 2828 1099 4360 1532 3142

Magnisium as Mg mg/Kg 643 405 238 667 333 690 261 452 119 238

Available Potassium as K

Kg/Ha 195 145 150 199 193 272 112 195 180 156 Low below 110; Medium 110 to 280; High above 280

Available Nitrogen as N Kg/Ha 232 221 243 286 245 283 218 198 189 223 Low below 280; Medium 280 to 560; High above 560

Available Phosphorus as P

Kg/Ha 47 14 62 51 63 95 39 31 56 24 Low below 10; Medium 10 to 25; High above 25

Chloride as Cl mg/Kg 342 147 98 98 98 195 98 147 98 98

Copper as Cu mg/Kg 3.74 7.12 1.75 5.04 5.81 6.67 1.39 4.82 0.07 2.64

Boron as B mg/Kg 1.42 0.89 1.03 2.06 1.31 0.79 1.04 1.59 2.05 1.91

Zinc as Zn mg/Kg 69.7 62.8 23.9 43.1 41.9 46.9 19.4 37.6 19.9 26.1

Lead as Pb mg/Kg 8.21 7.81 7.62 6.71 7.21 5.62 6.36 8.12 S.91 6.72




The analytical results of the soil samples collected during the study period are

summarized in above Table 3.18.

The pH of the soil is an important property as plants cannot grow in low and high

pH soils. The normal range of the soils from 6.0 to 8.5 is called as normal to saline

soils. Most of the essential nutrients like N, P, K, Cl and SO4 are available for plants

at the neutral pH, except for Fe, Mn and Al which are available at low pH range. The

soils having pH below 7 are considered to be acidic from the practical standpoint,

those with pH less than 5.5 and which respond to liming may be considered to

qualify to be designated as acid soils. On the basis of pH measurements, the degree

of soil acidity may be indicated. The pH values in the study area are varying from

6.95 to 7.18.

Based on the electrical conductivity, the soils are classified into 4 groups (Normal,

Critical for germination, Critical for growth of the sensitive crops, Injurious to most

crops). The electrical conductivity in the study area is varying from 114 to 212 µs/cm

indicating that soils falling under Normal category.

The organic carbon in the study area is varying from 0.43 to 0.65 %.

The other important parameters for characterization of soil for irrigation are N, P,

K. Nitrogen, Phosphorus and Potassium are known as primary nutrients; Calcium,

Magnesium and Sulphur as secondary nutrients. The primary and secondary

nutrient elements are known as major elements. This classification is based on their

relative abundance and not on their relative importance.

Nitrogen encourages the vegetative development of plants by imparting a healthy

green colour to the leaves. It also controls, to some extent, the efficient utilization

of phosphorus and potassium. Its deficiency retards growth and root development,

turns the foliage yellowish or pale green, hastens maturity, causes the shriveling of

grains and lowers crop yield. The older leaves are affected first. An excess of

nitrogen produces leathery (and sometimes crinkled), dark green leaves and

succulent growth. It also delays the maturation of plants, impairs the quality of

crops like barley, potato, tobacco, sugarcane and fruits increases susceptibility to

diseases and causes ”lodging” of cereal crops by inducing an undue lengthening of

the stem internodes. The available Nitrogen as N in the study area is varying from

189 to 286 kg/ha, samples are falling in medium category.

Phosphorus influences the vigor of plants and improves the quality of crops. It

encourages the formation of new cells, promotes root growth (particularly the

development of fibrous roots), and hastens leaf development, the emergence of

ears, the formation of grains and the maturation of crops. It also increases

resistance to disease and strengthens the stems of cereal plants, thus reducing their



tendency to lodge. It offsets the harmful effects of excess nitrogen in the plant.

When applied to leguminous crops it hastens and encourages the development of

nitrogen fixing nodule bacteria. If phosphorus is deficient in the soil, plants fail to

make a quick start, do not develop a satisfactory root-system, remain stunted, and

sometimes develop a tendency to show a reddish or purplish discolouration of the

stem and foliage owing to an abnormal increase in the sugar content and the

formation of anthocyanin. However the deficiency of this element is not so easily

recognized as that of nitrogen. It has also been observed that cattle feeding on the

produce of phosphorus deficient soils become dwarfed, develop stiff joints and lose

the velvety feel of the skin. Such animals show an abnormal craving for eating bones

and even soil itself. In the study area available Phosphorus is varying from 14- 95

kg/ha, which indicates that samples are falling in high category.

Potassium enhances the ability of the plants to resist diseases, insect attacks, cold

and other adverse conditions. It plays an essential part in the formation of starch

and in the production and translocation of sugars and is thus of special value to

carbohydrates rich crops, e.g. sugarcane, potato and sugar beet.

The increased production of starch and sugar in legumes fertilized with potash

benefits the symbiotic bacteria and thus enhances the fixation of nitrogen. It also

improves the quality of tobacco, citrus, etc. With an adequate supply of potash,

cereals produce plump grains and strong straw. But excess of the element tends to

delay maturity, though not to the same extent as nitrogen. Plants can take up and

store potassium in much larger quantities than what is needed for optimum growth

and this excess uptake is known as luxury consumption. With the maturity or death

of plants, potassium is washed out from the plant body readily.

Vegetables and legumes are particularly heavy consumers of potassium. The

deficiency of potassium produces the characteristic ringing of alfalfa leaves with

rows of small white spots, reddish brown discoloration of cotton leaves, the drying,

scorching and curbing of leaf margins of potato, interveinal chlorosis and flaring

along the edges of maize leaves. The older leaves are affected first.

The available potassium in the study area is varying between 145 to 272 kg/ha

which indicates that all samples are falling in medium category.

3.8 Ecology and Biodiversity

3.8.1 Introduction

An ecological survey of the study area was conducted particularly with reference to

recording the existing biological resources in the study area. Ecological studies are one of

the important aspects of Environmental Impact Assessment with a view to conserve

environmental quality and biodiversity. The present objective is to study an area 10 km



radius from the proposed project site.

Ecological systems show complex inter-relationships between biotic and abiotic

components including dependence, competition and mutualism. Biotic components

comprise of both plant and animal communities, which interact not only within and

between themselves but also with the abiotic components viz. physical and chemical

components of the environment.

Generally, biological communities are good indicators of climatic and edaphic factors.

Studies on biological aspects of ecosystems are important in Environmental Impact

Assessment for safety of natural flora and fauna. The biological environment includes

terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems.

The animal and plant communities co-exist in a well-organized manner. Their natural

settings can get disturbed by any externally induced anthropological activities or by

naturally occurring calamities or disaster. So, once this setting is disturbed, it sometimes is

either practically impossible or may take a longer time to come back to its original state.

Hence, changes in the status of flora and fauna are an elementary requirement of

Environmental Impact Assessment studies, in view of the need for conservation of

environmental quality and biodiversity. Information on flora and fauna was collected within

the study area. Relevant details on aquatic life within the study area were collected from

related government offices.

Generation of base-line data and knowing the types and extents of pollutants would be the

first step of the environmental study report. The biological assessment is trustworthy and

acceptable method to understand the impact of surroundings. This leads to suggesting

remedial measures for minimizing impact. The aim of environment management plan is to

manage the ecosystems with least alterations because only this can make ecosystem

stable.

3.8.2 Terrestrial Ecological Studies

3.8.2.1 Objectives of Ecological Study

The main objective of the survey is to collect the information about the ecology and

biodiversity of the project site and its surrounding of the project site within 10.0km radius.

Generate baseline data from field observations from various terrestrial and aquatic

ecosystems, to assess the distribution of flora and fauna in and around of the project site

compare the data so generated with authentic past records to understand changes

characterize the environmental components like land, water, flora and fauna. To assess the



impacts of the project on the immediate ecology and biodiversity.

3.8.2.2 Methods Adopted for the Study

To accomplish the above objectives, a general ecological survey covering an area of 10 km

radius from the proposed project boundary was done as follows:

Reconnaissance survey for selection of sampling sites in and around the site on the

basis of meteorological conditions;

Compilation of secondary data from published literature of Forest Division

Primary data generation through systematic studies which was done through:

Generation of primary data to understand baseline ecological status, fauna

structure and important floristic elements;

Preparing a checklist of plants observed at the site.

Determining the bird population by taking random readings at every location.

Observing mammals, reptiles, amphibians, insects through their calls, droppings,

burrows, pugmarks and other signs.

Interaction with local residents

Collection of secondary data from Forest Working Plan and Gazetteers. The compilation of

primary and secondary data for flora and fauna is appended. Primary data collected from

core and buffer zone of the project site, surrounding villages.

3.8.3 Flora

As per primary survey details, some parts of the land are fertile and support vegetation

some parts of the land is devoid of any vegetation, and a fair agro- vegetation cover in the

study area. Growth of grasses in the study area is more in rainy season. There are no

notified areas used by protected, important or sensitive species of flora or fauna within

10km radius of the project. The list of flora observed at the study area and surrounding of

the project site given in Table 3.19

Table 3.19: List of Flora in the Study Area

S. No. Botanical Name Local Name/ English Name

1 Ficus carica Anjir

2 Terminalia belerica Baheda

3 Prosopis juliflora Vilayati babool

4 Polyalthia longifolia Ashok

5 Accia arabica Babool

6 Azadirachta indica Neem




7 Dendrocalamus

strictus

Bans

8 Albizzia lebbeck Kala siras

9 Mangifera indica Aam/Mango

10 Pyrus communis Nashpati

Source: Primary Field Survey Report

3.8.4 Fauna

As the project site is near to the Nimbuan village and nearby no protected/declared

biosphere is available. The core area is isolated from its surroundings by barrier; there are

no chances for any kind of isolation or restriction of any wild animal to the core area or the

buffer area. As they are capable of moving from place to place either for food or shelter or

mate, it is not proper to list them separately for different areas. Hence, common lists are

prepared based on available secondary data and on the basis of direct observation, indirect

or circumstantial evidence such as foot prints, feathers, skin, hair, hooves etc.

The presence of fauna depends on topography and vegetation in the area. The animals like

Neel Gai (Boselaphus tragocamelus), Fox (Vulpes bengalensis), Hare (Lepus nigricollis), are

found in the study area. The reptiles like snake, lizard are also found in the area. Among

the birds mainly crow (Corvus splendens), sparrow (Athene broma), dove, pigeon (Columba

livia) are found in the area.The list of fauna observed during primary survey and based on

secondary sources is given in Table 3.20

Table 3.20 List of Fauna in the Study Area

S.No Scientific name Common name Family WPA Schedule

Mammals

1 Lepus nigricollis Hare Lepomprphia Schedule-IV

2 Boselaphus tragocamelus

Nilgai Bovidae Schedule-III

3 Vulpes bengalensis Fox Canidae part-II Schedule-II

4 Harpestes edwardsi Common mongoose Herpestidae Schedule -II

5 Funambulus pennanti Five Stripped squirrel

Sciuridae Schedule-III

6 Canis lupus Dog Canidae Schedule-IV

7 Capra aegagrus hircus Goat Bovidae Schedule-IV

8 Felis cattus Cat felidae Schedule-IV

9 Bubalus bubalis Buffaloes Bovidae Schedule-IV

10 Cynopterus sphinx vahl. Bat Pteropodidae Schedule-V

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Suidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Canidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sciuridae



S.No Scientific name Common name Family WPA Schedule

Avian Fauna

1 Acridotheres tristis Myna Sturnidae Schedule-IV

2 Corvus splendens House Crow Corvidae Schedule-V

3 Coracias benghalensis Indian roller Coraciidae Schedule-IV

4 Gruidae Crane Gruidae Schedule-IV

5 Psittacula krameri Parrot Psittaculidae Schedule-IV

6 Eudynamys scolopaceus Common Koel Cuculidae Schedule-VI

7 Milvus migrans Black Kite Accipitridae Schedule-VI

8 Clanga hastate Common Eagle Accipitridae Schedule-IV

9 Dinopium benghalense Woodpecker Picidae Schedule-IV

Reptiles

15 Hemidactylus sp House Lizard Gekkonidae Schedule-II

16 Calotes versicolor Garden Lizard Agamidae Schedule-III

17 Ptyas mucosus Rat snake Colubridae Schedule-II

18 Naja naja Cobra Elapidae Schedule-IV

19 Bungarus candidus Krait Elapidae Schedule-IV

20 Vipera russeli Viper Viperidae Schedule-IV

21 Chamaeleo chamaeleon common chameleon Chamaeleonidae

Amphibians

22 Bufo melanosticus Indian Toad Bufonidae Schedule-IV

23 Rhacophorus maculatus Indian Tree frog Rhacophoridae Schedule-IV

Rana tigrina Bull frog Dicroglossidae Schedule-IV

Rodents

24 Rattus rattus Rat Muridae Schedule-V

25 Mus musculus House Mouse Muridae Schedule-V

26 Bandicota indica Bandicoot Muridae Schedule-IV

Source: Primary Field Survey Report

3.8.5 Aquatic Ecology Cropping Pattern

3.8.5.1 Cropping Pattern of the Study Area

Some agricultural activity is observed in the buffer zone of the study area. The district has

two main major crops, wheat and paddy with combined cropping area of more than 86%.

The principal rabi crop is wheat, while subsidiary crops are gram, barley, oilseeds(sarson,

torial taramira & alsi) and winter vegetables such as peas , cabbage, cauliflower , turnip,

carrot , etc, The principal kharif crops are paddy , sugarcane, cotton and ground nut , while

maize , jowar and bajra are minor crops.

Kharif vegetables include tomato and ladyfinger, kharif pulses are maily moong, mash

arhar, soyabeen, etc. while fruits like grapes, pear, peach, guava, etc. are grown in the

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Coraciidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gekkonidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Agamidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Colubridae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Elapidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Viperidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chamaeleonidae

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dicroglossidae



district.

Most of the cultivation of the area is based on monsoon rains. However, ground water i.e.

by tube wells and dug wells are also used for cultivation.

Table 3.21 Common crops/vegetables /pulses /fruits found in the study area


Common crops

1 T. aestivum Gaihoon/ Wheat

2 Hordeum vulgare Jow/ Barley

3 Gossypium arboreum Rui/ Cotton

4 Zia mays Makka/Maize

Vegetables

1 Brassica oleracea var.Botrytis Phool Gobhi /Cauli flower

2 Solanum esculentum Tamatar/ Tomato

3 Pisum sativum Matar/ Pea

4 Spinacia oleracea Palak/ Spinach

5 Allium cepa Piaz /Onion

Pulses

1 Vigna radiate Moong/ Green gram

2 Cajanus cajan Arhar /Pigeon pea

3 Lens culinaris Masoor/ Lentil

Common fruit trees

1 Litchi chinensis Lichi/ Lichi

2 Pyrus Nashpati/ Pear

3 Ziziphus mauritiana Ber/ Indian jujube

4 Psidium guajava Amrood/ Guava

Common oilseeds

1 Arachis hypogaea Mungfali/ Groundnut

2 Helianthus annuus Surajmukhi/ Sunflower

3 Sesamum indicum Til/ Sesamum

4 Brassica napus Sarso/ Rapeseed

3.8.6 Aquatic Ecology

Other than the seasonal streams, village tanks and rain water harvesting ponds and there

is Ghaggar River 5.5 km flowing NW from the project site. Dangri River which is 3.0 km

North is dry. At the time of site visit it was dry and there was no reservoir either in the core

area or buffer zone. There are no protected wetlands or other ecologically sensitive areas

within the 10 km radius of the project area. As such, the area is not important from the

point of aquatic ecology. There are no REET category species of aquatic and semi aquatic

plants in the study area.



3.8.7 Biological Environment

There are no National Park and Wildlife Sanctuaries within the study area. Hence, there is

no impact anticipated on the same. Inspite of this, efforts will be made not only to maintain

the ecological balance of the surroundings but also to improve upon the same.

The attributes that are identified to describe ecology are animals, birds, fish, field crops,

threatened species, natural vegetation etc. The study area does not have any identified

endangered species, national park, sanctuaries and hence there is no question of any

adverse impact on the same.

As it is an existing project sufficient green belt is already developed in area of 6.2 acres in

which is 30% of the project area. Emphasis will be placed on social forestry programme

wherein tree plantation would be undertaken within the plant premises.

Out of the total project area of 20.7 acres, along the boundary a 10 m wide greenbelt with

three rows of plantation shall be grown. The total area under greenbelt and block

plantations shall come to 33% of the total area. All along the roads on both sides, avenue

trees will be grown at the rate of 400 per every km of road, at a distance of 5 m.

The tree plantation under this programme would help in absorbing atmospheric heat, noise

as well as pollutants. Hence, all efforts will be put-up by the project proponent to maintain

the ecological balance and improve the environment in terms of ecology and green belt

development.

3.8.8 Green Belt Development and Afforestation

Tree plantation is one of the effective remedial measures, which controls air pollution. It

also causes aesthetic and climatological improvements of an area as well as sustains and

supports the biosphere.

It is a well-established fact that trees and vegetation act as a vast natural sink for the

gaseous as well as particulate air pollutants due to enormous surface area of leaves.

Plantation around the air pollution sources control the air pollution by filtering particulate

matter and interacting with gaseous pollutants before it reaches the earth. Trees also act

as buffers and absorbers against accidental release of pollutants.

AS per the CPCB guidelines for development of green plantation the project area falls under

the transgenic plains climatic zones and the climate is semi-arid to dry sub-humid type.



Most of the region is covered with soils of alluvial (recent-calcareous type). A list of plants

suggested for greenbelt and avenue plantations is given in Table 3.22.

Table 3.22. List of Plants Identified for Greenbelt and Avenue Plantations.

Botanical name Local or common name Importance

Abutilon indicum Linn Kanghi Shrub

Acacia auriculiformis Australian wattle Avenue tree

Acacia catechu, Wild Khair Shade and timber

Acacia dealbata Silver wattle Tree

Acacia leucophloea Wild Safed baul Shrub

Alstonia scholaris Chattiyan saittan kajat Ornamental tree

Albizia lebbeck siris Shade and timber

Anthocephalus indica Kadamba Shade and timber

Azadirachta indica Neem Multipurpose

Bambusa arundinacia (Retz) Roxb Kantabans Shade and timber

Bambusa vulgaris Schrad Golden bamboo Shade and timber

Dalbergia sissoo Shisham Avenue and timber tree

Dendrocalamus strictus Bamboo Bamboo products

Grevillea robusta Silver Oak Erect non shedding tree

Gardenia jasminoides Eills. dikamali Tree

Holoptelia integrifolia Kanju Fibre and timber

Lagerstroemia parviflora Phurush Tall Tree

Mangifera indica Mango/aam Edible fruit

Millingtonia hortensis Indian cork Ornamental tree

Mimosops elengi Bakuli Shade and edible fruit

Muntingia calabura Wild cherry Shade and edible fruit

Peltophorum pterocarpum Copper pod Shade only

Populus nigra lombardy Tree

Polyalthia pendula Ashoka Majestic tree

Polyalthia longifolia Ashoka Avenue tree

Samania saman Rain tree Avenue tree.

Spathodea companulata Flame of the forest Ornamental avenue tree

Syzygium cumini Jamun Edible fruits

Tamarindus indica Imli Tamarind fruit and leaf

Terminalia arjuna Nallamaddi Timber and shade tree

Terminalia catappa Desi Baadam Edible nuts



3.9 Google Imagery and Topo map for 10 km radius

The satellite based remote sensing is a sustainable global information system because it

has the potential to meet the needs and demands of the present and future. The synoptic

coverage, which provides capability for integration of real time information on regional and

global scales, is a unique characteristic of this information system. Its versatility lies in its

inherent capability to conceptualize situation to give clear perceptions for defining short

term and long term objectives.

3.10 Land Use land Cover

The satellite based remote sensing is a sustainable global information system because it

has the potential to meet the needs and demands of the present and future. The synoptic

Average, which provides capability for integration of real time information on regional and

global scales, is a unique characteristic of this information system. Its versatility lies in its

inherent capability to conceptualize situation to give clear perceptions for defining short

term and long term objectives.

An activity could bring about changes in the Land use and Land cover in the vicinity. A data

based on Land use and land cover indicates ecosystems existing in and around the centre

of an economic activity, to safeguard to allow comparison at a future date to draw

conclusions on the nature.

The study reported here is with the honest intention of building such a database on Land

use and land cover in an area within about 10 km radius of the proposed project. The details

of the land use present in the 10 km study area are given below in Table 3.23; Land use

Land cover Map and satellite imagery shown in figure is shown in Figure 3.7, 3.8



Table 3.23 Present Land Use and Land cover details (10 km Radius)

Sl.No Description Area in Ha %

1 Habitation 2470.7 7.5

2 Industrial Land 801.7 2.4

3 Agricultural Land 6460.7 19.6

4 Current Fallow 5460.2 16.6

5 Plantation 173.2 0.5

6 Open Forest 972.5 3.0

7 Scrub Forest 930.1 2.8

8 Barren Rocky 168.0 0.5

9 Others 6033.9 18.3

10 Land with Scrub 6029.4 18.3

11 Land without Scrub 1241.4 3.8

12 River with Water channel 1025.8 3.1

13 Dry River Bed 735.4 2.2

14 Nala 380.1 1.2

15 Water Body 15.9 0.0

Total area 32899.0 100.0



Figure 3.6 Land use and Land cover Map



Figure 3.7 Satellite Imagery



3.11 Socio-Economic Environment

3.11.1 Demography and Socio-Economics (secondary data description)

This section illustrates the prevailing socio-economic aspects of people inhabiting in villages

around boundary PWMP at Nimbua village, Mohali Dist., Punjab. It also attempts to

comprehend the social phenomenon so as to represent the demographic, occupational,

gender and diversity among the project area villages, thereby postulate impactful

developmental interventions.

3.11.2 Methodology Adopted for the Study

The study area covers 16 villages in the 10-km radial distance from the periphery of the

project site of PWMP a Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal

Facility, at Nimbua village, Mohali Dist., Punjab. The baseline study adopted a two-fold

methodology for data collection, namely, review of published secondary data and

collection of primary data. Secondary data was collected from district census statistics of

2011, which includes: demography, occupational structure, literacy profile and Social

structure etc.

Similarly, the primary data was collected through transact walks, administering structured

questionnaire, Focus group discussions, observation and key stakeholder interactions in

project area villages.

The salient features of the demographic and socio-economic aspects are described in the

following sections. Similarly, village wise demographic data as per 2011 census is also

presented in subsequent Annexures.

3.11.3 Socio-Economic profile of the study area:

3.11.3.1 Demographic Aspects Distribution of Population

As per 2011 census the study area consists of 17188 and the distribution of population in

the study area is given in Table 3.24



Table 3.24 Distribution of Population in the Study Area

Source: District Primary Census statistics of Punjab -2011

As illustrated in the above table, the gender composition, as percentage of men and women

constitute about 53.6% and 46.4% in the study area respectively.

3.11.4 Average Household Size

According to the Census data of 2011, the study area had an average family size of 5.3

persons per household. This represents moderately high family size and also in similarity

with other parts of the district.

3.11.4.1 Population Density

It is estimated that the average density of population of the study area is 320 persons per

km2.

3.11.4.2 Sex Ratio

To reiterate; the male and female constitute 53.6% and 46.4% respectively and number of

females per 1000 males is 867. The gap in sex ratio perhaps could be attributed to certain

sociological aspects with regards female births rate in rural areas. This is a result of infant

mortality among female children, single person family structure and migration of industrial

workers.

3.11.4.3 Social Structure

The Socio-Economic study observed that 29.5% of population belongs to Scheduled Castes

(SC) in the project area. On the other hand, there are no Scheduled Tribe (ST) households

S no. Particulars 0-10 km

1 No. of Households 3231

2 Male Population 9206

3 Female Population 7982

4 Total Population 17188

5 Total Population (0-6 years) 2168

6 Average Household Size 5.3

7 % of males to the total population 53.6

8 % of females to the total population 46.4

9 Sex Ratio (no of females per 1000 males) 867



in the entire project area villages which are covered in the Socio-Economic study. The

distribution of population in the study area by social structure is shown in Table 3.25.

Table 3.25 Distribution of Population by Social Structure

S.no Particulars 0-10 km

1 Schedule caste 5068

2 % to the total population 29.5

3 Schedule Tribes 0

4 % to the total population 0

5 Total SC and ST population 5068

6 % to total population 29.5

7 Total population 17188


3.11.4.4 Literacy Levels

The analysis of the literacy levels in the study area reveals that an average literacy rate of

64.4% as per 2011 census data. The distribution of literates and literacy rates in the study

area is illustrated in Table 3.26. However, the male literacy of the study area is 58.3%,

whereas literacy rate among women, which is an important indicator for social change, is

estimated to be 41.7%.

Table 3.26 Distribution of Literate and Literacy Rates

Sr.no Particulars 0-10 km

1 Male Population 9206

2 Female Population 7982


4 Male literates 6453

5 Female literates 4614

6 Total literates 11067

7 Male literacy rate (%) 58.3

8 Female literacy rate (%) 41.7

9 % of Male literates to the Male Population 70.1

10 % of Female literates to the Female Population 57.8

11 Total Literacy rate (%) 64.4




3.11.4.5 Occupational Structure

The occupational structure of project area is studied with reference to three categories via.,

main workers, marginal workers and non-workers. The main workers include 4 categories

of workers defined by the Census Department; consists of cultivators, agricultural

labourers, those engaged in manufacturing, processing and repairs in household industry;

and others including those engaged in household industry, construction, trade and

commerce, transport and communication and all other services.

The marginal workers are those workers engaged in some work for a period of less than six

months during the reference year prior to the census survey. The non-workers include

those engaged in unpaid household duties, students, retired persons, dependents, beggars,

vagrants etc.; institutional inmates or all other non-workers who do not fall under the

above categories.

As per 2011 census, there is a total of 34.3% main workers in the study area. The marginal

workers and non-workers constitute to 4.6% and 61.1% of the total population

respectively. Therefore, non-workers are predominant in the total distribution of workers

by occupation. The occupational structure of the study area is given in Table 3.27.

Table 3.27 Occupational Structure

S.no Particulars 0-10 km


2 Total workers 6680

3 Work participation rate (%)(Total Workers / Total population)*100 38.9

4 Main workers 5865

5 % of main workers to total population 34.3

6 Marginal workers 785

7 % of marginal workers to total population 4.6

8 Non-workers 10508

9 % of non-workers to total population 61.1

10 Dependency Ratio 1.6


3.11.4.6 Dependency Ratio

Based on the occupational structure of the study area the dependency rate of non-workers

on the workers category has been estimated at 1.6. The study also noted that, majority of

the educated youth are also part of the non-working population as they don’t have any job



opportunities in the area. The prevalence of low industrialization and subsistence

agriculture has affected the employability of local population, therefore there is a need for

income generation activities to strengthen the livelihoods of local population.

3.11.4.7 Other Observations

The socio-Economic study revealed that the youth in the project area are devoid of

employment opportunities. They can be a potential source of workers with minimum

handholding and vocational education skills. The youth have expressed their willingness to

setting up of industries in the area as it provides them gainful employment opportunities.

Similarly, this would also trigger many direct and indirect benefits for economic

advancement and social development of project area. The study also noted an active

presence of women groups in the project area villages. Many of these groups are acting as

micro-finance entities, rotating small amount of loans among the group members.

3.11.5 Suggestions for improvement of Socio-Economic status

The socio-Economic status of the population in the project area shall be improved through

CSR and focused community development interventions. Some of the salient activities are

illustrated below:

Need to develop Sustainable water sources through village level Overhead tanks for

the consumption of people and their livestock is the prime factor to be considered

as the most of the villagers are not vulnerable in getting proper drinking facilities

Periodical health check-up camps need to be conducted

Providing capacity building trainings and strengthening of SHG activities

Distribution of vitamin and de worming tablets to anganwadi and school going

children, distribution of iron tablets to women will bring a tremendous change in

the health of women and children

Youth empowerment programs though awareness creation about various

government schemes, providing appropriate opportunities with relevance to their

qualification and skills, conducting skills inculcating programs etc.,

Enhancing women empowerment through conducting skill training programmes for

rural women in tailoring, manufacturing household items would enhance their

income thereby create better livelihood opportunities for the rural women. These

products can be purchased or marketed by company, which will provide additional

employment opportunity of the rural women & adolescent girls.

A number of CSR activities can be initiated in the project area villages on

convergence mode whilst partnering with exiting Government schemes and

financial support from developmental institutions like NABARD.



Table 3.28 Demographic details in the study area of 10 km radius:

S.NO

Name of the

village No_HH TOT_P TOT_M TOT_F P_06 P_SC P_ST P_LIT M_LIT F_LIT

TOT_

WORK_P

MAIN

WORK_P

MARG

WORK_P

NON_

WORK_P

1 Ratwara 78 491 248 243 61 0 0 389 199 190 205 154 51 286

2 Rajgarh 4 26 13 13 3 0 0 19 11 8 9 9 0 17

3 Chatauli 106 557 293 264 66 276 0 297 173 124 167 114 53 390

4 Naggal 66 336 168 168 37 228 0 261 139 122 95 95 0 241

5 Kauru Majra 5 26 15 11 3 0 0 20 13 7 25 25 0 1

6 Alipur 57 353 186 167 50 18 0 249 138 111 114 113 1 239

7 Kalauli 358 2030 1082 948 245 1380 0 1226 734 492 683 677 6 1347

8 Batauli 237 1305 690 615 128 725 0 953 531 422 390 375 15 915

9 Kheri gujran 280 1696 936 760 194 278 0 992 602 390 501 481 20 1195

10 Fatehpur 237 1218 649 569 186 508 0 790 454 336 489 336 153 729

11 Behra 621 3046 1642 1404 423 150 0 1746 1041 705 1147 1051 96 1899

12 Bhagwanpur 256 1275 684 591 143 479 0 874 498 376 408 250 158 867

13 Rampur Sainian 412 2096 1118 978 213 350 0 1571 907 664 1293 1120 173 803

14 Nimbua 168 901 493 408 152 546 0 496 289 207 482 472 10 419

15 Bahadurgarh 59 305 161 144 50 67 0 183 111 72 176 174 2 129

16

Haripur

Hinduan 287 1527 828 699 214 63 0 1001 613 388 496 449 47 1031

Total 3231 17188 9206 7982 2168 5068 0 11067 6453 4614 6680 5895 785 10508

Abbreviations:

No_HH: No. of House Holds, TOT_P: Total Population, TOT_M: Total Male, TOT_F: Total Female, P_06: Population below 6 years P_ST:

Population belongs to ST, P_LIT: Population Literate, P_ILL: Population Illiterate, TOT_WORK_P: Total Working Population NON_WORK_P:

Number of Non-Working population.

CHAPTER 4

4

ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION

MEASURES



4. Chapter 4

Anticipated environmental impacts and

Mitigation measures 4.1 Identification of Impacts

Any developmental activity in its wake will bring about some impacts associated with its

origin, which can be broadly classified as reversible, irreversible, long and short-term

impacts. In this chapter, an endeavor has been made to identify various environmental

impacts associated with the operation of facility and other activities wherein, there may

be a chance of pollution. Based on the possible worst case emissions and waste

generation from the proposed project and also taking into consideration the baseline

environmental status at the proposed project site, the environmental factors that are

likely to be affected (Impacts) are identified, quantified and assessed. Both instrumental

(positive) and detrimental (negative) impacts are accounted for this purpose. The

prediction of impacts helps in the preparation of a sound environmental management

plan which has to be executed during the on-going activities for the proposed project to

minimize the adverse impacts on the environmental quality.

A large number of adverse impacts occur from facility operations. These impacts can be

fatal accidents (e.g., scavengers buried under waste piles) infrastructure damage (e.g.,

damage to access roads by heavy vehicles) pollution of the local environment (such as

contamination of groundwater and/or aquifers by leakage and residual soil contamination

during landfill usage, as well as after landfill closure) off-gassing of methane generated by

decaying organic wastes (methane is a greenhouse gas many times more potent than

carbon dioxide, and can itself be a danger to inhabitants of an area); harboring of disease

vectors such as rats and flies, particularly from improperly operated landfills.

4.2 Methodology

The potential impacts on the environment from the proposed project are identified based

on the nature of the various activities associated not only with the project

implementation and operation, but also on the current status of the environmental

quality at the project site.



4.3 Potential Impacts

The potential significant environmental impacts associated with the project are grouped

as below.

Air Environment

Impacts on ambient air quality

Impacts on ambient odor

Impacts on ambient noise

Water Environment

Impacts on surface & ground water quality

Impacts on aquatic life

Land Environment

Impacts on land use

Impacts on soil fertility

Impacts on agriculture

Socio Economics

Impacts on infrastructure

Impacts on employment

Indirect Impacts

Impacts on public health and safety

Impacts on aesthetics

4.4 Prediction of Impacts

The impact assessment is carried out for the following phases and presented in the

following paragraphs.

Impacts during development phase

Impacts during operation phase

4.5 Impacts during Development Phase


infrastructure provision and any other infrastructure activities. The impacts due to


impacts will be mainly on air quality, water quality, soil quality and socio-economics.



4.5.1 Impact on Air Quality

The principal potential source of air quality impact arising from the construction of the

proposed project is fugitive dust generation. The dust, measurable as Suspended

Particulate Matter and Respirable Suspended Particulates would be generated as a result

of construction activities. The construction program of the projects shall commence

immediately after obtaining statutory clearances.

The potential dust sources associated with construction activities are loading and

unloading of the materials, top soil removal, travel over unpaved roads and wind erosion

etc. The construction works associated with the proposed development are broadly given

below.

1. Site development and foundation works

2. Dust generation due to vehicles bringing raw materials

3. Un loading of raw materials, removal of un wanted waste material from site

4. Civil constructions and provision of infrastructure required for various activities

proposed

Among all the construction activities, site formation has the highest potential for causing

dust nuisance to the nearby air sensitive locations. During the construction of the project,

existing houses nearby may be subject to the potential dust impacts.

Exhaust emissions from vehicles and equipment deployed during the construction phase

is also likely to result in marginal increase in the levels of SO2, NOX, PM, CO and un-burnt

hydrocarbons. The impact of such activities would be temporary and restricted to the

construction phase. The impact is generally confined to the project area and is expected

to be negligible outside the plant boundaries.

Mitigation Measures Proposed – Air Quality

For the proposed project site levelling and grading will be carried out, where ever

possible to maintain the natural elevations they will not be disturbed, only levelling

activity will be carried out for providing roads, sewage network, storm water system, and

places required for providing buildings for administrative and plant shed erection.

According to the engineering assessment; most of the excavated material shall be reused

within the project boundary. The movement of cut and fill material will be limited.

Most of the construction dust will be generated from the movement of construction

vehicles on unpaved roads. Unloading and removal of soil material shall also act as a

potential source for dust nuisance. The control measures proposed to be taken up are

given below.



1. The important dust suppression measures proposed will be regular water

sprinkling on main haul roads in the project area, this activity will be carried out at

least twice a day, if need arises frequency will be increased on windy days, in this

way around 50% reduction on the dust contribution from the exposed surface will

be achieved.

2. The duration of stockpiling will be as short as possible as most of the material will

be used as backfill material for the open cut trenches for road development.

3. Temporary tin sheets of sufficient height (3m) will be erected around the site of

dust generation or all around the project site as barrier for dust control.

4. Tree plantations around the project boundary will be initiated at the early stages

by

5. Plantation of 2 to 3 years old saplings, regular watering will be done, so that the

area will be moist for most part of the day.

6. To reduce the dust movement from civil construction site to the neighborhood the

external part of the building (administration, canteen, etc) will be covered by

plastic sheets

Given the implementation of proper control measures for dust suppression, no adverse

impacts are expected and compliance with the Ambient Air Quality is achieved at ASR’s

(Air Pollution Sensitive Receivers) at all time.

4.5.2 Impact on Water Quality

The proposed project will involve various construction activities. The following section

summarizes the activities likely to be undertaken during the proposed development and

describes the potential impacts on water quality from each activity.

Site formation

Preparation of designated area of land for subsequent development activities involves

levelling of the ground surface, removal of vegetation, stockpiling and generation of

construction waste. Construction of temporary infrastructure such as drainage culverts

may be required. The site formation may produce large quantities of run-off with high

suspended solids loading in the absence of appropriate mitigation measures. This

potential problem may be aggravated during rainy season.

Construction of Buildings

In rainy season during the construction phase due to construction of various civil

structures site runoff results significant pollution in the receiving water bodies and

washing of various construction equipments will also result in water pollution.



Site workshop

The used engine oil and lubricants, and their storage as waste materials as the potential

to create impacts if spillage occurs. Waste oil may infiltrate into the surface soil layers, or

runoff into local Water courses, increasing hydrocarbon levels. Proper precautionary

measures should be taken to prevent any spillage of the above materials and their

subsequent runoff into the water bodies.

Presence of workers

During construction, impacts from the workers include waste and wastewater generated

from eating areas, and sewage from temporary sanitary facilities. Sewage is characterized

by high levels of BOD, ammonia and E.Coli. Significant water quality impact will happen

only if the sewage is discharged directly into the receiving waters without any prior

treatment.

Mitigation Measures – Water Quality

During site development necessary precautions will be taken, so that the runoff water

from the site gets collected to working pit and if any over flow is, will be diverted to

nearby greenbelt/ plantation area. During construction activity all the equipments

washed water will be diverted to working pit to arrest the suspended solids if any and the

settled water will be reused for construction purposes, and for sprinkling on roads to

control the dust emission, etc. The domestic sewage generated will be treated in portable

STP or sent to septic tank/soak pit.

4.5.3 Impact of Noise Levels

The major activities, which produce periodic noise, during construction phase, are as

follows:

Foundation works, Fabrication of structures

Plant erection

Operation of construction equipment

Movement of vehicles etc

Mitigation Measures

All noise generating equipment will be used during day time for brief period of its

requirement. Proper enclosures will be used for reduction in noise levels, where ever

possible the noise generating equipment will be kept away from the human habituation.

Therefore, impact on noise environment due to proposed project would be insignificant.

All vehicles entering into the project will be informed to maintain speed limits, and not

blow horns unless it is required.



4.5.4 Impact Due to Solid Waste Generation

This category of waste generation in the proposed project is due to different types of raw

materials being used during construction stage in general may comprise the following

Cement concrete

Bricks, tiles,

Cement plaster

Steel (RCC, door/ window frames, roofing support, railings of staircase etc)

Rubble, sand, Stone (Marble, granite, sand stone)

Timber/wood

Paints/varnishes

Besides above there are some major and minor components namely conduits, pipes,

electrical fixtures, panels, etc. all the above items will be segregated and stored at the site

and once the facility established will be process the same in respective treatment

facilities within the site.

Mitigation Measures for Solid Waste

The solid waste generated during this period being predominantly inert in nature. Hence

maximum effort would be made to reuse and recycle them. The most of the solid waste

material can be used for filing/ levelling of low-laying areas within the site. All attempts

should be made to stick to the following measures.

1. All construction waste shall be stored within the site itself. A proper screen will be

provided so that the waste does not get scattered.

2. Attempts will be made to keep the waste segregated into different heaps as far as

possible so that their further gradation and reuse is facilitated.

3. Materials, which can be reused for purpose of construction, levelling, making

roads/ pavement will also be kept in separate heaps from those which are to be

sold or land filled.

4. The local body or a private company may be arranged to provide appropriate

number of skip containers/ trolleys on hire.

The use of the construction material basically depends on their separation and conditions

of the separated material. A majority of these materials are durable and therefore, have a

high potential for reuse. It would, however, be desirable to have quality standards for the

recycled materials. Construction waste can be used in the following manner.

1. Reuse of bricks, tiles, stone slabs, timber, piping railings etc to the extent possible

and depending upon their conditions.

2. Sale/ auction of materials which cannot be used at the site due to design

constraint



3. Plastics, broken glass, scrap metal etc will be stored and processed within the site

premises.

4. Rubble/ brick bats can be used for building activity, such as levelling, under coat of

lanes where the traffic does not constitute heavy moving loads.

5. Larger unusable pieces can be sent for filing up low laying areas.

6. Fine material such as sand, dust, etc can be used as cover material

7. The unearthed soil can be used for levelling as well as for lawn development

8. The broken pieces of the flooring material can be used for levelling in the building

or can be disposed off

9. The unused or remaining paints/varnishes/wood can either be reused or can be

disposed off.

4.5.5 Impact on Land Use

Due to the development of Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage,

Disposal and Recycling Facilities providing necessary air pollution control measures,

wastewater treatment and disposal measures, noise pollution control measures, etc, the

impacts on the land use will be envisaged as sufficient greenbelt will be provided around

the boundary to enhance the aesthetics of the project area.

4.5.6 Demographic and Socio Economic

The impact of the proposed unit on demography and socio economic conditions of the

study area would be as follows.

1. Additional strain on civic amenities like road, transport, communication, drinking

water, sanitation & other facilities to meet the work force requirement

2. Increase in demand for services like hotels, lodges, public transport etc.

3. Employment opportunities for construction labourers, skilled and unskilled

workers etc.,

4. Economic up liftment of the area.

5. Increase in Labour rates.

6. More work to the civil construction and transportation companies

4.6 Impacts during Operation phase

4.6.1 Impacts on Water Environment

Total waste water expected to come to treatment plant shall be 25 KLD. The proposed

plant will not have adverse impact on water environment and proposed project will have

zero discharge of waste water and hence the proposed industry will have no effect on

water environment.



Table 4.1 Wastewater Generation Details in KLD

Sl. No Utility Water

requirement

Waste water

Generation

1 Domestic 5 4

2 Floor washings 4 4

4 Recycling 10 2

5 Bio-medical waste facility 5 5

6 Boiler 12 7

7 Cooling tower 10 3

8 Green belt 4 -

Total 56 25

Scrubber bleed will be generated and the same will be recycled to spray drier/ quencher

and there will be no discharge of process effluent, hence zero discharge will be

maintained. Domestic Effluent will be generated around 4KLD and the same is treated

through septic tank followed by soak pit. The other wastewater likely to be generated

includes washings (due to floor, vehicle, tank washings etc.) and domestic wastewater

generated onsite. These sources can also contaminate downstream sources, if discharged

untreated and need to be treated at the on-site treatment plant.

There will be very low potential of polluted run-off from the site area. Rainwater, which is

falling on the site areas will at no time be in contact or pass any hazardous material and

would be allowed to go to the storm water tank directly and be used for plant watering. It

is expected that due to maximum rainfall high amount of surface run off will be generated

which needs to properly collected and discharged subject to prior checking. The project

design provides for diversion and storage of this runoff water from contaminated area to

a dedicated impermeable quarantined tank and a storm-water pond.

The storage of rainwater in the project site may have a negligible impact on the surface

water quantity due to rainwater harvesting within the project site for use in greenbelt.

Mitigation Measures:

Leachate collected from Secured Landfill and other wastewater including vehicle and

container washing, leachate generated at treatment, incineration are treated (excluding

domestic wastewater) in incineration/ Forced evaporation/spraying on landfill. The

domestic effluent generated will be treated in septic tank followed by soak pit or portable

STP and the treated water is used for greenbelt development. The effluent generated

from floor washings, recycling activity, etc. will be collected in collection tank followed by

settling tank and the settled water is reused. The effluent from bio medical waste is



treated and recycled to incinerator or circulation back to system. The waste water

generated from boiler and cooling tower used in ash quenching and for greenbelt

development purpose. There will not be any wastewater discharge to any nearby water

body and adopts the zero wastewater discharge concept.

4.6.1.1 Leachate Collection/ Treatment and Disposal

Leachate collection and removal is provided above the geo-membrane in two layers viz.

the primary and the secondary liner. The primary liner serves as leachate collection and

removal system, while the secondary liner serves as leak detection system and a signal of

potential liabilities in terms of environmental pollution.

Leachate is collected by a network of lateral and header pipes embedded in a drainage

layer, all of which eventually drain into a leachate collection sump. The collected leachate

is transferred to a leachate treatment system. Leachate, thus collected is transferred to

the forced evaporation system and the residue after decanting is subjected back to the

land-filling process.

The leachate collection system in an engineered landfill takes the form of an under-drain

beneath the waste material. It is required to ensure there is no more than a limited head

of pressure above the base liner to cause leakage of liquid from the base of the landfill.

The design maximum pressure head in the landfill is limited to 300mm.

Drainage is affected by a layer of about 300mm thick graded sand / gravel having high

permeability. Within this layer a network of HDPE pipes are placed to collect leachate and

conduct it quickly to the collection sump for removal from landfill. The pipes are typically

perforated only over the upper half to allow the leachate to enter the pipe and thereafter

to be contained within the pipe network system. The layout of the pipe network generally

includes sufficient redundancy to ensure that if a blockage occurs somewhere in the

network the leachate simply backs-up a little then flows into the system a little further

up-gradient. Two layers of the leachate collection system are provided one over the

other. Slotting area of the pipe is done only on the top 120o portion of the pipe and to an

extent of 100 Sq. cm per running meter of the pipe.

The pipe must have sufficient strength to withstand the load imposed by the overlying

waste and the earth moving activities associated with the placement and the compaction

of the waste (Min 6 Kg/ Sq.cm). The main pipe (headers) feeding leachate to the sump has

the capability to be cleaned out in case of clogging. However, the design must include

sufficient redundancy of pipe work to ensure alternative drainage paths are available in

the event of localized clogging of any part of the system.



4.6.1.2 Leachate Treatment Plant

Collected leachate will be sent to grid chamber thereafter sent to Oil & Gas Trap, from

O&G it will be further processed at collection pit then it will be treated through acid or

alkaline or chemical precipitation. After the treatment it will be further sent to primary

settling tank then to aeration chamber. At next level the leachate will be sent to

secondary settling tank and finally sent to treated water holding tank. Treated Leachate

will be finally reused as sprayer on the landfill or sent for forced evaporation. Schematic

diagram is given in Figure 4.1.

Figure 4.1 Leachate Treatment Plant

4.6.2 Impact on Air Quality

4.6.2.1 Prediction of Impacts on the Air Environment

Prediction of impacts from the proposed project on the ambient air quality was carried

out using air quality simulation models. The main sources of air pollution are as follows.

1. Area source emissions from Landfill operations

2. Point source emissions from Incinerator, DG set.

The emissions from the DG sets are minimal since they will be operated only during

power failures.



4.6.2.2 Atmospheric Dispersion of Stack Emissions

In order to estimate the ground level concentrations due to the emissions from the

proposed project, EPA approved American Meteorological Society/ Environmental

Protection Agency Regulatory Model - AERMOD 7.0.3 dispersion Model has been used.

AERMOD dispersion Model provides option to model emissions from a wide range of

sources that are present at a typical industrial source complex. The model considers the

sources and receptor in undulated terrain as well as plain terrain and the combination of

both. The basis of the model is the straight line steady state Gaussian Plume Equation,

with modifications to model simple point source emissions from stacks, emissions from

stack that experience the effect of aerodynamic down wash due to nearby buildings,

isolated vents, multiple vents, storage piles etc. AERMOD dispersion model with the

following options has been used to predict the cumulative ground level concentrations

due to the proposed emissions.

Area being rural, rural dispersion parameters are considered

Predictions have been carried out to estimate concentration values over radial

distance of 10 km around the sources

A combination of cartesian and polar receptor network has been considered

Emission rates from the sources were considered as constant during the entire

period

The ground level concentrations computed were as is basis without any

consideration of decay coefficient

Calm winds recorded during the study period were also taken into consideration

24-hour mean meteorological data extracted from the meteorological data

collected during the study period as per guidelines of IMD/CPCB has been used to

compute the mean ground level concentrations to study the impact on study area.

4.6.2.3 Area Sources

Daily waste will be discharged by tipping at the working area on a landfill, within the area

demarcated for the cell. Daily/Weekly cover (optional) is primarily used for prevention

windblown dust, litter and odours, deterrence to scavengers, birds, reduction of

infiltration (during unseasonal rain) and in improving the sites visual appearance. Soil

used as daily / weekly cover shall give a pleasing uniform appearance from the site

boundary. To achieve this thickness of about 150 mm is usually adequate and shall be

adopted.



4.6.2.4 Point Sources

The point source emissions considered for the proposed project are Incinerator. The DG

set will be used only during power failure for emergency requirements. Hence the

impacts from DG set will be felt only during power failure. The inputs used to run the

model are stack details and emissions details which are given in Table 4.2 and twenty four

hours mean meteorological data is given in Table 4.3.

The predicted maximum ground level concentration of 24 hour average PM

concentrations considering 24 hour mean meteorological data of study season are

superimposed on the maximum baseline concentrations obtained during the study period

to estimate the post project scenario, which would prevail at the post operational phase.

The overall scenario with predicted concentrations over the maximum baseline

concentrations is given in Table 4.3 and isopleths are given in the Figure 4.2 to 4.4.



Table 4.2a Stack Emission Details

Table 4.2b Stack Emission Details

Facility Incinerator E-Waste Facility Lead Recycling

Capacity 500 kg/hr 4000 TPA 4800 TPA

Stack Details Incinerator Attached to crusher -

Stack Height, m 30 3 m above roof level 30

Stack Diameter, m 0.85 0.2 0.5

Velocity, m/s 14.5 12 14

Volumetric Flow Rate,

m3/s 8.22 0.3768

2.75

Temperature, °C 120 45 140

PM Emissions, g/s 0.54 0.05 -

SO2 Emissions, g/s 2.17 0.00008 -

NOx Emissions, g/s 4.34 0 .004 -

Lead Emissions, g/s - - 0.04

Parameters Emission Standards (mg/Nm3)

PM 50 115 -

SO2 200 0.2 -

NOx 400 10 -

Lead - - 10

Facility DG Set Used oil

recycling Spent Solvent MEE

Capacity 320 kVA 2 KLD 5 KLD -

Stack Details DG set Boiler - 2 TPH Boiler - 2 TPH Boiler - 1 TPH

Stack Height, m 7 30 30 30

Stack Diameter, m 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.3

Velocity, m/s 14 12.5 12.5 10

Volumetric Flow Rate, m3/s

0.44 2.45 2.45 0.71

Temperature, °C 420 120 120 110

PM Emissions, g/s - 0.09 0.09 0.05

SO2 Emissions, g/s 0.012 0.58 0.58 0.29

NOx Emissions, g/s 0.28 0.39 0.39 0.19

Parameters

Ash content - 40% 40% 40%

NOx 4 g/kWh 260 g/GJ 260 g/GJ 260 g/GJ

Sulphur content 350 mg/kg 0.5% 0.5% 0.5%



Table 4.3 24 Hours Mean Meteorological Data for summer season

Hour Temperature

°C

Wind Speed

m/s

Wind

Direction

Degree

Relative

Humidity

%

Stability

Class

1 25 2.51 270 68 6

2 22 2.09 315 74 6

3 18 2.27 270 78 6

4 16 2.06 135 84 6

5 12 1.86 315 90 6

6 18 1.37 290 92 5

7 22 1.72 315 88 4

8 28 2.41 290 78 4

9 31 2.56 315 66 3

10 33 2.34 315 56 3

11 36 2.56 315 37 2

12 40 2.76 315 25 1

13 42 2.86 315 12 1

14 43 2.65 315 5 1

15 42 2.74 315 11 1

16 40 1.93 270 19 2

17 38 2.16 270 29 3

18 37 2.29 315 38 4

19 35 2.21 315 45 5

20 34 2.23 315 49 6

21 33 2.14 315 52 6

22 32 2.31 315 58 6

23 30 2.19 290 62 6

24 27 2.01 315 64 6

Table 4.4 Post Project Scenario – Units: μg/m3

Particulars Particulate Matter

(PM)

Sulphur Dioxide

(SO2)

Oxides of Nitrogen

(NOx)

Lead

Baseline Scenario (Max) 57.5 18.8 25.6 --

Predicted GLC (Max) 2.4 8 14 0.12

Distance (km) 0.6 0.6 Within site 0.6

Overall Scenario (Worst Case) 59.9 26.8 39.6 0.12

NAAQ Standards 2009 100 80 80 1



Figure 4.2 Predicted 24- Hourly Average GLCs of PM (μg/m3) at 10 km Radius

Max Concentration is 2.4 µg/m3 @ 0.6 km in SE Direction



Figure 4.3 Predicted 24- Hourly Average GLCs of SO2 (μg/m3) at 10 km Radius

Max Concentration is 8 µg/m3 @ 0.6 km in SE Direction



Figure 4.4 Predicted 24- Hourly Average GLCs of NOx (μg/m3) at 10 km Radius

Max Concentration is 14 µg/m3 @ within site in SE Direction



Figure 4.5 Predicted 24- Hourly Average GLCs of Lead (μg/m3) at 10 km Radius

Max Concentration is 0.12 µg/m3 @ 0.6 km in SE Direction



Mitigation Measures

DG Set

DG set will be used only in case of power failure. The DG set will be provided with

acoustic erective and adequate height of stack meeting MOEF/CPCB guidelines. So impact

due to D. G. Set will be temporary & for short time.

Incinerator

Incinerator will be provided with a stack height meeting MOEF Guidelines (minimum

30m), Spray dryer, Multi cyclone, Bag house, Wet scrubber. The gases are passed

through multi-cyclone for removal of particulates. Dry lime and activated carbon are

injected for neutralization of acidic gases (HCl, HF, SO2) and removal of organic

constituents. Flue gases are passed through bag filters for complete removal of

particulates and then to wet alkaline scrubber for neutralization

4.6.1.1 Boiler

Particulate Matter: ESP with efficiency of 99.5% will be installed to collect fly ash from the

flue gas of boiler. The collected fly ash and bottom ash will be sent to landfill.

Gases: For proper dispersion of Sulphur dioxide & Oxides of Nitrogen emissions from the

boiler, stack height meeting MoEF&CC/CPCB guidelines will be provided for proper

dispersion into atmosphere.VTo control fly ash generation at ash handling areas, fly ash

evacuation from the ESP collecting hoppers would be done in closed pipelines by

pneumatic means. The following pollution control measures would be installed for ash

disposal.

Closed trucks & containers would be used for this purpose, as far as possible.

It is proposed to cover the ash in the open trucks with tarpaulin to prevent flying

of fine ash during transportation.

Dioxins: To prevent reformation of dioxins by rapidly lowering the flue gas temperatures,

particularly from 500 °C to less than 200 °C by adopting rapid quench / catalyst /

adsorption by activated carbon etc.

Mercury: If the feeding waste contains mercury and its compounds, activated carbon

treatment for control of these emissions is given. (Ex. activated carbon, conversion into

mercuric chloride and then to mercuric sulphide etc.)

Mist: Often there is a need to eliminate the mist in the stack emissions, therefore, where

necessary de mister may be provided.



Secured Landfill

During operation part of the Secured land fill, to minimize the odor and gases generation,

daily it will be covered with soil/ash and during rainy period with temporary cover

(HDPE/Plastic sheets).

4.6.3 Impact on Noise Quality

Impacts to noise quality post construction phase will be mainly due to project related

vehicular traffic movement connecting access to various project components and

machinery including emergency DG set, incinerator, fans, compressors, blowers, etc. The

observed noise level of these machineries in the proposed plant is given below.

Diesel Generator : 95-105 dB(A)

Fans, compressors and blowers : 90-95 dB(A)

Incinerator : 78-80 dB(A)

The overall increase in traffic is expected to be due to the proposed project in unloading

hazardous waste at the site.

Mitigation Measures during Adequate measures for noise control, at the design stage shall be taken such as keeping

high noise generating equipments like pumps, motors, etc., on anti-vibration pads, closed

rooms and regular maintenance as suggested by the manufacturer. Some of the

mitigation measures proposed are

Noise level specification of the various equipments as per the Occupational Safety

and Health Association (OSHA) standards.

Providing suitable enclosures (adequate insulation) to minimize the impact of high

noise generating sources.

Employees will be provided with PPE like ear plugs, helmets, safety shoes, etc.

Development of greenbelt all along the boundary and along the roads within the

project

4.6.4 Impact on Land Use








4.6.4.1 Prediction of Impacts on Land Environment

Environmental Impacts on land environment have been classified primarily into two

broad aspects, i.e. direct impacts on the soil and land in the area and impacts on the flora

and fauna of the area. Land environment in the area has potential for contamination

arising out of solid waste stored on to the landfill area. The leachate generated from the

land fill area is collected in the leachate holding tank and the leachate is used back on to

the landfill for dust suppression, mixing in stabilization process, etc. If any excess leachate

is left over, it will be treated in spray dryer/MEE. As a result of this there is no

contamination of the soil due to the wastewater generated and hence the impacts due to

the facility on the land environment are negligible.

To address the impacts on flora and fauna, it has been observed that there are no

endangered species in the project area and green belt will be developed along the

boundary and adjacent to roads. Under CSR activities adjacent open lands, parks, etc will

be improved by plantation.

4.6.4.2 Predicted Impacts due to Landfill

The project has secured scientific landfill which comprises Govt. of India Regulations and

Hazardous Wastes (Management & Handling) Rules 1989 and its subsequent

amendments in 2000, 2003, 2008 and 2009 as the Hazardous Wastes (Management,

Handling and Transboundary Movement) Rules with containment measures.

Composite bottom liner to prevent Leachate percolation

Landfill gas management system

Rodent controlled

Dust control etc.

There shall be no loss of carbon sequestration on account of the proposed activity since

the area is almost barren. Development of a thick greenbelt all long the boundary of the

site will more than compensate for the loss. As there are no rare or endangered or

endemic or threatened (REET) species, the proposed project will not pose any problem to

any REET species. Hence, the impact of the project on biota is negligible.

4.6.5 Impact Due To Solid Waste Generation

The ash generated in the incinerator is considered as a hazardous solid waste. The

incinerator ash will be collected in specified containers and stored in the predestinated

totally enclosed storage yards lined with HDPE and disposed in the exiting secured

landfill. Dried sludge from ETP is burnt in the incinerator or used as manure for greenery



development inside the factory premises. Filter cake from MEE will be collected in

specified drums and reprocessed and disposed in landfill. All the hazardous solid wastes

generated are properly handled and treated and hence, there is no adverse impact of

hazardous solid wastes on soil, air or water environment.

4.6.6 Impact on Socio Economic Conditions

There can be infringement due to employment of labor force from adjoining or far away

people. People also have expectations regarding employment opportunity, and

development of the area. Many people also have concern for negative impacts due to

contamination of local environment (in terms of air and water).

4.6.7 Impacts on Topography and Landscape






4.6.8 Impact on Health, Sanitation and Aesthetics

Impact on health will be primarily due to air pollution i.e. emissions of SPM, NOX & SO2

and noise generation. Adequate air pollution and noise pollution control measures will be

provided as per the regulatory standards. Employee working in the plant would be

provided with personnel protective appliances. During construction period, workers will

be provided with basic amenities like safe water supply, sanitation facility, first aid,

required protective equipment etc. otherwise, there could be an increase in diseases

related to personal hygiene. The environmental management and emergency

preparedness plans are proposed to ensure that probability of undesired events and

consequences are greatly reduced.

CHAPTER 5

ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

(Technology & Site)



5. Chapter 5

Analysis of Alternatives

5.1. Introduction

The proposed facility has four principal waste disposals / recycling or recovery facilities

such as Hazardous Waste TSDF, hazardous waste incinerator, bio-medical waste disposal

Facility, E-waste management, alternative fuel and raw materials recovery and Recycling

Facilities. In addition to the above, there shall be temporary and long term storages for

interim storage and for intractable/ in-compatible wastes respectively.

5.2. Existing CHWTSDF

The project is proposed to enhance the waste disposal services within the existing TSDF to

make this facility an Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage and

Disposal Facility (ICHWTSDF). So there are no alternative sites considered for the

proposed facility.

5.3. Site selection criteria as per HWM Rule

The existing Common Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage and Disposal Facility, at

Punjab Waste Management Project was selected as per the CPCB Guidelines (site

selection criteria (HAZWAMS/17/2001-2002)). Table 5.1 shows that the existing project

site is matching with site selection criteria of MOEFCC.

Table 5.1 Site selection criteria

Parameter Criteria Existing CHWTSDF Punjab

Waste Management Project,

Lake or pond

(Distance from SW body)

Should not be within

200 m

No lake or pond present within

200 m

River


100 m

No river stream present within

100 m

Flood plain Should not be within

100 year flood plain

Not in flood plain of any river

High way – State or

National


500 m

No state or national highway

present within 500 m.

NH-73 1.6 km N



Parameter Criteria Existing CHWTSDF Punjab

Waste Management Project,

NH-22 7.5 km W

Habitation – Notified

habituated area


500 m

Public Parks Should not be within

500 m

No public park is present within

500 m

Critical habitat area –

area in which one or

more endangered

species live

Not suitable No critical habitat area is

present.

Reserved Forest area Not suitable Kholhai Raitan reserve forest –

11.3 km N

Wet lands Not suitable No wetland is present

AirPort Should not be within

zone around the

airport(s)

Chandigarh International Airport

Mohali – 14.5 km (NW)

Water supply No Water supply

well within 500 m

No water supply well exists

within 500 m however

groundwater drawn through

bore well located within the

existing TSDF facility.

Coastal Regulation Area Not suitable Not in the CRZ area

Ground Water Table

level

GW table should be

>2m from the base

of the landfill

Level of the ground water table

is 4.5 m. from the base of the

landfill.

Presence of monuments

/ religious structures

Not suitable No monuments / religious

structure exists

5.4. Technological Aspects

Hazardous wastes have become an important environmental and public health issue

which concerns many countries in the world. In the modern framework of hazardous

waste management, a four pronged strategy has been adopted

1. Minimizing the quantity of waste

2. Recycling of waste

3. Treatment of the waste

No habitation is present within

500 m.

Nimbua 1km SW



4. Collection, transport and disposal of waste in an environmentally sound manner

All four of these approaches are important and are not exclusive of each other. When

dealing with a given hazardous waste problem, often there is a need to utilize a

combination of the four general approaches outlined above

5.4.1. Waste Minimization

The first priority in hazardous waste management is to reduce the quantity of waste to

minimum. Three major waste reduction schemes which are often used are summarized

as below:

Process Modification

Often the industrial process can be altered in such a way that the use of raw materials is

optimized and the amount of-hazardous waste is reduced to barest minimum. For

example, in zinc electroplating, the sulphate salt is substituted by the chloride

compound with slight modification of the process; this can eliminate the cyanide

problem.

Waste Concentration

The waste can be concentrated using evaporation, precipitation or decantation

techniques which mean that the volume of waste can be considerably reduced using

these methods. Incineration, viz., oxidation of inflammable-waste is often practiced in

order to reduce the volume of waste to be handled. It is an excellent method of waste

disposal, but the cost of operation usually exceeds the net gains.

Waste Segregation

Segregating the hazardous waste streams from non-hazardous streams decreases the

volume of hazardous wastes, thus, making it easier to treat

5.4.2. Recycling Wastes

Many substances in wastes have value. These include glass, wood fiber from paper

products, metals etc., Scientists have developed ways of recycling many wastes so they

can be reused again. Almost all materials are recyclable. However, in some cases more

energy will be expended in recovery than the recovered value warrants. The two broad

ways of processing hazardous waste are waste reuse and waste recycling. We shall

briefly deal with them.



Waste Reuse

In some cases waste material can be used as a raw material with very little processing.

Transfer of the waste "as is" without reprocessing, to another facility is known as waste

reuse or waste exchange. Unwanted materials of commence such as outdated chemicals

or untested materials not meeting the high quality control requirements of purchasing

industry, can be reused without processing. Process wastes such as cardboard for

making paper pulp, copper or other metal salt solutions for metal recovery, oils that can

be used as fuels. This includes a variety of other materials that can be reused as

industrial feed stocks.

Waste Recycling

Recycling differs from reuse in that the waste must first be treated before it can be used

in a manufacturing process. When a transfer of waste "as is" is not possible,

reprocessing the waste for material recovery is known as recycling. For example, bag

house dust from scrap steel processors, containing up to 25% zinc oxide can be

combined with waste sulphuric acid to make galvaniser's pickle acid. The spent pickle

liquor containing 8-10 percent zinc sulphate and some iron salts is then usable, as

fertilizer in agricultural fields. Use of waste organic solvents is the best example of

recycling waste.

5.4.3. Treatment of Waste

After material recovery, the waste water containing hazardous waste chemicals should

be detoxified and neutralized through treatment. There are many technologies available

for treating hazardous wastes before they are ultimately disposed of. Their aim is to

modify the physical and/or chemical properties of the wastes so that they are rendered

harmless. Selection of a treatment process depends on many factors such as the nature

of the waste, the desired characteristics of the output stream, and economic and energy

considerations. The treatment technologies can be divided into the following groups,

namely:

Physical treatment

Chemical treatment

Biological treatment

Solidification, and Incineration

Physical Treatment

Physical treatment conducted using various methods such as phase separation. Phase

separation includes three steps, namely: lagooning, prolonged storage in tanks and



sludge drying in beds. Lagooning and tank storage are collectively used to separate

particulate impurities

Chemical treatment

This treatment is used to facilitate complete breakdown of hazardous wastes and more

usually to modify the chemical properties of the wastes, e.g., to reduce water solubility

or to neutralize acidity or alkalinity. The techniques involve oxidation, chemical

reduction, neutralization, heavy metal precipitation, oil/water separation and

solvents/fuels recovery.

Biological treatment

The gross impurities obtained from treatment of sewage are collectively known as

sludge, which is given biological treatment, before disposal. This is known as sludge

processing which has become important since improvements in industrial waste water

treatment. The typical technologies for sludge processing include conditioning,

digestion, composting, thickening or dewatering and solidification.

Conditioning: In this step the sludge is exposed to atmosphere for a stipulated

period until a desired consistency is reached

Digestion: In this process the sludge is treated with bacteria which break down

the long chain compounds into simpler ones

Composting: In this step the organic matter in the waste sludge is converted into

a usable stable material

Solidification

Processes convert the liquid waste into insoluble, rock-hard material and are used as

pretreatment prior to landfill disposal. This is usually done by mixing the waste with

various reactants to produce a solid mass. The basic aim of solidification process is to

immobilize the hazardous constituents of the waste, so that these do not leach out at

the landfill disposal site.

Incineration

Thermal oxidation through incinerator is one of the proven technologies for destruction

of hazardous waste in all the forms i.e. solid / semi solid / liquid and gaseous, based on

the feeding system, so as to render them innocuous in the form of non-toxic and non-

hazardous residues.



5.4.4. Collection, Transportation and Disposal

Waste disposal is a multiphase activity, the different stages of which, i.e. collection,

interim storage, transport; treatment and disposal are highly interdependent, both

technically and organizationally. Safe collection and transport of hazardous waste form a

critical link in the chain between its point of generation and its place of treatment and

disposal. In many respects, the same precautions apply to hazardous waste in transit as

apply to the carriage of dangerous goods; however, additional problems arise from the

hazardous nature of certain wastes because:

Waste in general has no perceptible economic value to the generator;

The chemical and physical properties of a waste may not be precisely known

because it is frequently a complex mixture from which all economically useful

components have been extracted.

Mixing of non-compatible wastes for convenience in transit could create an acute

hazard, either immediately or on treatment and disposal (for example, a mixture

of ether waste containing a sodium residue with an aqueous ether waste will

explode)

Therefore, for a safe and secure disposal of hazardous waste, there should be a proper

collection, transport and storage system. The non-compatible wastes should be

segregated and transported separately.

5.5. Disposal of Hazardous Waste

The final disposal of the hazardous wastes also needs to be carefully planned. There are

four different ways in which hazardous wastes can be finally disposed

Landfill disposal.

Dumping at sea

Underground disposal

Incineration.

5.5.1. Landfill Disposal

The disposal of hazardous waste by land filling is an important method of disposal in

many countries. Landfilling means storing harmful substances under the ground. This

involves hauling the refuse to an area allocated for this purpose. In India such areas range

from unsanitary open dumps to properly operated sanitary landfills. Open dumps are a

poor method of waste disposal because they cause environmental problems. For



example, they can ruin the appearance of all area and provide a home for rats and other

rodents who spread disease. If garbage is exposed, it rots and smells foul. Most dumps

allow some burning, which fills the surroundings with smoke. In addition, rain water can

drain through refuse and carry harmful substances to streams.

Properly operated sanitary landfills cause little damage to the environment. The area to

be filled with waste must be lined with a nonporous substance such as clay, or high

density polyethylene (HDPE)—plastic membrane to prevent the wastes from leaking to

the surrounding areas. The wastes are packed and dumped at the site and covered with

earth each day. They cover of earth prevents insects and rodents from getting into refuse.

Operators of these sites forbid burning. In time, sanitary landfill sites become filled up;

many communities then cover the site for a final time and use the area for recreational

purpose.

A typical landfill site consists of an artificial double liner at the bottom and a cover at the

top. The above design of landfill site does not have any provision for monitoring and

repair of the site. In the recent past, a new concept has developed in which the landfill

site is constructed on a structure consisting of concrete cells. The cell is a space for plant

personnel to visit and observe any fault and repair the same.

5.5.2. Dumping at Sea

Another method of disposal of hazardous wastes involves dumping wastes at deep sea,

designed to prevent contamination of groundwater. Disposal at sea, of waste generated

on land, is based on the misconceived notion that-the enormous volume of water

available for dilution enables the seas to be used as a dump without permanent damage.

However, this is an erroneous conviction. The decision to choose this method of disposal

is generally based on financial considerations. The site of disposal is determined by the

geographical location of the waste producer.

Disposal of waste at sea is controlled by international legislation and by the national

legislation required for the ratification of the international legislation. To prevent

pollution of the seas by the direct discharge of waste, the international legislation bans

the dumping of extraordinarily hazardous wastes such as organic silicon compounds,

halogenated organics, mercury and its compounds, cadmium, carcinogenic waste and

plastics into the sea. The last of these can seriously disturb fishing and navigation.



5.5.3. Underground Disposal

It maybe excessively expensive to dispose of certain hazardous wastes, such as

radioactive nuclear wastes, in an environmentally acceptable manner at landfill still sites

or incinerate them at thermal treatment plants. These wastes are generated in all

operations associated with the use of nuclear energy for national defense or peaceful

purposes such as mining of radioactive ore, production of nuclear fuel, laboratory

experiments and medical treatment. Underground disposal may provide an

environmentally and economically viable option in case of radioactive wastes. The

underground disposal of hazardous waste is acceptable only in inactive or partially active

mines that meet specific geological and technical criteria. Worldwide, only one deep-mine

disposal facility is currently in operation: a worked-out halite/potash salt mine at Herfa

Neurode in the Federal Republic of Germany (now united Germany).

Salt mines are often used for radioactive waste disposal because the excellent properties

of salt deposits prevent the interaction of wastes with other geological formations. The

very existence of a salt deposit is a proof that the underground site has been unaffected

by water for millions of years. Salt is impermeable to liquids and gases. Due to its

hygroscopic nature, salt is capable of absorbing water entering the formation from

outside and of repairing minor fractures by re-crystallization, thus maintaining the original

impermeability. This feature is frequently supplemented by impermeable upper strata

consisting of wastes, usually rock, from mines or other industries.

The atmosphere in salt mines is extremely dry, so metal equipment and containers do no

trust. There is no risk of methane explosions as in coal mines. Bursting of carbon dioxide

gas inclusions in the salt mines may be observed during excavation of rocks but this does

not pose a risk, particularly after mining operations have ceased. Thermal conductivity of

salt is good. Salt is strong, permitting the excavation of spacious, stable galleries. In

addition, salt has certain plasticity under pressure, allowing the dispersion of strain and

increasing the overall stability.

Based on the several options present for safe treatment, storage, disposal & recycling of

various wastes in the proposed projects the following options are considered which

meeting the national standards.

Hazardous wastes: Recycling, treatment stabilization, secured landfill, incineration

Bio medical wastes: Disinfections, shredding, incineration, secured landfill

E Wastes: Dismantling, cutting, disposal to authorized dealers, incineration



5.5.4. Incineration

Incineration burns waste products. This is another method many industries and large

cities use if they do not have enough vacant areas for disposal sites nearby. Most

hazardous wastes are detoxified in this process. This is also an excellent method of waste

minimization, waste detoxification and disposal, but its cost of operation is very high, if

the heat content of waste is not reutilized.

Advantages

Incineration is a process for the high-temperature oxidation of gaseous, liquid or solid

wastes, converting them into gases and an incombustible residue. The flue gases are

released to the atmosphere with or without recovery of heat and with or without

cleaning; and any slag or ash produced is deposited in a landfill. In general, incineration

may be considered as an alternative method of detoxifying some non-recoverable highly

toxic wastes. It is an excellent method of reducing waste volume, and in addition offers

the possibility for recovering the heat content of the waste. In some communities heat

from municipal waste incineration is used to produce steam. This steam drives turbines

that produce electric power. Recycling of heat thus reduces the cost of operation of

incinerators.

Waste Input

Generally, the wastes having inflammable characteristics are incinerated. The following

types of wastes are commonly treated in hazardous waste incinerators:

Solvent waste and sludge

Waste mineral oils

Varnish and paint waste

Plastics, rubber and latex waste

Oils, emulsions and oil/water mixtures

Phenolic wastes

Mineral oil sludge

Resin waste

Grease and wax wastes

Pesticide waste

Acid tar and spent clay

Organic waste containing halogen, sulfur or phosphorus compounds.

Waste having high chlorine, sulfur, nitrogen and phosphorus contents, polychlorinated

biphenyls (PCB) and those containing heavy metals and carcinogenic substances need

special incineration technologies and precautions. A large number of municipal



incinerators lack adequate air pollution control devices. Burning in many of these devices

may release gases and solid particles that may harm human health, damage property and

kill plants. The flue gases from ordinary incinerators can be dangerous in the absence of

pollution control devices.

5.6. Alternative technology - Plasma Gasification

Plasma gasification is the process which converts organic matter into synthetic gas using

plasma technology. A plasma torch powered by an electric arc is used to ionize gas and

catalyze organic matter into synthetic gas and solid waste (slag). It is used commercially

as a form of waste treatment. However, it has also been tested for the gasification of

biomass and solid hydrocarbons, such as coal, oil sands, and oil shale. The process can

generate electricity while reducing the volume of waste.

Figure 5.1 Layout of Plasma gasification

5.6.1. Feedstock

The feedstock for plasma waste treatment is most often municipal solid waste, organic

waste, or both. Feedstock may also include biomedical waste and hazardous waste

materials. Content and consistency of the waste directly impacts performance of a plasma

facility. Pre-sorting and recycling useful material before gasification provides consistency.

Too much inorganic material such as metal and construction waste increases slag

production. In turn this decreases syngas production. However the benefit is that the slag

itself is chemically inert and safe to handle. Certain materials may affect the content of



the gas produced, however shredding waste before entering the main chamber. This

creates an efficient transfer of energy. This ensures that more materials are broken down.

5.6.2. Commercialization

Plasma gasification is in commercial use for waste disposal. Plasma arc gasification is a

means to destroy bio medical waste and also destroys hazardous waste. The main

advantages of plasma gasification is

Clean destruction of hazardous waste streams.

Prevents hazardous waste from reaching landfills.

No harmful emissions or toxic waste.

Production of clean alloyed slag which could be used as construction material.

Processing of organic waste allows production of combustible syngas which can be

used in various applications, e.g. electric power and thermal energy generation.

Production of value-added products (metals) from slag.

5.6.3. Pros and Cons of Plasma Gasification

Main Advantages of Plasma Technology are as follows

Far less toxic emissions compared to landfills or other waste-to-energy facilities.

Toxic waste can be safely processed, such as asbestos and medical wastes.

Syngas is a byproduct of the process, hence it is as clean as or cleaner than natural

gas and can be used to produce energy, such as biofuel.

Metal is nearly 100 percent recoverable and can be used to make new steel.

Low dioxin emissions.

Waste is shrunk to 1 percent of its original size, one-tenth the size of byproducts

of incineration.

Main disadvantages of plasma technologies for waste treatment are:

Waste gasification and combustion ultimately releases carbon dioxide to the

atmosphere instead of sequestering a large fraction of the carbon in a landfill.

Large capital costs relative to current landfills.

Requires large electrical energy input if the waste stream does not contains a large

fraction of unoxidized hydrocarbons.

The highly corrosive plasma flame may lead to frequent maintenance and

component replacement with associated facility down time.

The filters and gas treatment systems are themselves sources of toxic waste, some

of which (e.g. acidified water) are poor candidates for plasma processing.



5.6.4. Conclusion

Plasma gasification technology is commercially proven and viable, while also meeting all

current regulatory requirements. Plasma gasification is positioned to take hold as a

practical, economical and environmentally responsible alternative to conventional forms

of waste disposal and power generation. Considering demerits of plasma gasification,

project management has decided to adopt Hazardous waste Incinerator

5.7. No Project Option

It has been made mandatory by the government to dispose of Solid (Hazardous, Bio-

medical, E Waste, etc.,) waste in systematic and scientific disposal way and pollution

control boards have been asked to ensure it. For systematic & scientific disposal of

hazardous wastes, a CHWMF becomes necessary where care is to be taken to avoid any

negative effects on the environment.

Benefits and Advantages of project

Management of hazardous waste with additional benefit of green and clean

Environment.

It minimizes the pollution load on environment from industrial hazardous waste.

Compliance with prescribed regulatory norms which in turn avert the risk of

closure on account of violation of rules.

It reduces the number of hazardous waste sites in the area and also eliminates the

pollution potential.

The management of wastes is relatively easier & economically viable at common

facility.

Cost of environmental monitoring is less at common facility

Reduced environmental liability due to captive storage of hazardous waste in the

premises of industries

Better occupational health and safety at individual industry level

Prevention of natural resource contamination thereby improving overall

environmental status of the region

The proposed project will not cause depletion of natural resources or the significant

adverse impacts on environment. On the contrary, it will produce value added resources

such as facilitating better management of the industrial wastes. Hence, “No Project

Option” is not considered.

CHAPTER 6

ENVIRONMENTAL

MONITORING PROGRAM



6. Chapter 6

Environmental Monitoring Program

6.1. Environmental Monitoring Program

Environmental monitoring program describes the processes and activities that need to

take place to characterize and monitor the quality of the environment. Environmental

monitoring is used in the preparation of environmental impact assessments, as well as in

many circumstances in which human activities carry a risk of harmful effects on the

natural environment. All monitoring strategies and program have reasons and

justifications which are often designed to establish the current status of an environment

or to establish trends in environmental parameters. In all cases the results of monitoring

will be reviewed, analyzed statistically and submitted to concerned authorities. The

design of a monitoring program must therefore have regard to the final use of the data

before monitoring starts.

The monitoring program will have three phases

1. Construction phase

2. Monitoring phase

3. Post monitoring phase

6.1.1. Construction Phase

The proposed project to to enhance the waste disposal services within the existing TSDF

to make this facility an Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage and

Disposal Facility (ICHWTSDF). The major construction activities involved in installation of

incinerator, diesel generator and other civil, mechanical and electrical equipment. The

construction activities require clearing of vegetation, mobilization of construction

material and equipment. The construction activities are expected to last for few months.

The generic environmental measures that need to be undertaken during project

construction stage are given in the following Table 6.1.



Table 6.1 Environmental Measures during Construction Site

S. No

Potential Impact

Detailed action to be followed as per EMP

Parameters for Monitoring

Frequency of Monitoring

1. Air Emissions All equipments are operated within specified design parameters.

Random checks of equipment logs/ manuals

Once in a quarter/as per CTE issued by SPCB

Vehicle trips have to be minimized to the extent possible

Vehicle Logs Once in a quarter/as per CTE issued by SPCB

Any dry, dusty materials stored in sealed containers are prevented from blowing.

Stockpiles or open containers of dusty materials


Compaction of soil during various construction activities

Construction logs

DG set emissions have to meet stipulated standards

Gaseous emissions (SO2, HC, CO, NOx)


Ambient air quality within the premises and adjacent villages of the proposed unit to be monitored.

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, and CO

At 3-4 locations in every quarter/as per CTE issued by SPCB

2. Noise List of all noise generating machinery onsite has to be prepared.

Equipment logs, noise monitoring

Once in a month/as per CTE issued by SPCB

Working during night has to be minimized.

Records of working hours

Daily till the construction activities are completed/ as per CTE issued

Generation of vehicular noise has to be minimized

Maintenance of records of vehicles

Implement good working practices (equipment selection and siting) to minimize noise and also reduce its impacts on human health (ear muffs, safe distances, and enclosures).

Maintaining records of noise levels

Machinery should not be run when not required.



S. No

Potential Impact




Acoustic mufflers/enclosures have to be provided for large equipment

Mufflers/enclosures shall be in place.

by SPCB

Noise levels have to be monitored in ambient air within the plant premises.

Continuous recording of noise levels

The noise levels shall not exceed the permissible limits both during day and night

All equipments shall be operated within specified design parameters.

Random checks of equipment logs/ manuals

Vehicle trips to be minimized to the extent possible

Vehicle logs

3. Soil Erosion Minimize the area of site clearance by complying within the defined boundaries

Site boundaries not extended / breached as per plan document.

Once in six months/ as per CTE issued by SPCB

Protect topsoil stockpile Effective cover in place.

4. Wastewater Discharge

No direct discharge of wastewater to be made into surface water, groundwater or soil.

No discharge hoses shall be in vicinity of watercourses.

Once in a quarter/ as per CTE issued by SPCB

The discharge point would be selected properly and sampling and analysis would be undertaken prior to discharge

Discharge norms for effluents as given in Permits

Take care of the disposal of wastewater generated such that soil and groundwater resources are protected.

Discharge norms for effluents as given in permits

5. Drainage and Effluent Management

Ensure drainage system and specific design measures are working effectively. They are designed to incorporate existing drainage pattern and avoid disturbing the same.

Visual inspection of drainage and records

Once in a month/ as per CTE issued by SPCB



S. No

Potential Impact




6. Waste Management

Implement waste management plan that identifies and characterizes every waste associated with the proposed activities Also to identify the procedures for collection, handling and disposal of each waste that arises.

Comprehensive Waste Management Plan should be in place and available for inspection onsite. Compliance with Hazardous Wastes (Management and Handling Rules), 2016

Once in a quarter/ as per CTE issued by SPCB

7. Non-routine events and accidental releases

Plan will be drawn, considering the likely emergencies and steps required to prevent/limit consequences.

Mock drills and records of the same

Once in six months/ as per CTE issued by SPCB

8. Health Health check-ups for employees and migrant labour

All relevant parameters of occupational health

Once in six months/ as per CTE issued by SPCB/ as per Factories Act

6.1.2. Operation Phase

During operational phase period air emissions from incinerator, DG set, landfill if any,

wastewater characteristics, ash generation quantity, etc., monitored are given in Table

6.2. The following attributes which merit regular monitoring based on the environmental

setting and nature of project activities are listed below:

Point source emissions and ambient air quality in nearby villages.

Groundwater Levels and ground water quality.

Water & wastewater quality & quantity.

Solid waste characterization (ash, leachate treatment plant & septic tank/soak pit

sludge).

Soil quality.

Noise levels (equipment and machinery noise levels, occupational exposures and

ambient noise levels).

Ecological preservation and afforestation.



Table 6.2 Environment Monitoring during Operation Phase

S.

No

Potential Impact Action to be Followed Parameters for

Monitoring

Frequency of

Monitoring

1. Air Emissions Stack emissions from

Incinerator

As per CFE conditions-

Operating hours,

Temperature, Pressure,

TOC of residues, LOI of

residues, Stack temp, CO,

PM, HCl, HF, SO2, NOx,

TOC, mercury, heavy

metals, dioxins & furans

As per CFE

conditions given

by SPCB or EC

conditions given

by MOEF and

CPCB protocol for

TSDF.

Gas quality from landfill

areas

VOC, H2S. As per CFE

conditions given

by SPCB or EC

conditions given

by MOEF and

CPCB protocol for

TSDF.

Stack emissions from

DG sets

As per CFE conditions

PM, SO2, NOx.

AAQ within the project

premises.

All vehicles to be PUC

certificate.

As per CFE conditions.

Vehicle logs to be

maintained.

Meteorological data Wind speed, direction,

temp., relative humidity

and rainfall.

2. Noise Noise generated from

operation of boiler,

cooling towers, etc. to

be monitored.

Spot Noise Level

recording

Periodic during

operation phase

Once in month by

third party

3. Wastewater

discharge

(leachate)

Compliance to

wastewater discharge

standards.

pH, TSS, TDS, BOD, COD

& Oil& grease (heavy

metals if required).

Daily at regular

intervals.

Once in a month

by third party.

4. Solid

waste/hazardous

waste

Check compliance to

HWM rules.

Quality & quantity

monitoring.

Periodically /

CPCB norms.

5. Ground water

quality

Monitoring ground

water quality, through

piezometers.

As per guidelines. Periodically & as

per CPCB norms.

6. Flora and fauna Vegetation,

greenbelt/green cover

development.

No. of plants, species. Once a year

7. Soil quality Checking & Physico-chemical Once a year



S.

No

Potential Impact Action to be Followed Parameters for

Monitoring

Frequency of

Monitoring

maintenance of good

soil quality around

parameters and metals.

8. Health Employees and migrant

labour health checkups.

All relevant parameters

(BP, HIV, chest X-ray, eye

vision, etc.) and HIV for

BMW workers.

Regular

checkups.

6.1.3. Post Operational Phase

Post-closure monitoring of the landfill will be done primarily as a compliance requirement

in addition to social responsibility; this also provides an early warning towards possible

adverse impacts on human health and the environment. The post-closure program of

monitoring water quality in the ground water and surface waters down gradient of the

landfill will be similar to that established for the operational stage of the facility. The

frequency of monitoring may be varied from time to time depending on changing

circumstances.

There is no need for the post-closure monitoring of air quality, noise or visual effects

during the post-closure period however this need will be reviewed periodically and should

any aspects warrant further monitoring as they will be included in the program. The

details of the post closure monitoring are given in Table 6.3.

Table 6.3 Environmental Monitoring during Post Operation Phase

S.

No

Potential

Impact

Action to be Followed Parameters for

Monitoring

Frequency of

Monitoring

1. Air Emissions Gas quality from

landfill areas.


conditions given by

SPCB or EC

conditions given by

MOEF and as per

CPCB protocol for

TSDF.

AAQ within the project

premises.


certificate.


vehicle logs to be

maintained.

Meteorological data Wind speed, direction,

temp., relative humidity

and rainfall.

2. Wastewater

discharge

(leachate) if

Compliance to

wastewater discharge

standards.

pH, TSS, TDS, BOD, COD

& Oil& grease

Once in a month

(during initial

period more



present regularly)

3. Ground water

quality and

water levels

Monitoring ground

water quality, and

water levels within

plant site.

As per guidelines. Periodically and

CPCB protocol for

TSDF.


greenbelt/green cover

development


5. Health Employees and

migrant labor health

checkups.

All relevant parameters

(BP, Sugar, chest X-ray,

eye vision, etc.)

Regular checkups

as per factories act.

6.2. Environmental Laboratory Equipment

PMWP has an in-house environmental laboratory for the routine monitoring of air, water,

soil, meteorology and noise. For all non-routine analysis, the plant will utilize the services

of external recognized laboratories and facilities. Standard methods will be followed for

analysis and sampling of various environmental parameters.

6.3. Environmental Management Cell

An efficient environmental management cell headed by a project in charge/head having a

minimum of 5 to 10 years of experience had formed. The project in charge/head is

supported by team of members (managers, operators, chemists, technicians, etc.) having

minimum of 2 to 3 years of experience in their respective fields of work. The

organizational setup of the environmental management cell is given below in Figure 6.1.

Figure 6.1 Organization Setup



6.4. Pollution Monitoring Facilities

Incinerator stack should have provision of platform and port hold to stack sampling

meeting standards with necessary power point. Environmental laboratory shall have

above equipment/instruments to analyze air and wastewater parameters.

6.4.1. Reporting Schedules of the Monitoring Data

It is proposed that voluntary reporting of environmental performance with reference to

the EMP should be undertaken. The environmental monitoring cell shall co-ordinate all

monitoring program at site and data thus generated shall be regularly furnished to the

state regulatory agencies. The frequency of reporting shall be after every six months to

the local state PCB officials and to regional office of MoEF. The environmental audit

reports shall be prepared for the entire year of operations and shall be regularly

submitted to regulatory authorities.

6.4.2. Public Health Monitoring

The value of public health studies in seeking to establish whether or not a site or facility

has caused significant adverse health effects is well known. In this situation the results

from a public health study may not fulfill the primary objective of such a program, which

is to detect health changes before the manifestation of adverse health effects. However,

three-stage health monitoring program is proposed.

Monitor the health of workers within the project site to identify adverse health

effects.

Periodically obtain feedback from local doctors regarding any potential indicators

of adverse health effects due to environmental cause in the communities

surrounding, and particularly down-stream of the landfill.

By organizing health camps on a regular basis.

6.4.3. Budgetary Provision for EMP

In order to comply with the environmental protection measures as suggested in the

above sections, the project management has made budgetary provision for

environmental protection and safety measures. Cost towards environmental mitigation

measures are given in Table 6.5.

Table 6.5 Budgetary Implementation of Environmental Management Plan



S. No Particulars Capital Cost

(Rs. Lakhs)

Recurring Cost

(Rs. Lakhs/annum)

1 Air Pollution Control Systems 100 10

2

Noise Control measures – Acoustic

enclosures for DG set, Noise barriers for

pumps, etc

5 0.5

3 Greenbelt development 5 0.5

5 Online Stack monitoring 50 10

6 Ambient Air quality monitoring 25 3

7

Third party environmental monitoring,

energy audit, environmental audit, training

programs, etc.

40 6

8 Environmental control measures during

construction stage and Miscellaneous works 75 -

Total 300 30

Capital Cost of the project is Rs 35 Crores

CHAPTER 7

ADDITIONAL STUDIES



7. Chapter 7

Additional Studies

7.1. Risk Assessment & Disaster Management Plan

The principal objective of the risk assessment study is to identify and quantify the major

hazards and the risks associated with various operations of the proposed project, which

may lead to emergency consequences (disasters) affecting the public safety and health.

Based on this information, an emergency preparedness plan is to be prepared to mitigate

the consequences. The approach involves hazards identification, hazards assessment and

evaluation, developing Disaster Management Plan (DMP).

7.1.1. Risk Analysis

Risk analysis includes an estimate of the probability or likelihood that an event will occur.

Estimation of random incidents totally uncorrected with plant activities may also be

taken. Risk can be characterized in qualitative terms as high medium or low, or in

quantitative terms using numerical estimates and statistical calculations. For practical

purposes a risk analysis may be based on a subjective, common- sense evaluation. Both

probability and consequences are extremely important in evaluating risk. A high risk

situation can be the result of a high probability with severe consequences (e.g.

irreversible health effects or death due to an airborne toxic dust, a fire or explosion with

injuries or fatalities), whereas moderate risk situations can be a result of either high

probability with mild consequences or low probability with more severe consequences.

Diminishing the likelihood of an accident or minimizing the consequences will reduce risk

overall.

A relative ranking of hazards requires extensive mathematical evaluations, application of

statistics and extensive support from experts. Application of readily available information

and common sense when combined with site-specific evaluations such as the

vulnerability analysis, will complete much of the risk analysis process.

7.1.2. Evaluating Hazards

The need for the sophisticated techniques for evaluating hazards depends on the result of

Preliminary Hazard Analysis. Various techniques for evaluation hazards are:



Hazard and Operability Study (HAZOP)

Accident Consequence Analysis

Event Tree Analysis

Fault Tree Analysis

Failure Modes, Effects and Criticality Analysis.

In order to be in a state of readiness to face the adverse effects of accidents, an

Emergency Preparedness Plan (EPP) has to be prepared. The possible hazardous

situations in the locality and the causes, areas most likely to be affected, on-site and off-

site plans, establishment of Emergency Control Centres (ECC), location of emergency

services and duties of officers/staff during emergency.

The EPP document for accidents is to be designed to provide for measures to contain the

incident and for minimization of effects due to fire, explosives, release or escape of toxic

gas, spillage of hazardous substances in storage, processing or during transportation. The

necessary preventive and protective steps required to be taken before, during and after

an accident need to be worked out in operational terms and detailed in the document.

7.2. Identification of Major Hazard Installations Based on GOI Rules, 1989 as amended

in 1994 & 2000

By Studying accidents occurred in industries in India over a few decades, a specific

legislation covering major hazard activities has been enforced by Government of India in

1989 in conjunction with Environment Protection Act, 1986. This is referred here as GOI

rules 1989. For the purpose of identifying major hazard installations the rules employ

certain criteria based on toxic, flammable and explosive properties of chemicals.

7.2.1. Identification of Toxic, Flammable, Explosive Chemicals

Toxic Chemicals: Chemicals having the following values of acute toxicity and which owing

to their physical and chemical properties are capable of producing major accidents:

S.No Toxicity Oral toxicity

LD50(mg/kg)

Dermal toxicity

LD50(mg/kg)

Inhalation

toxicity

LC50(mg/l)

1. Extremely toxic 1-50 1-200 0.1-0.5

2. Highly toxic 51 – 500 201-2000 0.5 - 2.0



Flammable Chemicals: Flammable gases: Gases which at 200C and at standard pressure of

101.3 KPa are:-

Ignitable when in a mixture of 13 percent or less by volume with air, or

Have a flammable range with air of at least 12 percentage points regardless of the

lower flammable limits.

Note: - The flammability shall be determined by tests or by calculation in accordance with

methods adopted by International Standards Organization ISO Number10156 of 1990 or

by Bureau of Indian Standards ISI Number 1446 of 1985.

Extremely flammable liquids: chemicals which have flash point lower than or equal

to 230C and boiling point less than 350C

Very highly flammable liquids: chemicals which have a flash point lower than or

equal to 230C and initial boiling point higher than 350C.

Highly flammable liquids: chemicals which have a flash point lower than or equal

to 600C but higher than 230C.

Flammable liquids: chemicals which have a flash point higher than 60oC but lower

than 900 C.

Explosives: Explosives means a solid or liquid or pyrotechnic substance (or a mixture of

substances) or an article.

Which is in itself capable by chemical reaction of producing gas at such a

temperature and pressure and at such a speed as to cause damage to the

surroundings

Which is designed to produce an effect by heat, light, sound, gas or smoke or a

combination of these as a result of non-detonative self-sustaining exothermic

chemical reaction

7.2.2. Applicability of Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules,

1989 & subsequent amendments

A systematic analysis of the chemicals and their quantities of storage has been carried out

to determine threshold quantities as notified by GOI Rules, 1989 and the applicable rules

are identified. The results are summarized in Table 7.1.



Table 7.1. Description of applicable provisions of GOI rules’1989 as amended in 1994 &

2000

Applicable

rules

Description

1 Short Title And Commencement

These rules are called as Manufacture, Storage and Import of

Hazardous Chemical Rules, 1989.

2 Definitions

In these rules, unless the context otherwise requires

3 Duties Of Authorities

4

General Responsibility Of The Occupier During Industrial Activity

Take adequate steps to prevent major accidents

Provide information to persons working onsite

Impart training, provide equipment and antidotes

5 Notification of major accidents to concerned authority

If any major accident occurs, occupier to inform Concerned authority as

listed in Schedule 5 and submit report as per the format in Schedule 6

(applies after commencing of the activity)

6 Industrial Activity To Which Rules 7 To 15

7 Notification of site to competent authority

8 Updating of site notification following changes in threshold quantity

9 Transitional provision for the existing activity

10 Preparation of safety reports for commencement of activity

11 Updating of safety reports based on modification

12 Provision of further information on safety reports to the authority

13 Preparation of onsite emergency plan by the occupier

14 Preparation of offsite emergency plan by the occupier

15 Information to be given to persons liable to be effected by a major

accident

16 Disclosures of Information

Where for the purpose of evaluating information notified under rule 5

or 7 to 15, the concerned authority discloses that information to some

other person, that other person shall not use that information for any

purpose, and before disclosing the information the concerned

authority shall inform that other person of his obligations under this

paragraph.

17 Collection, development and dissemination of information on

hazardous chemicals employed by the occupier



Applicable

rules

Description

18* Import of hazardous chemicals

19 Improvement Notices

If a person has contravened the provisions of these rules, the

concerned authority shall serve on him a notice

20 Power Of The Central Government To Modify The Schedules

Occupier shall develop information in the form of safety data sheet as specified in

Schedule 9. Every container of the hazardous chemical should be labelled with name of

the manufacturer or importer of the hazardous chemical.

7.2.3. Storage facilities of hazardous chemicals

The storage capacities / details of the major hazardous chemicals proposed to be used in

the project are given in Table 7.2.

Table 7.2 Details of Chemicals and Applicability of GOI rules

Solvent Storage

Type

Storage

Capacity(Tons)

Listed in

Scheduled

Threshold Quantity (Tons)

for Application of

Rules

5,7-9,13-15 10-12

Diesel Tankers 5 Schedule 3

(part II)

5000 50000

From the above table it can be inferred that there would be no major Hazardous

chemical stored at the proposed plant, which would attract the GOI rules 4 5,7-9 and 13-

15, as the quantity likely to be stored at site lies below the stipulated threshold

quantities.

Table 7.3 Nature of Possible Hazards

Hazard Area Probable Cause Of The Accident

Explosion

Boilers / Transformers / Receivers

for the Air compressors. Malfunctioning of the Safety Valve

Flammable Petroleum Product

Storage Tank / Drum Storage

area

External fire causing pressure built up

in the tanks / barrels

Fire H.S.D. / FO Storage Area Flammable vapor / air mixture and



Hazard Area Probable Cause Of The Accident

source of ignition.

Flammable Petroleum Product

Storage Tank / Drum Storage

Shed /Production Area

Formation on pool in the dyke wall and

source of ignition.

External fire Built up of internal

pressure Failure of the top cover

Tank on Fire

Spillage Acid / Alkali Storage Area

Spillage of Acid / Alkali due to rupture

of the pipe line, collapse of the storage

tank

7.2.4. Maximum credible accident analysis for diesel storage area

Identification of causes and types of hazards is the primary task for planning for risk

assessment. Hazard can happen because of the nature of chemicals handled and also the

nature of process involved. So for risk analysis first step is to identify the hazardous

chemicals which are to be studied for risk analysis.

Identification of Hazardous Chemicals is done in accordance with The Manufacture,

Storage and import of Hazardous Chemical Rules, 1989.

Schedule 1, of the Rule provides a list of the Toxic and Hazardous chemicals and the

flammable chemicals. It defines the flammable chemicals based on the flash point and

boiling point.

"Major accident hazards (MAH) installations" is defined as the isolated storage and

industrial activity at a site handling (including transport through carrier or pipeline) of

hazardous chemicals equal to or, in excess of the threshold quantities specified in Column

3 of Schedule 2 and 3 respectively Schedule 3 has classified hazardous substances in an

operating plant into 5 groups and has provided the threshold quantities for application of

above rules.

Group1 & 2 – Toxic substances

Group 3 – Highly reactive substances

Group 4 – Explosive substance

Group – 5 Flammable substances



The following Table 7.4 shows the list of major chemicals which have been identified as

hazardous chemicals in The Manufacture, Storage and import of Hazardous Chemical

Rules, 1989 and which are to be considered as Major accident hazards (MAH)

installations. 10 KL/month of diesel fuel is expected to be consumed at incinerator site.

Table 7.4 Hazardous Chemicals at Site

S.No Chemical Use Nature of Chemical

(Schedule 1 & 3)

Type of

Storage & No’s

Storage

Quantity

1 Diesel Supporting

fuel for

Vehicles

Highly Flammable Vertical 1 No 5 KL

Table 7.5 Summary Table on the Inventories

Chemical Codes/

Label TLV FBP MP FP

UEL LEL

%

HSD

(High Speed

Diesel)

Flammable 800

mg/m3TWA

215 - 3760

C NA 320 C 6.0 0.6

TLV : Threshold Limit Value FBP : Final Boiling Point

MP : Melting Point FP : Flash Point

UEL : Upper Explosive Limit LEL : Lower Explosive Limit

7.2.5. Fire Explosive Toxicity Index (FETI) for HSD

The application of FETI would help to make a quick assessment of the nature and

quantification of the hazard in these areas.

Table 7.6 F&EI of fuels used for the proposed Industrial Area

Chemical/Fuel NFPA Classification

GPH SPH *F&EI F&E

Category Nh Nf Nr MF

HSD 1 2 0 10 1.8 2.83 50.89 Light

*FEI = MF *(1+GPH) * (1+SPH)

The F&EI values are ranked into following categories



Table 7.7 F&EI Category

S.No F&EI F&E Category

1 1-60 Low

2 60-90 Medium

3 90 and above Severe

7.2.6. Nature of Hazard from Oil Storage:

Diesel is a petroleum product. It is a highly flammable liquid having flash point between

32 0C– 96 0C. However its auto ignition temperature is 2560C. Its boiling point ranges

between 150 0C – 400 0C. Furnace Oil is of similar characteristics having flash point above

660C. Major Hazards from oil storage can be fire. Maximum credible accidents from oil

storage tank can be

a) Tank Fire

b) Pool / Dyke fire.

a) Tank Fire

Oil is stored in floating roof tank. Leak in rim seal leading to accumulation of vapour is a

source of fire. Lighting can be a source of ignition and can cause tank fire. Overflow from

tank leading to spillage may cause vapour cloud formation. This can catch fire and it can

flash back to the tank to cause tank fire.

b) Pool / Dyke Fire

If there is outflow from the tank due to any leakage from tank or any failure of connecting

pipes or valves, oil will flow outside and form a pool. Where the tank is surrounded by a

dyke, the pool of oil will be restricted within that dyke. After sometime, the vapour from

the pool can catch fire and can cause pool or dyke fire.

7.2.7. Heat Radiation and Thermal Damage Criteria

The level of damage caused by heat radiation due to fire is a function of duration of

exposure as well as heat flux (i.e. radiation energy onto the object of concern). This is true

both for the effect on building and plant equipment and for the effect on personnel.

However the variation of likely exposures times is more marked with personnel, due to

possibility of finding shelter coupled with protection of the skin tissue (clothed or naked

body). Further, it is assumed that everyone inside the area by the pool fire will be burned



to death (100% lethality) or will asphyxiate. Radiation at various heat flux levels which are

critical in risk analysis, are given in the Table 7.8.

Table 7.8 Effect of Heat Radiation

Exposure Time in seconds for % Fatality

Radiation Level (Kw/m2) 1% 50% 99%

1.6 500 1300 3200

4.0 150 370 930

12.5 30 80 200

37.5 8 20 50

The damage and fatality (percentage of the exposed people to be killed) due to the

exposure time is very important in determining the degree of fatality and corresponding

effect distance. It is observed that the exposed persons normally find shelter or

protection from the heat radiation (e.g. against a wall) within 10 seconds. However,

exposure time of 30 seconds is normally assumed for pessimistic calculation which applies

if people do not run away immediately or when no protection is available. The variation

of the effects on humans due to heat flux and duration of exposure have been developed

in the form of a Probit Equation which gives following values for human fatality levels in

Table 7.9.

Table 7.9 Heat Radiation and Fatality

Incident Radiation

Intensity (KW/m2) Type Of Damage

37.5 Sufficient to cause damage to process equipment

25 Minimum energy required to ignite nearby wood at infinitely

long exposure (non piloted)

12.5

Minimum energy required for piloted ignition of wood,

melting plastic tubing etc. 1st degree burns for 10 seconds

exposure.

4.5

Sufficient to cause pain to personnel if unable to reach cover

within 20 seconds; however blistering of skin (1st degree

burns) is likely.

1.6 Will cause no discomfort to long exposure

For the storage of HSD (Diesel), it is assumed that the complete liquid leaks due to tank

failure or ruptures and develops into a pool and gets ignited. Hazards distances have been

arrived due to effect of pool fires. For computing the damage distance from the tank



failure area ALOHA SOFTWARE is used. Full tank storage capacity has been considered.

The out is given as Table 7.10

Table 7.10 Scenario (Pool Fire)

SITE DATA

Location NIMBUA, DERA BASSI MOHALI, INDIA

Time August 31, 2016 1221 hours ST (using computer's clock)

CHEMICAL DATA

Chemical Name High Speed Diesel Vapour Pressure at Ambient

Temperature: 0.047 atm Molecular Weight 114.23 g/mol

IDLH: 1000 ppm LEL: 9600 ppm UEL: 65000 ppm

ATMOSPHERIC DATA

Wind 2.29

meters/second

Wind Direction from NE Air Temperature: 43° C

Stability Class: D Relative Humidity: 50% Ground Roughness: open

country

SOURCE STRENGTH

Leak from hole in vertical cylindrical tank and Flammable chemical is burning as it escapes

from tank

Tank Diameter: 1.5

meters

Tank Length: 3 meters

Tank Volume: 5.30 cubic

meters

Chemical Mass in Tank: 3,646

kilograms

Tank is 100% full

Note: Per Day Fuel requirement is 360 liters maximum. Fuel storage capacity is for two

week i.e 5 KL in vertical tank

Risk scenario for Model run

1. The chemical escaped as a liquid and formed a burning puddle.

2. Circular Opening Diameter: 2.5 inches

3. Chemical Mass in Tank: 3,646 kilograms

THREAT ZONE: Threat Modelled: Thermal radiation from pool fire

Thermal radiation Distance in meters Remark

37.5 kW/(sq m) less than 10 meters Note: Thermal

radiation from pool

fire is within

boundary limit of site.

25 kW/(sq m) less than 10 meters

12.5 kW/(sq m) 14 meters



The risk contours are given below in Figure 7.1 and 7.2



Figure 7.1 Risk Contours with Pool Fire Threat Zone for HSD



Figure 7.2 ALOHA Source point on the layout



7.3. On-Site Emergency Plan

An on-site emergency is caused by an accident that takes place in plant itself and the

effects are confined to the factory premises involving only the people working in the

factory. On-site emergency plan to deal with such eventualities is the responsibility of the

occupier and is mandatory. An on-site emergency plan should contain the following key

elements:

Basis of the plan: Hazard analysis

Accident prevention procedure/measures;

Accident/emergency response procedure/measures and

Recovery procedure.

7.3.1. Elements of Planning

The charts and maps should highlight the accident-prone areas of the industry so that in

case of an emergency, it provides a basis for taking any action.

7.3.1.1. Emergency Personnel’s Responsibility during Normal Office Hours

Site Controller: The Project Head (however called) or his nominated depute will assume

overall responsibility for the plant / storage site and its personnel. His duties will be to:

Assess the magnitude of the situation and decide if staff needs to be evacuated

from their assembly points to identify safer places;

Exercise direct operational control over areas other than those affected;

Undertake a continuous review of possible developments and assess in

consultation with key personnel as to whether shutting down of the plant or any

section of the plant and evacuation of personnel are required;

Liaise with senior officials of Police, Fire Bridge, Medical and Factories

Inspectorate and provide advice on possible effects on areas outside the factory

premises:

Look after rehabilitation of affected persons on discontinuation of emergency;

Issues authorized statements to news media, and ensure that evidence is

preserved for enquiries to be conducted by the statutory authorities.

Fire & Security Officer: The Chief Fire and Security Officer, will be responsible for

firefighting. On hearing the fire alarm, he shall reach the fire station immediately and

advise fire and security staff in the factory of the incident zone and cancel the alarm. He

will also announce on PAS or convey through telephones or messengers to the



Communication Officer, Incident Controller and Site Controller about the incident zone.

He will open the gates nearest to the incident and stand by to direct the emergency

services.

Telephone Operator: On hearing the emergency alarm, he will immediately contact Site

Controller and on his advice, call the local fire bridge or mutual-aid scheme members. In

case the PAS internal/external telephone system becomes inoperative, he shall inform

the Communication Officer through a messenger. In case, fire has been detected and the

alarm is not in operation, he shall receive information about location from the person

who detected the fire and thereafter immediately consult the Incident Controller and

make announcement on PAS or telephone telling the staff about location of the incident

and to evacuate to their assembly points. He will continue to operate the switch board

advising the callers that the staff is not available and pass all calls connected with the

incident to the Communication officer

Departmental Heads: The Departmental Heads will report the incident to the Incident

Controller and provide assistance as required. They will decide the staff required at the

incident site.

Fire Pump Attendant: Two persons identified in each shift will work as fire pump

attendants. On hearing the fire alarm, they will immediately proceed to pump house to

ensure that pumps are operating and standby to maintain them. At the end of

emergency, they will be relieved of their duty by the Fire and Security Officers.

7.4. Infrastructure

Emergency Control Room- Emergency Control Room is to be set up and marked on the

site plan. The Control Room will be the focal point incase of an emergency from where

the operations to handle the emergency are directed and coordinated. It will control site

activities and should be furnished with external and internal telephone connections, list

of essential telephone numbers, list of key persons and their addresses.

Assembly Points- Assembly points are to be set up farthest from the location of likely

hazardous events where pre-designated persons from the works, contractors and visitors

would assemble in case of emergency. Up-to-date list of pre-designated employees of

various departments (shift-wise) must be available at these points so that roll call could

be taken. Pre-designated persons would take charge of these points and mark presence

as the people come into it.



7.5. Operational Systems during Emergency

7.5.1. Communication System

There are different types of alarms to differentiate one type of an emergency from other

as described below:

Fire or Gas : Normal Fire Siren

Emergency/Evacuation : High-pitched wailing Siren

Alarms should be followed by an announcement over Public Address System (PAS). In

case of failure of alarm system, communication should be by telephone operator who will

make announcement in industrial complex through Public Address System which should

be installed. If everything fails, a messenger could be used for sending the information.

7.5.2. Warning System & Control

The Control centres should be located at an area of the minimum risk or vulnerability in

the premises concerned, taking into account the wind direction, areas which might be

affected by fire/explosion, toxic releases, etc.

For promptness and efficiency, the factory premises/storage sites may be divided into ‘X’

number of zones, which should be clearly marked on the site plan.

Emergency Services - Under this, each factory should describe the facilities of

fire-fighting, first-aid and rescue. Alternate sources of power supply for operating

fire pumps, communication with local bodies, fire brigade, etc. Should also be

clearly indicated.

An adequate number of external and internal telephone connections should be

installed.

A plan or plans of the works to illustrate-

Areas with large inventories of hazardous material.

Sources of safety equipment.

Fire-hydrant system and alternate supply sources.

Stock of other fire-fighting materials.

Assembly points, first-aid centres.

Surrounding habitation within 1/ 2 km distance.

Availability of first-aid equipment.



7.5.3. Mutual Aid

It is essential to have mutual aid arrangements as it is useful in cases of major fire and

other emergencies. Mutual aid arrangements have to be worked out in the plan to

facilitate additional help in, fire-fighting or medical attention which might be beyond the

capacity of an individual factory/unit. To make the mutual aid plan a success, the

following are considered essential:

Written procedure which spells out how call for help will be made and how it will

be responded.

The type of equipment which would be used and procedure for making

replacement.

A quick hot-line method of communication.

A brief mention of the type of hazard in each plant and fire-fighting measures.

Orientation and joint training program for staff.

Joint inspections and drills.

7.6. Disaster Management Plan

Emergency prevention through good design, operation, maintenance and inspection are

essential to reduce the probability of occurrence and consequential effect of such

eventualities. The overall objective of the DMP/Emergency Response Plan (ERP) is to

make use of the combined resources at the site and outside services to achieve the

following.

Localize the emergency on property and people

Minimize effects on property and people

Effective rescue and medical treatment

Evacuation.

A disastrous event strikes suddenly, violently and without warning. Identifying the

potential hazards ahead of time and advance planning can reduce the dangers of serious

injury, loss of life and damage to environment in the event of an incident occurrence.

The first response to a disaster is the job of the local government’s emergency services

with the help from the nearby municipalities and the volunteer service agencies. In a

catastrophic disaster only the govt. can provide the rescue search on the disaster site,

resumption of electric power, food, water, medicines, cloths, shelter and other basic

human needs. It is the long term recovery phase of disaster which places the most severe

financial strain to govt. in-addition to damage to public facilities and infrastructure. It

takes longer time to get aid from the govt. for rescue work when there is a natural



calamity because of various constraints such as reaching the site, priority of personnel

involved, availability of material, equipment and rescue team personnel etc. It is always

advisable to develop teams within the organization for taking immediate rescue action if

possible. Industry has to prepare a detailed disaster control measures and give

information such as the quantity of hazardous material stored, the location of storage,

the approximate population living in the vicinity and the detail of the hazardous

characteristic of the material to the Employees, District Collector, Police, Fire service

department, Director of Factories, State Pollution control Board and the Public living in

the vicinity regularly to enable the government to prepare the disaster management plan.

Educate employees and the public living in the vicinity the safety measures required to be

taken in the event of an accident taking place.

What are the types of disasters that can occur in a hazardous waste management site?

An earth quake leading to damage of liner and contamination of soil and ground

water due to leakage of chemicals, waste material and leachate.

Cyclone leading to flood water entering landfill site contamination of ground

water and soil.

Major explosion of chemicals fire and toxic gas release.

Contamination of soil and water sources due to leakage of contaminants from

the landfill waste or due to leakage of leachate.

Release of dangerous gases from the incinerator affecting the public in the

vicinity.

7.6.1. An earthquake.

During site selection stage based on the past seismic metrological data / reports earth

quake prone areas have to be avoided. Cover the site with public liability insurance as per

the advice of government. Design building to withstand minor shocks of earth quake

without damage to structures.

Maintain inventory of material and the location of stock on day today basis and submit

the report to disaster management authority (district collector) and the state pollution

control board weekly / monthly also maintain parallel record at H.O.

Maintain MSDS of stored materials toxicity of gases that can emanate due to reactions of

stored materials including the landfill material. Provide communication facilities internal

and with people living in the vicinity. Educate the employees and the surrounding peoples

about the possible dangers in case of an earthquake and the safety measures required to

be taken.



Take preventive action of stopping work activities, informing and evacuating employees

and the public living in the vicinity to safe location as per the advice of government

agency if there is an advance earth quake warning from the agencies.

After an earth quake (if the site is affected), Inform disaster management authorities and

state pollution control board authorities over phone, e-mail or through messenger.

Display Phone Numbers of: District Collector, Police S.P, Fire Service Department,

Factories Inspectorate and nearby Hospitals. Inform company authorities through phone:

Phone numbers: Project Head, EHS Head, HR Head. Inform the insurance authorities

about the incident. Phone Numbers: Local Insurance officer and Divisional Manager

Test the nearby water sources and soil for contamination and the extent of damage and

compare data with the base data. If found contaminated, Inform public of the affected

area not to use water from the wells or bore wells through mobile public announcement

system and by using media like radio and TV. Arrange supply of drinking water from

outside till the condition is normalized.

Use the services of the lab and expertise of pollution board and find solutions to arrest

the leakage of material and leachate and start remedial measures.

Divert material required for lining and transfer skilled employees for new pit construction

from other site along with additional number of equipment. Construct new pit and start

transfer landfill material / leachate in to the new pit. Test the soil contamination level and

find out the level of damage and treat the soil if required or remove the contaminated

soil and safely transfer it in the new land fill.

Check the water contamination level and advise authorities and public about the usability

of water.

Asses the expenditure required for implementation of required remedial measures.

Prepare cost estimate of the total loss including the transport and remediation cost.

Make insurance claim and pay compensation if any advised by the govt. authorities to the

affected victims.

7.6.2. Cyclone leading to land fill flood

Control measures during planning and operation:

During site selection and approval of the site for hazardous waste disposal and should

highlight the history / possibility of cyclone / Floods, Tsunami in the particular area. If it



falls in any of the above better avoid usage of that site, for hazardous waste handling and

storage.

Maintain base line data of quality of water and soil at least one year before start of site

activities.

Check the possibility of breach of an upland water pond / tank or dam which can cause

flood before finalizing the location. Design buildings as per national building code to

withstand for the maximum wind speed experienced by the region without damage.

Cover the site with public liability insurance as per government advice. Check the

maximum rainfall in the location and the possibility of rain water entry from outside in to

the site. Arrest the outside water entry by raising the ground level or by constructing

bund wall / compound wall and providing proper drains along the boundary.

Ensure the storm water drainage system is well designed and maintained to drain storm

water from the site to outside drains and is sufficient to drain rain or flood water without

allowing it to accumulate near landfill. Maintain waste storage and landfill level above the

drain level.

Ensure the leachate ponds capacity is sufficient and will not over flow due to rain water

collection. Get the warning advice from the weather forecasting department regularly.

Stop all activities of land fill and cover the land fill with liners regularly to prevent rain

water contact with the waste material before the start of rain fall. If possible provide

temporary bund wall with sand bags to reduce the damage to landfill bund due to the

flowing water. Evacuate the place and move to safe location as per the advice.

After the occurrence

Check the extent of contamination and damage to ground water source and the soil after

the flood and compare data with base data. Inform disaster management authorities and

state pollution control board authorities if contamination is detected through phone or

through messenger. Inform company authorities over phone. Phone numbers: Project

Manager, HR manager, EHS manager. Inform public of the affected area not to use water

from the wells or bore wells through mobile public announcement and by using media

like radio and TV. Arrange supply of drinking water from outside till the condition is

normalized. Continuously test and monitor the soil and ground water sources and advise

public the condition regularly.



Check the soil contamination level if necessary start remedial action as per the advice of

pollution board. Plan for removing the contaminated soil and fill it in a new land fill pit.

Inform insurance company over phone. Phone Numbers: Assess the damage, prepare and

submit estimate of damage and claim insurance. If necessary relocate the affected public

to an unaffected site.

7.6.3. Major explosion of chemicals / fire and toxic gas release in landfill or Stores

Control measures during planning

Analyze material samples before accepting the materials for disposal. Ensure material

samples collected and analyzed before taking the material inside the premises. Explosive

materials should not be accepted without treatment and check the incoming materials

using an explosive meter.

Ensure good covered storage space available for incinerable waste material. Storage is

well ventilated to prevent accumulation and concentration of gases below explosive and

flammable limit. Install gas detectors and explosive level meters with early warning alarm.

Avoid electric fittings in flammable material storages use flame proof materials if felt

essential.

Compartmentalize storage to limit the stock quantity and risk of fire spread. Locate

incinerable waste storages away from heat source and hot furnace areas.

Provide communication facility and sufficient number of security personal for 24 hours

manual watching.

Installation of smoke detection and warning and automatic fire hydrant with foam

monitors, automatic sprinklers, mist sprays and CO2 flooding system in incinerable waste

storage will help a lot in early detection and automatic fire fighting. Provide separate

storage for reactive chemicals. Provide spark proof equipment to handle solvent waste

containers.

Ensure sufficient gap between storage sheds are maintained as per national building code

to prevent fire spread and easy movement of fire vehicles around the storage during an

emergency.



Wind socks with wind speed indicators are installed in the site to see the wind direction

from any location. Lightning arrestors are installed to cover the whole site. Employ only

qualified and trained employees to supervise the storage activities.

Operation:

Ensure public liability insurance cover is in force for the site. Plan for the disposal of Low

flash point material immediately on arrival and minimize inventory of low flash point

materials and flammable materials. Reactive materials are separated and stored away

from the flammable materials store. Display No smoking warning boards around the

waste material storages. Do not allow any source of heat or spark in material storage.

Ensure static electricity is discharged from material containers by bonding the containers.

Maintain sufficient gap between stack for inspection and also for better ventilation. Do

not use mechanical handling equipments which produce sparks or static electricity.

Use spark proof equipment while handling low flash point and waste containing solvents.

Ensure good housekeeping is maintained in and around storage. Maintain record of

quantity of material stock and the MSDS of material in each shed for giving required

information to disaster management team on arrival at site. Install and maintain sufficient

number of appropriate first aid fire appliances and ensure the approach way is not

blocked.

Train all the employees in first aid, firefighting and the procedures to be followed in case

of an emergency. Replace leaky containers and clean spillage immediately. Remember

inhaling gas generated due to a fire or explosion is dangerous. Use of Self-contained

breathing apparatus (SCBA) is mandatory for all rescue and firefighting work in case of an

explosion or fire. Check the wind direction and inform everyone to stand on the upwind

direction through public address system or through phones. Advice evacuation of people

at site and surrounding if found necessary.

Try and put off fire with the help of available hand appliances, fire hydrant water using

internal trained employees. Bring all available firefighting appliances and also get help

from nearby industries in control and rescue operations only if they are trained and have

the required PPE to carry out the work safely. Phone Numbers of nearby industries: If the

fire is found very major leave it to professionals to deal with it.

Inform state fire and police department about the disaster through phone or through

messenger. Display Phone Numbers: Nearby Fire station, Police station at many locations.

Inform company authorities through phone. Phone Numbers: Use SCBA and rescue



affected employees to safe location and if necessary give first aid with the help of trained

first aider.

Remember to wash with cool water in case of burn injury or chemical spills on human

body and eye at least for 15minits before shifting the victim to hospital. Measure the gas

pollution level in the environment and advice concerned. Inform disaster management

authorities and state pollution control board authorities through phone or through

messenger or phone calls inform nearby hospitals the possible gas that can release from

the incident for quick treatment.

Call additional ambulance if felt necessary the site controller will direct concerned

department to arrange without delay. Provide FIRST AID to the affected victim before

moving them to hospitals. Send the victims to hospital with their personal data and their

medical history while sending for treatment. Measure the contamination level of air and

soil and report to authorities. Initiate remedial measures such as supply of drinking water

and measure air contamination level regularly till the condition normalizes.

If felt necessary, Inform public living near the affected area to evacuate through public

announcement and by using media like radio and TV the direction of escape route and

advise them to use wet cloth to cover the nose while moving. Put off fire using the fire

hydrant water and foam compound or with the help of fire extinguisher.

Use Self Contained Breathing Apparatus and Collect gas samples analyze the type of gas

emanated and the toxicity level.

Inform Fire service and police personnel about the potential of the gas emanated due to

the reaction promptly. Block the road traffic at least 5 km distance depending on the

toxicity of the gas and the wind speed to prevent exposure of more number of public.

Provide first aid to burn injuries by pouring cool water before shifting the victim to

hospital: Phone Number of Hospitals: Shift the gas affected victims to well ventilated area

and provide breathing oxygen. Transport the affected to the hospitals with the advice of

the possible name of gas inhaled by the victim.

Check the extent of damage to the liners if any and arrange for immediate repair based

on the need. Prepare report of the incident and investigate and find out the root cause of

accident. Inform insurers about the incident. Estimate the loss incurred and make the

insurance claim and pay for the actual expenses inquired for treatment and

compensation for the victim or the family members of the victim.



7.6.4. Contamination of soil and water sources due to leakage of contaminants

Control measures:

First and the foremost is to collect soil and water samples from the site before starting

operations and establish the base line data. Cover the site with public liability insurance.

Make sure that the preparation of landfill pits done as per the laid out standard. Special

care is taken while laying the liners such as visual check for damage of liner material and

proper welding of joints to ensure that the leakage of leachate from the liner is absolutely

nil also by conducting leak proof tests ultrasonic or X-ray tests.

Avoid damage of liners during land fill operation by the use of sharp edged objects such

as cutting knives, dropping of crow bars and by moving heavy vehicle on the liners.

Contamination of water and soil due to leakage of leachate from the liners / due to over

flowing from leachate ponds especially during rainy season spillage while pumping or

spillage during handling operation to be avoided.

Flooring of material stores should not have cracks and should not allow seepage of

material. The floor should be provided with bund wall and collection pit.

Periodic checking of soil and water samples and compare data with base line data at least

once a month. If any adverse increase in parameters noticed increase the frequency of

tests. Prepare comparative analysis data if found more, than the base line data inform the

pollution board authorities.

After the incident:

If the operation is continued the condition is going to be disastrous after some time.

Hence it is necessary to initiate corrective measures as per the advice of the pollution

control board. Follow the corrective measures mentioned after an earth quake and flood.

7.6.5. Release of toxic gases from incinerator

Control Measures:

Ensure public liability insurance cover is taken for the site. Analyze the combination of

waste material that is proposed to be burned and check the possibility of toxic gas

generation and get the written report from lab before start feeding the waste material in

the incinerator.



Install wind socks and wind speed monitor at site visible from all points. Employ qualified

and well trained operators to operate the incinerator. Maintain the temperatures of

gases at locations as per the incinerator operation instruction. Install instruments to

detect and warn operators before the toxicity level reaches higher than the statute limit.

Monitor the toxic content levels at the chimney exhaust continuously during the

operation. If any changes in parameters of gases noticed during the operation stop

feeding the material and inform the lab manager immediately and take corrective

measures. Reanalyze the sample and decide the combination of materials before restart.

Maintain the record of changes made for future reference. Inform the employees and the

public living in the vicinity about the safety measures required to be taken in case of an

accidental release.

After an incident:

Evacuate everyone from the site and the vicinity to safe place. Additional care to be taken

while evacuating, sick, old, infants and physically challenged persons. Detect the gas that

is generated by analyzing the gas and its toxicity level. Provide first aid to victims by

removing them to safe and well ventilated area. If necessary send the victim for

treatment with information of the type of gas victim is exposed to.

If necessary make insurance claim and meet the expenses.

7.7. Hazard Control Measures

7.7.1. Fire

To increase the level of safety in proposed project, installation of smoke alarms or

automatic fire detection /alarm systems will be proposed at strategic locations as an early

warning of fire to the occupants.

To prevent fire mishaps and to manage the emergency situation during fire in the

proposed project the following activities and precautions are proposed.

Emergency evacuation plan is important for all projects, and the same will be

prepared as per Fire & Safety rules.

Regular mock drills will be carried out to create awareness on procedures to be

followed in times of emergency situation/evacuation



It will be advised to keep oxygen cylinders, medical kits and masks to prevent

smoke inhalation especially for those with respiratory disorders for whom smoke

inhalation can be very dangerous.

Plant manager will be advised to ensure that the firefighting equipments are in

good working conditions.

The plant will be provided with sufficient firefighting gadgets (water, soil,

cylinders, etc).

Simple steps to be followed during emergency are as follows.

Call the fire rescue department: During fire in plant, leave the premises by nearest

available exit. Call fire department and do not assume anyone else has called the fire

department. If your cloth catches fire, do not get panic or run, stop, drop and roll.

Cover your nose and mouth with a wet clean cloth: Stay calm cover your nose and

mouth with a wet, clean cloth to prevent smoke inhalation injury and choking. Never

jump off or attempt to climb down the side of a tall structure as it will mean certain

death.

Do not run: During a fire, smoke containing poisonous gases such as CO tends to rise up.

When you run in a smoke filled room, you tend to inhale the smoke faster. CO dulls the

senses and prevents clear thinking, leading to panic. To prevent being asphyxiated, dip

tissues or cloth in water and cover your noise with it.

Head-count of the occupants: During an emergency, make good use of the evacuation

procedure and help each other to reach out of plant/building safely. Ensure nobody is left

behind by doing a head-count of occupants. Visitors should read and understand the

evacuation plan before going into the plant/building area and ensure their safety.

7.7.2. Natural Disasters

Disasters occur without notice. Most disasters are natural such as earthquake, floods,

hurricanes, sandstorms, landslides, tsunamis and volcanoes. We have no way of stopping

them, but we can learn to deal with the difficult situations that arise due to them.

During disasters like floods, fire, earth quake, landslides, rescue beings at site. Even

before external help arrives, people affected by the disasters help each other.



The government and many voluntary organizations send teams of workers trained in

rescue operations to disaster-affected areas. These teams join hands with the local

community helpers such as doctors, nurses, social workers and policemen.

Temporary shelters are built for displaced people. Doctors and nurses provide medical

aid. They treat the wounded and work to control epidemics. Social workers collect food

and cloth from all over the country for the disaster-affected people. The police maintain

law and order. Media –persons help in spreading news about the victims and their

conditions. They also post advertisements that urge people to donate for victims.

In extreme conditions, the army and Air force organize rescue operations. They clear

roads, send medical teams and help to move people to safer places. The air force drops

food, water and clothes in the affected areas. Organization like UN helps in providing aid

during massive disasters.

Individually, people from all over the world also come forward to help during a disaster.

They donate blood while many donate money. Some even reach the disaster affected

places to give an extra hand in the rescue operation. Families adopt children who have

lost their parents and thus give them a new home.

Some of the points we can keep in mind when disaster happens

If there is a tornado, take shelter in a place without windows.

In an earthquake, remember to crouch under some heavy furniture or stand under

the doorframe for cover.

In case of a fire in the building, leave the building by nearby exit

If the site is flooded, then climb up to the roof.

Do not use the telephone, except to call for help, so as to leave telephone lines

free for the organization of response

Listen to the messages broadcast by radio and the various media so as to be

informed of development

Carry out the official instructions given over the radio or by loudspeaker

Keep an emergency kit ready. In all the different types of emergency, it is better to

be prepared than to get ready, to get information so as to get organized, to wait

rather that act too hastily

During floods turn off electricity to reduce the risk of electrocution

As soon as flood begins, take vulnerable people (old, children, sick, etc) to upper

floor

Beware of water contamination, wait until the water is declared safe before

drinking or boil the water before drinking



Clean and disinfect the room that is flooded

During storms and hurricanes do not go out in a car or a boat once the storm has

been announced

If caught outside in a storm, take refuge as quickly as possible in shelter (never

under a tree), if there is no shelter, lie down flat in a ditch.

In a thunderstorm keep away from doors, windows, and electrical conductors,

unplug electrical appliances and aerials. Do not use any electrical appliances or the

telephone

During earthquake keep calm, do not get panic, People who are indoors should

stay there but move to the central part of the building, people who are outside

should stay there, keeping away from buildings to avoid collapsing walls and away

from electrical cables. Anyone in a vehicle should park it, keeping away from

bridges and buildings

During spread of clouds of toxic fumes, close doors and windows, seal any cracks

or gaps around windows and doors with adhesive tape. Organize a reserve of

water (by filling wash basins, baths, etc. Turn off ventilators and air conditioners.

7.7.3. Electrical Accidents

Electrical hazards can cause burns, shocks, and electrocution which can lead to serious

injury and even death. When dealing with potentially serious electrical hazards stop and

think! Instead of taking a chance and risking your personal safety, call trained

professionals to handle problems.

Many times people prefer to take electrical matters into their own hands. Other small

aspects of electrical repair in a business setting may be taken care of without needing

professional service technicians. If you do decide to take matters into your own hands,

safety precautions can avoid injuries and other losses.

7.7.3.1. Prevention of Electrical Accidents

Flexible cords connected to appliance should be wired to confirm to the international

color code. Color of insulation wire is

Brown represents live wire,

Blue represents neutral wire and

Green/yellow stripes represent earth wire.

What you should look for when selecting an electrical appliance are given below



a. The appliance should be suitable for operation on local electrical supply of 240

volts AC and frequency of 50 Hz.

b. The appliance should preferably be tested and certified by a national or reputed

standards testing authority

c. Look for certified plugs on the flexible cords connected to the appliances. If the

appliance is double insulated and has a 2-pin plug, then it should be fitted with a

suitable certified plug.

d. An essential formality when buying any appliances is a duly completed guarantee

card with the dealers/retailer's official stamp and details of the appliance (serial

number, etc.).

Safety precautions to be taken when using electrical appliances

a. Avoid using handheld appliances when your hand and/or body is wet.

b. Do not use or leave appliances where liquid can splash onto them

c. Flexible cords connecting the appliance and the plug should be in good condition,

if the cord is frayed, chaffed, cut or melted, have the entire cord replaced by a

competent person.

d. Check accessories such as plugs attached to appliances for cracks and burnt marks

and have them replaced. If undue overheating occurs or burnt marks appear in

any electrical appliance, have it checked.

Some common causes of electrical accidents in the house

a. Faulty wiring: This usually occurs when unauthorized extension or rewiring is done

by unqualified persons. Some of the usual faults are the omission of earth wires

and the reversing of the live and neutral wires. Without an earth wire, the

exposed metal parts of appliances may deliver a lethal shock to the user when a

fault develops.

b. Improper flexible cords: This can be caused by connecting the flexible cord

wrongly to the plug. In the case of appliances which have exposed metallic parts, a

2-core instead of a 3-core flexible cord is used. When the appliance is faulty, the

exposed metal parts may become live and a fatal accident could result.

c. Faulty appliance: Attempts to repair faults in electrical appliances by people not

trained to do so can result in accidental shock.

To prevent Electrical accidents, the following points should be kept in mind:

All electrical wiring, rewiring or extension work must be carried out by licensed

electrical contractors. On completion, the contractors should test before

electricity supply is connected.



Repair of appliances and replacement of flexible cords should be carried out only

by competent persons.

To ensure electrical safety in the facility, a current-operated Earth Leakage Circuit

Breaker (ELCB) or Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB) set to operate at a very

small leakage current is recommended. (This is usually marked 100mA or 0.1A on

the label). In case of dangerous electrical leakage to earth, it should automatically

cur off the supply of electricity.

DO NOT use multi-way adaptors. Over loading can cause fire. One socket outlet is

for one appliance only.

DO NOT carry out wiring extension, Engage a licensed wiring contractor for the

work.

DO NOT use a two-way lighting adaptor for any extension.

DO NOT connect any electrical appliance to lighting outlets. A lighting outlet does

not have an earth wire to prevent danger.

ENSURE the switch is in "OFF" position before changing bulbs.

DO NOT make joints to lengthen the lead of the electrical appliances. If the lead

wire is worn out or too short, replace it with a new wire.

DO NOT drive nails carelessly on the wall. There may be concealed wiring.

USE individual socket outlet for every electrical appliance.

KEEP AWAY from danger areas such as a substation for whatsoever reasons.

CHECK before carrying out excavation work to prevent damaging any underground

cable. The operator may receive severe electric shock or even be electrocuted.

TAKE PRECAUTION when working in the vicinity of overhead lines to avoid any

unforeseen incident.

DO NOT meddle with any broken overhead wire. Report the matter immediately

to the nearest electric office.

DO NOT climb any electric pole. You may receive an electric shock or get

electrocuted.

DO NOT throw anything onto the overhead lines.

NEVER attempt to retrieve anything stuck to overhead lines by whatever means.

DO NOT climb transmission line towers. No one is safe from its high voltage shock.

DO NOT erect any structure close to transmission lines.

DO NOT fly kites close to overhead lines.

TAKE PRECAUTION when working in the vicinity of overhead lines to avoid any

unforeseen incident.

NEVER stand on a damp or wet surface when using electrical equipment.

USE a portable electrical tool, which is properly earthed.

DO NOT tap electrical power without a proper plug.



DO NOT use any electrical tool which has a damaged casing, cap, switch, lead or

plug.

7.7.3.2. First Aid and Emergency Procedures

Burns can cause due acid spillage and leakage of electricity. Curative measures for any

issues of burns and First Aid procedures are given below:

Table 7-11 -First Aid for Burns

Burns Covering Small Area Burns Covering Extensive Area

i. Allow cold tap water to run

gently over the area or

immerse in cold water.

ii. It may be necessary to cover

with gauze or a clean

handkerchief, and bandage.

i. Allow person to lie down.

ii. Cover burned areas with sterile dressing

or clean cloth and lightly bandage.

iii. If clothing is adhering, do not disturb;

leave the clothing alone.

iv. Keep person warm. If person is not

nauseated, he may have sips of water.

v. Arrange for immediate medical care.

Note:

Do not user ointments, greases, pastes or powder on burned area.

Do not prick the blisters caused by burns.

Tetanus immunization - Protection against tetanus should be considered whenever the skin is

broken by injuries

7.8. Full Mock Drill Monitoring

The mock drills are to be conducted at regular intervals. For conducting mock drills a

committee has to be organized. The committee may invite any other official/expert, if

considered necessary.

7.8.1. Steps of Mock Drills

The Mock Drills should be carried out step by step as stated below.

First Step : Test the effectiveness of communication system

Second Step : Test the speed of mobilization of the emergency teams.

Third Step : Test the effectiveness of search, rescue and treatment of casualties.

Fourth Step : Test Emergency isolation and shut down and remedial taken on the system.



Fifth Step : Conduct a full rehearsal of the actions to be taken during an emergency.

The Disaster Management Plan should be periodically revised based on experience

gained from the Mock Drill.

7.9. Hydrological and Geo-Hydrological Conditions of the Project Area

Objectives

Study of the geological and hydro-geological condition of the study area and its

surroundings

Characterization of various geological formations and their disposition in the study

area and surroundings

The impacts assessment studies on surface water bodies and groundwater around

the study area covering a radius of 5 km

7.9.1. Topography

The area can be broadly grouped into two depending upon its geomorphic features as

alluvial fans and alluvial plains. Alluvial fans are deposited by hill torrents with a wavy

plain rather than a steep slope. Adjacent to the alluvial fan are the alluvial plains which

forms a part of large Indo- gengetic Quaternary basin comprises of thick sand and silty

sand layers interbedded with silt and clay beds. The soils are mainly developed on

alluvium under the dominant influence of climate followed by topography and time. The

major soil type of the district is weakly colonized by tropical arid brown soils. In total

20.74 Acres of land, 1.20 Acres land will be allocated for the Incinerator. Topographically

allocated Incinerator area is planed without any streams. Average elevation of site is 330

meters above MSL.

7.9.2. Rainfall & Climate

The climate of Mohali district can be classified as subtropical. The normal annual rainfall

of the district is 1061 mm which is unevenly distributed over the area in 49 days. The

south west monsoon contributes about 80% of the annual rainfall.

7.9.3. Geology

The study area under consideration geologically comprises two distinct types of

geological deposits, viz., the Siwalik (Middle Miocene to Early Pleistocene) and the Indo-

Gangetic Plain (Pleistocene to Holocene). The Siwalik sequence comprise the Upper



Siwalik formation which is divisible into two distinct lithofacies namely, the Sandstone

and the Conglomerate Facies which are clearly distinguishable and persistent throughout

the Siwalik belt of the area. Detailed Geological Succession is given in Table: 7.12.

Table 7.12 Geological Succession of the Study Area

Stratigraphic Unit Litho Unit Lithology

Indo- Gangetic Plain

Bhabar

Coarse textured deposits composed of

gravel packed with infilling of finer

material and sands deposits in general

free of calcium carbonate

Terai

Deposits consist of light olive brown to

dark greyish brown finer textured silty

loam. Loam and sandy loam materials. The

unit often contains calcium carbonate

concretions.

Siwalik group Upper Siwaliks Conglomerates

Facies

Well indurated massive

conglmeratic bed

composed of pebble,

cobble and boulder

sized megaclasts of

cherts, quartizites,

sandstone and

siltstones cemented

together by calcareous

and ferruginous matrix.

Sandstone

Facies

Thickly bedded poorly

to moderately

indurated light grey to

pale brown pebble

sandstones with

occasional thin

clays/silts/clays of

various shades.

Middle Siwaliks



7.9.4. Hydrogeological Studies

In-order to evaluate the hydrogeological setup of the proposed site, a study was

conducted towards observation of groundwater conditions in and around the study area.

Groundwater is mainly being extracted by way of dug wells in study area there are few

bore wells present. The data collected through systematic well inventory within 5km

radius of the proposed site is analyzed for making a meaningful representation of the

occurrence and movement of groundwater. All these observations are detailed below.

7.9.4.1. Occurrence of Ground Water

The occurrence and movement of ground water in the study area is occupied by

Quaternary Alluvial deposits belongings to the vast Indo –Gangetic alluvial plains, which

forms the main aquifer system. Groundwater occurs under phreatic conditions in the

shallow aquifers while leaky confined to confine conditions occurs along deeper aquifers

of Quaternary alluvial deposits. The principal aquifer system of the study area is Alluvium

and major aquifer system. Depth of water level ranges between 5 to 10 m bgl during pre-

monsoon and 4 to 9 m bgl during post monsoon period.

Groundwater resource potential of the district has been assessed as per Groundwater

Resource Estimation Methodology (GEC-97) as on 31.03.09 by considering administrative

block as the assessment unit. The Net Annual Ground Water Availability of the district is

27,514 ham, existing ground water draft for all uses is 28,005 ham. Provision for domestic

and industrial requirement supply to 2025 years is 5455 ham. Net ground water

availability for future irrigation development is 1379 ham. The stage of groundwater

development for the district is 102%.

The stage of groundwater development in Dera Bassi & Kharar blocks is 133 % & 100%

respectively and falls under Over Exploited category, whereas stage of ground water

development of Sialba Majri Block is 46 % and falls in safe category. In Kharar block,

Agriculture draft decreased but Industrial & Domestic drafts increased tremendously.

Status of groundwater development in Dera Bassi block is given in Table: 7.13.



Table No. 7.13 Dynamic Ground Water Resources of

Dera Bassi block, Mohali District

S. No. Item Total (in ham)

1 Total net groundwater availability 11907

2 Existing gross ground water draft for all uses 15612

3 Provision of domestic and industrial requirements 2225

4 Existing Gross draft for irrigation 13867

5 Net Ground water availability for future irrigation

& development -4185

6 Stage of Ground Water Development and

Category

133% (Stage)

Over Exploited

(Category)

7.9.4.2. Natural Drainage:

The Ghagga River, medkhallinala, and DangriNadi are major streams flowing in the 10km

radius of study area. These streams are originating from Siwalik Hills located at northern

side of site. These streams of the Siwalik Hills are ephemeral in nature and prove to be an

economic liability. The drainage network of an area is principally governed by the

topography of the land, whether a particular region is dominated by hard or soft rocks,

and the gradient of the land. Since the study areas are located on an upland area with

respects to its surrounding environs, several first order streams originate at this location

and forming the most common form of drainage system called dendritic system. All the

existing drains are moving to the down streams and connecting to the nearest surface

streams. There is no major / minor drainage passing through the proposed site. There are

several surface tanks existing around the proposed site. Most of them are minor tanks

connected with the nearest surface streams as catchment. There are no major streams &

surface water bodies located within 1 km radius of project site.

7.10. Public Hearing

As per the provision of the Environment Impact Assessment Notification No. S.O. 1533

dated 14.9.06 and as revised in December 2009, Office Memorandum No. J-

11015/387/2008-I A, 11 (m) dated 28th Sep. 2011 of the Ministry of Environment and

Forest, Government of India, New Delhi, an application for the proposed project to

provide 500 kg/hr Hazardous waste incinerator facility in the existing Common Hazardous

waste Treatment Storage and Disposal Facility has been submitted before Expert

Appraisal Committee, New Delhi as formed by the Ministry of Environment and Forest,

Government of India, New Delhi. A condition for public hearing on the issued T.O.R. Letter

F.No 10-27/2016-IA.III Dated 04.05.2016 to the said project has been set forth by the



commission. Considering the ongoing industrialization needs, it was realized that, there is

a requirement to increase the existing Direct Landfill (DLF) and Landfill after stabilization

treatment (LAT) to 20,000 TPA and 40,000 TPA, respectively, along with installation of

hazardous waste incinerator of capacity – 500 kg/hr, bio-medical waste management

facilities of capacity – 5 TPD , alternative fuels and raw materials facility of capacity –

18,000 TPA, e-waste management facility of capacity – 8,000 TPA and recycling facilities

like used oil recycling of capacity – 2 KLD, spent solvent @5 KLD, lead recycling @ 2000

TPA, paper recycling @ 2 TPD, and plastic recycling @ 2 TPD to convert it into an

Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage & Disposal Facility in existing

Plant premises located at Village Nimbuan, District Mohali (S.A.S Nagar), Punjab. In that

compatibility of values, a public hearing is planned on date 30.6.2017 at 11:00 A.M. held

at the main gate of the existing TSDF of Ramky Enviro Engineers Ltd (Unit: Punjab Waste

Management Project) located opposite M/s Vardhman Chemtech Ltd, Village Nimbuan,

P.O. Rampur Sainia, Tehsil Dera Bassi, District Mohali (S.A.S. Nagar), Punjab.

As per the provision of the EIA notification, a public notification has been published in the

locally distributed newspapers Hindustan Times’ & ‘Ajit’ on 27.05.2017. Besides,

pamphlets were also spread in all the nearby wards. For the promotion of public hearing,

announcements were also made through banners and loudspeaker installed on a mobile

vehicle. The public hearing was held under the supervision of Sh. Charandev Singh Mann,

P.C.S. Additional Deputy Commissioner, on behalf of Deputy Commissioner, S.A.S Nagar

(Mohali) and Er. S.S. Matharu, Environmental Engineer, Regional Office, Punjab Pollution

Control Board, S.A.S Nagar (Mohali). On behalf of the project, the technical advisor Shri

Chakradhar and other officers along with staff were present. Dr. Chakradhar, the

environment advisor, was present as a representative on behalf Ramky Enviro Services

Private Limited for the project. The people of almost all the nearby wards were present at

the public hearing and the description of the same is as per the attached attendance roll.

Public hearing minutes (signed copy) is attached as Annexure-5 and the suggestions / complaints raised during public hearing and replies along with action plan are given in

Annexure-5.

CHAPTER 8

PROJECT BENEFITS



8. Chapter 8

Project Benefits

8.1. Benefits of Hazardous Waste Management

Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016

the industries from dumping their solid wastes indiscriminately. At the same time they

permit the industries to dispose their waste in safe & secured manner. It has been made

mandatory by the government to dispose the hazardous waste in systematic and

scientific way and pollution control boards have been asked to ensure it. For systematic &

scientific disposal of solid wastes, a facility has to be developed where care is to be taken

to avoid any negative effects on the environment.

The main benefits of the proposed project are

The proposed project facilitates better management of the industrial hazardous

wastes.

It will be the showcase for other districts / states for management of hazardous

waste with additional benefit of green and clean Environment

It minimizes the pollution load on environment from industrial hazardous waste


closure on account of violation of rules

It reduces the number of hazardous waste dump sites in the area and also

eliminates the pollution potential

Possibility for recovery of material can be researched at common site


facility


In absence of expertise or availability of less expertise this route is confirmed to be

most viable and workable






Competitive advantage in international markets vis-à-vis grading of the products

on environmental consideration



8.1.1. Benefits of Landfill

Landfills minimize the natural impact of solid waste on the environment by the following

mechanics:

Isolation of inert waste through containment

Elimination of polluting pathways

8.1.2. Advantages of Incineration Method

The following are the advantages of incineration of hazardous wastes.

Ability to handle heterogeneous waste.

High efficiency due to

o Vigorous mixing in the bed

o High retention time

Low NOx formation due to

o Lower operating temperature &

o Low excess air

In bed neutralization possible for removing acid gasses.

Quick restart due to heat stored in the bed.

Absence of moving parts hence low maintenance.

Flexibility to handle diverse fuels.

Residence time can be adjusted by varying kiln speed.

Waste feeding without much preparation.

Waste heat recovery is possible.

Gas cooling systems can be fixed.

Well Scrubbing systems can be added.

Temperature control for constant efficiently.

Air control for adequate excess air.

Interlocks for safe operational shut down.

8.1.3. Benefits from Bio Medical Waste

In appropriate treatment and disposal of bio-medical waste contributes to environmental

pollution, uncontrolled burning / incineration causes air pollution, dumping in nallas,

tanks and along the riverbed causes water pollution and unscientific land filling cause soil

pollution.

The proper bio-medical waste management will help to control nosocomial diseases

(hospital acquired infections), reduce HIV/AIDS, sepsis, and hepatitis transmission from

dirty needles and other improperly cleaned / disposed medical items, control zones



(diseases passed to humans through insects, birds, rats and other animals), prevent illegal

repacking and resale of contaminated needles, cut cycles of infection and avoid negative

long-term health effects like cancer, from the environmental release of toxic substances

such dioxin, mercury and others.

8.1.4. Benefits of E-Waste Management

Electronic products are made from valuable resources and highly engineered materials,

including metals, plastics and glass, all of which require energy to mine and manufacture

them. Reusing and recycling consumer electronics conserves our natural resources and

avoids air and water pollution, as well as greenhouse gas emissions that are caused by

manufacturing virgin materials.

Recycling of E Waste helps protect the environment in a number of ways. Electronic and

electrical items are made from valuable resources such as precious metals, copper, and

plastics all of which require energy to mine and process. Recovering these materials by

recycling avoids the need to mine and process new materials, which in turn, conserves

our natural resources, and avoids air and water pollution and greenhouse gas emissions.

Recovering metals from used E-waste will reduce extraction of raw metals from the earth.

Materials Recovered from E Waste

Almost all of the materials used to manufacture electronic equipments can be recovered

to make new products. Metals, plastics, and rechargeable batteries from recycled

electronic equipment are turned into new materials and products.

Electronic equipment contain a number of different metals – gold, silver, platinum,

palladium, copper, tin, and zinc – that are recovered in the recycling process. The

recovered metals are then used by a number of different industries such as jewelry,

plating, electronics, automotive, and art foundries.

The plastics recovered from the electronic equipment are recycled into plastic

components for new electronic devices or other plastic products such as garden furniture,

license plate frames, non-food containers, and replacement automotive parts. When the

rechargeable battery can no longer be reused, the battery can be recycled into other

rechargeable battery products.

8.1.5. Benefits from Recycling Facilities

Recycling is the process of making or manufacturing new products from a product that

has originally served its purpose. If these used products are disposed off in an



appropriate, environmentally friendly way, the process of recycling has been set in

motion. In the proposed project the following recycling facilities are proposed.

Lead Recycling

Used Oil Recycling

Spent Solvents Recycling

8.1.5.1. Lead Recycling

Lead is a mineral that has been in use for at least 5000 years. Current statistics reveal

Current statistics reveal approximately 88 % of the batteries were Starting, Lighting &

Ignition (SLI) automotive batteries with a lifespan of about 4 years accompanied by 8% of

motive power type with a lifespan of 6 years. Further, 4 percent were a stationary type

with a lifespan of 10 years. Widely researched facts conclude that 97 percent of the lead

recycled was from lead acid batteries. Until couple of years ago, the lead recycled as a

percentage of apparent lead supply, was estimated at 63% with a recycling efficiency of

95%. The rest was from other metal sources including castings, sheet, solders and

miscellaneous fabrications. The main benefits are as follows.

1. Recycled lead is cheaper to produce than virgin lead. Recycled lead takes less than

25% of the energy required to produce lead from ore extraction.

2. Recycling of lead has a smaller carbon footprint than mining, conserves ore

reserves, and reduces the amount of waste associated with primary extraction

3. A high recycling rate means that there is less opportunity for lead to end up in the

waste stream where it requires would pose a health risk to people.

4. In recent decades, the amount of lead from batteries ending up in landfills has

dramatically decreased, and as a result, overall flow of lead to landfills has

dropped markedly.

5. By keeping lead out of landfills, recycling helps conserve landfills, and reduce the

need for investment in controls to eliminate airborne particulate from

incineration.

8.1.5.2. Used Oil Recycling

Many people who are unfamiliar with the importance of recycling used oil are

unconsciously harming the environment by throwing it away with their normal garbage or

emptying their used oil into storm drains. Such actions, especially emptying used oil into

storm drains, can cause real harm to the environment. To put it into perspective, just one

gallon of used oil can contaminate 1 million gallons of water.



Recycling used motor oil keeps it out of our rivers, lakes, streams and even the ground

water. In many cases, that means keeping it out of our drinking water, off our beaches,

and away from wildlife. We all share the responsibility of protecting our environment and

keeping our waters safe. Recycling used oil allows us to continue to enjoy what many of

us take for granted every day – clean water.

To recycle used oil, processors and refiners remove water, insoluble, dirt, heavy metals,

nitrogen, chlorine, and oxygenated compounds from oil drained from automobiles or

other machines. The resulting product called “refined” oil must meet the same stringent

refining, compounding, and performance standards as virgin oil for use in automotive,

heavy duty diesel, and other internal combustion engines, and hydraulic fluids and gear

oils. Extensive laboratory testing and field studies conclude that refined oil is equivalent

to virgin oil it passes all prescribed tests and, in some situations, even outperforms virgin

oil.

The same consumers and businesses that use regular oil also can use refined oil, since

refining simply reconditions used oil into new, high-quality lubricating oil. Any vehicle

maintenance facilities, automobile owners, and other machinery maintenance operations

that use oil also can use refined oil. In some cases, fleet maintenance facilities that use

large volumes of oil arrange to reuse the same oil that they send to be refined—a true

closed recycling loop. The main benefits of Recycling Oil are given below.

Recycling used oil keeps it from polluting soil and water.

Motor oil does not wear out—it just gets dirty—so recycling it saves a valuable

resource.

Less energy is required to produce a gallon of redefined base stock than a base

stock from crude oil.

8.1.5.3. Spent Solvent Recycling

Waste solvent recycling means reducing the amount of local, state and central toxic

release inventory. Recycling waste solvents keeps excess contaminants from entering

water systems and damaging the environment. Recovering solvents reduces emissions

and cuts down raw material costs. Some of the benefits due to spend solvents recycling

are as follows.

Recycling solvents reduces the environmental impact by reducing the volume of

solvents destined for disposal at incineration facilities.

Reduces the amount of hazardous waste generation

Reduces the amount of virgin solvents manufacturing



Where waste is suitable for fuel blending a more cost effective solution will be

provided.

8.1.5.4. Waste Plastic Recycling

Recycling plastic conserves the natural resources and energy that would be

required to produce plastic from scratch.

When plastic is recycled, less plastic is sent to landfill and thus, less of this material

takes up room in our environment for hundreds of years. In fact, recycling one ton

of plastic can save 7.4 cubic yards of landfill space.

Plastics are becoming increasingly easy to recycle. Besides the invention of new

plastic recycling technology, governments all over the world have plastic collection

schemes in place

8.1.5.5. Waste Paper Recycling

Reduces Logging for Fiber

Conserves Energy

Conserves Water

Reduces Air and Water Pollution

Reduces Greenhouse Gas Emissions

8.1.6. Benefits of Alternate Fuel Raw material Facility

Low calorific value, non-hazardous waste, inorganic materials can be used as a

blender

Homogeneity of the mixers parameter is vital for the end user

The Cement Industry can play an important role in the urgent global need for

destruction of hazardous wastes like Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB), Persistent

Organic Pollutant (POP), and ensuring the Destruction and Removal Efficiency

(DRE) of 99.9999 %.

Investigation proved cement kiln had the Lowest Polychlorinated dibenzo-p-

dioxins and dibenzo furans (PCDD/DFs) emission reduced to the extent of 99.3%

using Hazardous Wastes.

Methane is a particularly potent Green House Gases (GHG), and is currently

considered to have a Global Warming Potential (GWP) 25 times that of CO2.

Reduction of about 1.6 kilograms (kg) of CO2 per kg of utilized Refuse Derived Fuel.

A holistic approach to waste management has positive consequences of GHG

emissions. Co processing proved a viable method to dispose the HW.



The surrounding industrial belts located in and around Nalgonda including

Mahaboobnagar, Warangal, Khammam will be benefitted from the proposed site.

8.2. Improvement in the Physical Infrastructure

The proposed project is expected to yield a positive impact on the socio economic

environment. It helps to sustain the development of this area including further

development of physical infrastructural facilities. The following physical infrastructure

facilities will improve due to proposed project.

Road transport facilities.

Housing facilities.

Water supply and sanitation.

8.2.1. Employment Benefits

The main advantage of the proposed project is direct employment generation (i) absorbs

rural labour and unskilled workers (in addition to semi-skilled and some skilled); (ii)

provides opportunity for seasonal employment thereby supplementing worker’s income

from farming, and (iii) permits participation of women workers both during construction

and operation phase.

Additionally it is estimated that good number of jobs will be created as an indirect

employment opportunities at local/regional level. The other related employment due to

transportation requirement, supply of essential items and services to the project site and

other community services will be plenty. Employment in these sectors will be permanent

based on own initiatives and interest of the individual. Involvement of unskilled labour

requirement will be on continuous basis depending on the requirement of contractor at

site. A major part of this labour force will be hired from nearby places.

8.2.2. Other Tangible Benefits

Additional housing demand for rental accommodation will increase.

Cultural, recreation and aesthetic facilities will also be improved.

Improvement in communication, transportation, education, community

development and medical facilities.

Overall change in employment and income opportunity.

The state government will also benefit directly from the proposed project, through

increased revenue from royalties, excise duty etc.

CHAPTER 9

ENVIRONMENTAL

MANAGMENT PLAN



9. Chapter 9

Environmental Management Plan

9.1. Introduction

Preparation of environmental management plan is required for formulation,

implementation and monitoring of environmental protection measures during and after

commissioning of projects. The plan indicates the details of various measures which have

been proposed and to be followed including cost components. Cost of measures for

environmental safeguard should be treated as an integral component of the project cost

and environmental aspects should be taken into account at various stages of the project.

Conceptualization: preliminary environmental assessment

Planning: detailed studies of environmental impacts and design of safeguards

Execution: implementation of environmental safety measures

Operation: monitoring of effectiveness of built-in safeguards

9.2. Environmental Management during Construction Stage

The impacts during the construction phase on the environment would be basically of

temporary in nature and are expected to reduce gradually on completion of the

construction activities.

9.2.1. Air Quality Mitigation Measure

For the proposed project, site leveling and grading will be carried out if required. Where

ever possible, to maintain the natural elevations, they will not be disturbed. Only leveling

activity will be carried out for providing roads, sewage network, storm water system and

places required for construction of sheds and administrative buildings. According to the

engineering assessment, most of the excavated mud generated during construction

activities will be reused within the project site for leveling during road formation, bunds

construction around the land fill site, etc. The excess if any will be given to the local

contractors for disposal in low lying areas, road construction use, etc.

During construction period, most of the dust will be generated from the movement of

construction vehicles on unpaved roads. Unloading and removal of soil material shall also



act as a potential source for dust nuisance. The control measures proposed to be taken

are given below.

1. Water sprinkling on main haul roads in the project area will be done, this activity

will be carried out at least twice a day. If need arises, frequency will be increased

on windy days. In this way, around 50% reduction on the dust contribution from

the exposed surface will be achieved

2. The duration of stockpiling of excavated mud will be as short as possible as most

of the material will be used as backfill material for the open cut trenches for road

development.

3. Temporary tin sheets of sufficient height (3m) will be erected around the site of

dust generation or all around the project site as barrier for dust control.

4. All vehicles carrying raw materials will be instructed to cover with tarpaulin /

plastic sheet, Unloading and loading activities will be stopped during windy days.

5. To reduce the dust movement from civil construction site to the neighborhood,

the external part of the construction activity will be covered by plastic sheets.

9.2.2. Water Quality Mitigation Measure

During site development, necessary precautions will be taken. So that the runoff water

from the site gets collected to working pit and if any over flow, will be diverted to nearby

greenbelt / plantation area. During construction activity all the equipment’s washed

water will be diverted to working pit to arrest the suspended solids if any and the settled

water will be reused for construction purposes, and for sprinkling on roads to control the

dust emission, etc.

The domestic wastewater generated from toilets used by the work force will be diverted

to septic tank followed by soak pit. Therefore, impact on water quality would be

insignificant.

9.2.3. Noise Mitigation Measures

Noise generating equipment will be used during day time for brief period of its

requirement. Proper enclosures will be used for reduction in noise levels, wherever

possible the noise generating equipment will be kept away from the human habituation.

Temporary tin sheets of sufficient height (3m) will be erected around the noise

generating activity or all around the project site as barrier for minimizing the noise travel

to surrounding areas. Therefore, impact on noise environment due to proposed project

would be insignificant.



All vehicles entering into the project will be informed to maintain speed limits, and not

blow horns unless it is required. Personal protective equipment like earmuffs, helmets

covering ears would be provided to the workers working near noise generating

equipment and would see that workers use the protective gadgets regularly.

9.2.4. Solid Waste Mitigation Measures

The solid waste generated during construction period being predominantly inert in

nature, construction and demolition waste does not create chemical or biochemical

pollution. However maximum effort would be made to reuse and recycle them. The most

of the solid waste material will be used for filing/ leveling of low-laying areas, as road

construction material, if any excess given to local contractors for lifting and dumping in

low lying areas. All attempts would be made to stick to the following measures.

1. All construction waste shall be stored within the site itself. A proper screen will be

provided so that the waste does not get scattered.

2. Attempts will be made to keep the waste segregated into different heaps as far as

possible so that their further gradation and reuse is facilitated.

3. Materials, which can be reused for purpose of construction, leveling, making

roads/ pavement will also be kept in separate heaps from those which are to be

sold or land filled

The use of the construction material basically depends on their separation and conditions

of the separated material. A majority of these materials are durable and therefore, have a

high potential for reuse. It would, however, be desirable to have quality standards for the

recycled materials. Construction waste can be used in the following manner.

Reuse of bricks, tiles, stone slabs, timber, piping railings etc. to the extent possible

and depending upon their conditions.

Sale/ auction of materials which cannot be used at the site due to design

constraint

Plastics, broken glass, scrap metal, used cement bags, etc., can be sent for

recycling in the industries

Rubble/ brick bats can be used for building activity, such as leveling, under coat of

lanes where the traffic does not constitute heavy moving loads.

Larger unusable pieces can be sent for filing up low laying areas.

Fine material such as sand, dust, etc., can be used as cover material

The unearthed soil can be used for leveling as well as for lawn development

The broken pieces of the flooring material can be used for leveling in the building

or can be disposed off



The unused or remaining paints/varnishes/wood can either be reused or can be

disposed.

9.2.5. Ecological Aspects

During construction period, there could be clearing of vegetation in order to prepare the

site for construction, the top soil from the construction area will collected and will be

stored separately and will be used for greenbelt development. A comprehensive green

belt program will be planned to improve the ecological condition of the region.

9.2.6. Site Security

Adequate security management would be made to ensure that the local inhabitants and

the stray cattle are not exposed to the potential hazards of construction activities. Round

the clock security personnel will be appointed to restrict entry of unwanted people to the

site.

9.3. Environmental Management during Operation Stage

Necessary control measures will be undertaken at the design stage to meet the statutory

requirements and towards minimizing environmental impacts.

During project implementation period special emphasis will be made on measures to

minimize leachate / effluent generation and dust control at source. The specific control

measures related to air emissions, liquid effluent discharges, noise generation, solid

waste disposal etc. are described below:

9.3.1. Air Quality Management

The main activities from the proposed project which cause air pollution are as follows:

Incinerator stack emissions

DG set stack emissions

Dust particulates due to movement of vehicles and road sweepings

Temperature & odour from bio medical waste management plant

Dust, odour and gas generation from secured landfill



The following methods of abatement will be employed for the air pollution control.

Incinerator will be provided with a stack height meeting MOEF Guidelines, spray

dryer, multi cyclone, bag house and wet scrubber.

DG set will be provided with a stack height meeting MOEFCC Guidelines for proper

dispersion of sulfur dioxide and oxides of nitrogen.

Internal roads will be concreted / asphalted to reduce dust emissions

Speed restriction will be followed within the project and speed breakers will be

provided at entry and exit points

Gas management system in secured landfill will be provided

Green belt will be provided along the internal roads and plant boundary

9.3.2. Odor Control

The odor management is one of the issues in TSDF. The main aim is to minimize the

number of sources of odor generation which exist in site. To undertake direct

management of odor generating sources that give rise to odor problems.

The mitigation measures proposed to minimize and control odor are as follows.

Dilution of odorant by odor counteraction or neutralize by spraying Ecosorb

(organic and biodegradable chemical) around odor generation areas at regular

intervals.

Covering the landfill area under operation daily with layer of earth, clay or a

similar material.

Covering by using heavy duty hessian, plastics and foams odor can be minimized.

Covering of trucks carrying waste while transportation.

The waste after combustion in primary and secondary stages the off gas/flue

gases shall be passed through spray dryer, cyclone separation, activated carbon

dry lime and wet scrubber. The odour will be removed during the above gas

cleaning operations especially the activated carbon shall adsorb any organics if so

present in the flue gases. The odour free gases shall be released into the

atmosphere from 30 m stack.

9.3.3. Gas Management

Land fill gas is generated as a product of waste biodegradation. In land fill, Organic waste

is broken down by enzymes produced by bacteria in a manner. Considerable heat is

generated by these reactions with methane, carbon dioxide, nitrogen, oxygen, hydrogen

sulfide and other gases as by products. Methane and carbon dioxide are the principle



gases produced with almost 50-50% share. When methane is present in the air in

concentrations between 5 to 15%, it is explosive. Landfills generate gases with a pressure

sufficient enough to damage the final cover and largely have the impact on vegetative

cover. Also because only limited amount of oxygen are present in a land fill, when

methane concentration reach this critical level, there is a little danger that the land fill will

explode.

To minimize the gas generation in the proposed project incinerator is proposed for

incineration of organic based (high calorific) waste, hence gas generation is anticipated to

be less. To manage the gas generated a venting system with flaring arrangement is

proposed if the gas generation is more it will be diverted to canteen.

9.3.4. Water Quality Mitigation Measures

The main wastewater generations sources in the proposed project are domestic

wastewater, leachate generation from secured land fill (hazardous waste) area, Effluent in

Bio medical waste, vehicle wash area, etc. Leachate treated in incineration/ Forced

evaporation/spraying on landfill. The domestic effluent generated will be treated in septic

tank followed by soak pit or portable STP and the treated water is used for greenbelt

development. The effluent generated from floor washings, recycling activity, etc will be

collected in collection tank followed by settling tank and the settled water is reused. The

effluent from bio medical waste is treated in ETP and recycling to incinerator or

circulation back to system. The waste water generated from boiler and cooling tower

used in ash quenching and for greenbelt development purpose. There will not be any

wastewater discharge to any nearby water body and adopts the zero wastewater

discharge concept.

9.3.5. Noise Mitigation Measures

The main sources of noise generation is due to movement of vehicles carrying waste, all

vehicle (drivers) entering into the project will be informed to maintain speed limits, and

not blow horns unless it is required. Necessary speed controlling bumps will be placed

near weighbridge and entrance of the site.

The other areas where noise generation is anticipated is Incinerator section, DG set room,

necessary personal protective equipment like earmuffs, helmets covering ears would be

provided to the workers working near noise generating equipment and would see that

workers use the protective gadgets regularly. Regular maintenance of the equipment will



be carried out as per the schedule given by suppliers. The noise pollution management

measures proposed is given below.

Acoustic Enclosure for all the high noise level equipment

All the design/installation precautions as specified by the manufacturers with

respect to noise control are strictly adhered to

Major noise generating sources are insulated adequately by providing suitable

enclosures

Other than the regular maintenance of the various equipment, ear plugs are

provided to the personnel close to the noise generating units

All the opening like covers, partitions are designed properly

9.3.6. Solid Waste Mitigation Measures

The ash coming from the incinerator will be used as a daily cover for landfill along with

soil and mud.

9.3.7. Post operation of Landfill

A final landfill cover is usually composed of several layers, each with a specific function.

The surface cover system must enhance surface drainage, minimize infiltration, support

vegetation and control the release of landfill gases. The landfill cover to be adopted will

depend on the gas management system.

As recommended by the MOEFCC, the final cover system must consist of a vegetative

layer supported by a drainage layer over barrier layer and gas vent layer. The details of

the landfill cover are given below.

A 60cm thick compacted clay

A HDPE geo-membrane liner of thickness 1.5mm

Geo net and 285 gsm Geotextile, 7-8mm drainage composite

Top soil 45cm and vegetative soil 15cm followed by vegetation.

The mitigation measures proposed during post operation period are given in Table 9.4.

Table 9.4

Mitigation Measure proposed during Post Operation Period

Post Operation Phase

Landfill

maintenance

After closure of the landfill, the integrity of the final cover will be

maintained, if any repairs required it will be rectified as necessary

After closure of the landfill, shall continue Leachate, gas and surface



water management as well as environmental monitoring of the landfill

for a period of 30 years or until harmful leachate is not produced for

5continuous years

After few years of closure, the leachate is observed to meet all

discharge standards, the same shall be discharged directly to lined

drains

The landfill shall be abandoned after 30 years of closure if

concentrations of contaminants in all liquid and gaseous emissions from

the landfill are observed to be below prescribed limits

9.4. Socio Economic Development Activities under CEP

Corporate Environmental Policy (CEP), also known as Corporate Social Responsibility

(CSR), is a form of corporate self-regulation integrated into a business model. Ideally, CEP

policy would function as a built-in, self-regulating mechanism whereby business would

monitor and ensure its support to ethical standards and international norms.

Consequently, business would adopt responsibility for the impact of its activities on the

environment, consumers, employees, Communities, Stakeholders and all other members

of the public sector. CEP focused businesses would proactively promote the public

interest by encouraging community growth and development, and voluntarily eliminating

practices that harm the public sector, regardless of legality.

Economic growth is possible only through consumption of inputs available in the

environment and society. The harnessing of natural resources has a direct impact on the

economy, the environment and society at large. CEP is a concept whereby organizations

serve the interests of society by taking responsibility for the impact of their activities on

customers, employees, shareholders, communities and the environment in all aspects of

their operations.

Thus CEP is a management’s commitment to operate in an economically, socially and

environmentally sustainable manner, while recognizing the interests of its stakeholders.

This commitment is beyond statutory requirements. CEP is, therefore, closely linked with

the practice of sustainable Development.

9.4.1. Planning

The planning for CEP starts with the identification of the activities/projects to be

undertaken. CEP projects/activities may be undertaken in the periphery of project



boundaries or anywhere in the country. However, specific CEP strategies shall be

developed that mandate the design of CEP Action Plan (Long-term, medium-term and

short-term), with a shift from the casual approach to the project based accountability

approach.

Selection of activities under CEP would be made to ensure that the benefits reach the

smallest units in the area of District depending upon the operations and resource

capability of the project. The approach to CEP planning needs to be shifted from an ad-

hoc charity to a long-term sustainable approach. The monitoring skills available with the

project authorities could be shared as far as possible, with the local administration by

training and setting up required structures and systems.

The long-term CEP Plan shall match with the long term Business Plan. This shall be broken

down into medium term and short term plans. Each of these plans shall be clearly

specified the following.

Requirements relating to baseline survey

Activities to be undertaken

Budgets allocated

Time-lines prescribed

Responsibilities and authorities defined

Major results expected

However, these plans shall also clearly specify the implementation guidelines and the

involvement of the implementing agency

9.4.2. Implementation

CEP initiatives shall be considered the following parameters for identifications/selection

of schemes/projects as per the stipulated guidelines:

Investment in CEP should be project based. Mere donations to

philanthropic/charity or other organizations would not come under the category

of CEP.

CEP activities should generate community goodwill, create social impact and

visibility.

For every project, the time-frame and periodic milestones should be finalized at

the outset.



CEP activities should also involve the suppliers in order to ensure that the supply-

chain also follows the CEP principles.

CEP activities should help in building a positive image of the company in the public

perception.

CEP projects may be closely linked with the principles of sustainable Development.

Based on the immediate and long term social and environmental consequences of

their activities.

Management should take the shoulder responsibility for restoring/Compensating

for any ecological damage that is taking place as a result of its operations.

Project activities identified under CEP shall be implemented by Specialized Agencies and

generally not by staff of the project management. Specialized agencies would be made to

work singly or in tandem with other agencies.

Specialized agencies would include:-

Community based organizations whether formal or informal

Elected local bodies such as Panchayat

Voluntary Agencies (NGOs)

Institutes/Academic Organizations

Trusts, Missions, etc.,

Self-help Groups

Government, Semi-Government and autonomous Organizations

Standing Conference of Public Enterprises (SCOPE)

Mahila Mandals/Samitis and the like

Contracted agencies for civil works

Professional Consultancy Organizations, etc.,

Project Management will take responsibility to develop awareness among all levels of

their staff about CEP activities and the integration of social processes with business

processes. Those involved with the undertaking of CEP activities will be provided with

adequate training and re-orientation.

Initiatives of State Governments, District Administration, local administration as well as

Central Government Departments/Agencies, self-Help Groups, etc., would be

dovetailed/Synergized with the initiatives taken by the management.

Every care will be taken to ensure that there is no duplication of CEP activities undertaken

by the project with that of programs run by Central State and Local Governments. While

assigning CEP projects to specialized agencies, every possible effort will be made to verify

the reliability and clean track record of such agencies or they may select from panels



maintained by Government, Semi-Government, Autonomous Organization or the

National CEP Hub, etc.

Activities related to sustainable Development will form a significant element of the total

initiatives of CEP. However, these activities will be carried out under the 3 UN Global

compact principles, pertaining to the Environment. Nevertheless, business related with

project activities will be asked to:

Support a precautionary approach to environmental challenges

Undertake initiatives to promote greater environmental responsibility

Encourage the development and diffusion of environmentally friendly

technologies.

9.4.3. Possible Areas of Activities under CEP

Some of the possible areas of activities under CEP are given below; they will be

undertaken depending on the local requirement and its immediate need.

Drinking Water Facility

Education

Electricity Facility

Solar Lighting System

Health and Family Welfare

Plantation/Irrigation Facilities

Sanitation and Public Health

Pollution Control

Animal Care

Promotion of Sports and Games

Promotion of Art and Culture

Environment Friendly technologies

Promotion of livelihood for economically weaker sections through forward and

backward linkages.

Relief to victims of Natural Calamities like earth-quake, Cyclone, drought & Flood

situation in any part of the country

Supplementing Development Program of the Government

Non-conventional Energy Sources

Construction of Community Centres/Night Shelters/Old Age Homes

Imparting Vocational Training

Setting up of skill development centers

Adoption of Villages



Scholarships to meritorious students belonging to SC, ST, OBC and disabled

categories

Adoption/Construction of Hostels (especially those for SC/ST and girls)

Skill training, entrepreneurship development and placement assistance program

for youth

Building of Roads, Pathways and Bridges

Entrepreneurship Development Program (EDP)

Disaster Management Activities including those related to amelioration/mitigation

Activities related to the preservation of the ecology and to sustainable

development.

The tentative budget allotted for undertaking CSR activities are given in Table 9.5.

Table 9.5 Budget for CSR activities

S. No Activities Details Total Amount

Rs. (Lakhs)

1 Hazardous Waste awareness

programs

Sensitization through organizing

lectures of experts

2.0

2 Health checkups Health checkup for communities

in the nearby villages

5.0

3 Installation of Hand pumps Hand pump & Community Water

Filter Units in the nearby villages

4.0

4 Development of schools Through donating books and other

need based education materials to

the school

3.5

5 Health immunization camps For nearby villagers – Women &

Children

4.0

6 Parks/Playgrounds Parks and playground will be renovated or developed in nearby villages/schools

1.5

Total 20

Capital Cost of the project is Rs. 35 Crores

Note: The company shall earmark the fund of Rs.20 lakhs for CSR. This fund shall be utilized over

a period of 2 years. Thereafter the company shall allot 2% of the annual profit towards the same.



9.5. Occupational Health Management

There will be routine observation of health as certain sufferings are likely to appear as

result of exposure by the workers during operations of various facilities. All the

employees shall be required to undergo a medical checkup before joining the facility.

Medical checkup will be conducted on regular basis and the health conditions will be

monitored. First aid facilities required to attend immediately for meeting emergency

situations shall be made available at the facility.

9.6. Fire Protection System

The fire protection system will protect the entire site area from fire hazards happening

accidentally. This fire protection system comprises of a ground level water storage tank to

store the anticipated requirement of water. One electric motor driven pump and one

diesel high pressure pumps will be provided to pump the water to a high pressure header

from where the water is distributed to various high pressure hydrants provided at

selected locations. Necessary fire hoses terminated with spouts will be kept ready at each

hydrant location to facilitate firefighting. The header also caters to a multi fire system to

automatically sprinkle water through sprinklers provided.

9.7. Environmental Management Cell

The Environmental Cell will be headed by the Project Managers followed by other officers

and technicians. The department is the nodal agency to co-ordinate and provides

necessary services on environmental issues during operation of the project. This

environmental group is responsible for implementation of environmental management

plan, interaction with the environmental regulatory agencies, reviewing draft policy and

planning. This department interacts with State Pollution Control Board and other

environment regulatory agencies. The department also interacts with local people to

understand their problems and to formulate appropriate community development plan.

The major duties and responsibilities of Environmental Management Cell shall be as given

below:

To implement the environmental management plan,

To assure regulatory compliance with all relevant rules and regulations,

To ensure regular operation and maintenance of pollution control devices,

To minimize environmental impacts of operations as by strict adherence to the

EMP,

To initiate environmental monitoring as per approved schedule



Review and interpretation of monitored results and corrective measures in

case monitored results are above the specified limit

Maintain documentation of good environmental practices and applicable

environmental laws as ready reference

Maintain environmental related records

Coordination with regulatory agencies, external consultants

9.7.1. Record Keeping and Reporting

Record keeping and reporting of performance is an important management tool for

ensuring sustainable operation. Records should be maintained for regulatory, monitoring

and operational issues. Typical record keeping requirements for the TSDF is summarized

in Table 9-6.

Table 9-6 Record Keeping Particulars

Parameter Particulars

Solid Waste Handling and Disposal

Daily quantity of waste receive

Daily quantity sent to landfill

Waste water Daily quantities of treated effluent disposed

Quantity and point of usage of treated wastewater

Treated wastewater quality

Regulatory Licenses

(Environmental)

Environmental Permits / Consents from APPCB

Monitoring and Survey Records of all monitoring carried out as per the

finalized monitoring protocol

Accident reporting Date and time of the accident

Sequence of events leading to accident

Chemical datasheet assessing effect of accident on

health and environment

Emergency measure taken

Step to prevent recurrence of such events

Other Log book of compliance

Employee environmental, health and safety

records

Equipment inspection and calibration records,

where applicable

Vehicle maintenance and inspection records

CHAPTER 10

[email protected]

Typewritten text

SUMMARY & CONCLUSION

[email protected]

Typewritten text



10 Chapter 10

Summary and Conclusions

10.1 Introduction

Punjab Waste Management Project (PWMP), located at Nimbua village, Dera Bassi tehsil,

Mohali district, Punjab State has been providing hazardous waste disposal services to

various industries in Punjab since 2007 through the Treatment Storage and Disposal

Facility (TSDF) having Secured Landfill and Stabilization facilities. PWMP wants to

enhance the waste disposal services through inclusion of hazardous waste incinerator,

bio-medical waste management facilities, alternative fuels and raw materials facility, E-waste

management facilities as well as recycling facilities for used oil, spent solvent, lead, paper, and

plastic within the existing TSDF.

Environmental Impact Assessment report has been prepared to comply with the Terms of

Reference (TOR) received from MoEF&CC F.No.10-27/2016-IA.III dated 4th May 2016 and

amended Terms of Reference (TOR) dated 9th February 2018. As per EIA Notification S.O.

No 1533 dated 14thSep 2006 and its subsequent amendments the proposed project falls

under Project / Activity 7 (d) Common Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage and Disposal

Facility (TSDFs), Category “A” (All integrated facilities having incineration & landfill or

incineration alone) and requires environmental clearance from the Expert Appraisal

Committee (EAC), MOEF&CC, New Delhi.

10.2 Project Description

Punjab Waste Management Project (PWMP), a subsidiary of M/s. Ramky Enviro Engineers

Ltd, understands the increasing trend of waste disposal needs of industries. PWMP wants

to enhance the waste disposal services within the existing TSDF. By enhancing the existing

treatment capacities of secured landfill/stabilization. The existing and proposed project

facility details are given in Table 10.1. The site features are presented in Table 10.2.



Table 10.1 Proposed Project Details

S.No. Facility Proposed Capacity

1 Direct Landfill (DLF) 20,000 TPA

2 Landfill after Stabilization Treatment (LAT) 40,000 TPA

3 Incineration (INC) – Common for HW and BMW 500 kg/hr

4 Biomedical Waste (BMW) 5 TPD

5 Alternative Fuels and Raw Materials Facility 18,000 TPA

6 E-Waste 8,000 TPA

7 Used Oil Recycling 2 KLD

8 Spent Solvent Recycling 5 KLD

9 Lead Recycling 2000 TPA

10 Paper Recycling 2 TPD

11 Plastics Recycling 2 TPD

Table 10.2 Site features

Nature of the project

Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment,

Storage, and Disposal Facility at Nimbua,

Dera Bassi, Mohali District, Punjab by Punjab

Waste Management Project (PWMP)

Latitude and Longitude 30°36'40” N 76°55'20” E

Land Ownership PPCB to Nimbua Greenfeild Punjab Ltd. on lease basis

Land area Total land area - 20.74 Acres

Nearest Village Nimbua

Nearest City Dera Bassi - 10 km NW

Nearest Railway Station Ghaggar Railway Station – 7.5 km W

Nearest Airport Chandigarh - 14.5 km W

Nearest major Water Bodies

Medkhali nala - 1.2 km N Dangrinadi - 3.4 Km N Ghaggar river - 5.5 km NW Dudhdarh ki nadi - 3.0 km SE

Reserved Forests Kholhai Raitan reserve forest – 11.3 km N

10.2.1 Project Importance

There is a growing concern all over the country for the disposal of hazardous wastes

generated from anthropogenic sources. The waste generators find it difficult to dispose

their hazardous wastes without causing environmental disturbance, as very few



appropriate disposal facilities are available. The Government of India has promulgated

the Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules,

2016.through the Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change (MOEF&CC)

under the aegis of Environment (Protection) Act EPA Act 1986. Also in order to encourage

the effective implementation of these rules, the MOEF has further amended the rules

several times.

10.2.2 Land Details

The total land area of the existing Punjab Waste Management Common Hazardous Waste

Management Facility is 20.74 Acres.

10.2.3 Water Requirement and its availability

The water requirement for operating the proposed incinerator is about 56 KLD. The

source of water is from borewell located within the exiting TSDF facility or through

tankers, MEE condensate is recycled and reused in incinerator.

10.2.4 Energy and Power Requirement and its sources

The energy requirement for operating the proposed facilities is about 750 KW and power

load for the exiting TSDF is about 62.3 KW. The details of power required for operation of

the facility and fuel required for running DG sets during power failure are given in Table

10.3.

Table 10.3 Power and Fuel Requirement

S.No Details Capacity Remarks

1. Power requirement 813 KW From State electricity board

2. Alternative Fuel for

Incinerator (HSD/Furnace oil)

30 KLD From Local Dealers

3. DG Sets 500 KVA DG set is used for emergency

power backup, Fuel will be

procured from local dealers

10.2.5 Employment details

The manpower for the proposed project during construction phase is 50 Nos. and during

operation phase is 30 Nos.



10.3 Baseline Environmental Status

The baseline data generation for the TSDF facility has been carried out during the summer

season (March 2016 to May 2016). Data collection with respect to meteorological

conditions, air pollution levels, noise levels, water quality, soil quality and socio economic

conditions were carried out during the study period. During the study period the winds

were predominantly recorded from NW closely followed by SE. Calm conditions prevailed

for 12.4% of the total time and the average wind speed for the season is 2.29 m/sec.

The ambient air quality was monitored at 10 locations and the results obtained

are given in Table.10.4a & 10.4b.

Table 10.4a Ambient Air Quality Results (μg/m3)

Details PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NOx

Minimum In 98th Percentile 45.5 16.7 10.9 18.8

Maximum In 98th Percentile 57.5 31.3 18.8 25.6

NAAQ Standards 2009 100 60 80 80

Table 10.4b Ambient Air Quality Results (μg/m3)

Details CO O3 Ammonia Benzene

Minimum In 98th Percentile 224 12.8 10.3 0.6

Maximum In 98th Percentile 600 20.9 16.6 0.92

NAAQ Standards 2009 2000

(8 hourly)

100

(8 hourly)

400

(24

hours)

5

(Annually)

Water samples in the study area were collected from 10 ground and 2 surface

water location to assess the water quality during the study period. The ground

water samples were drawn from the hand pumps and bore wells used by the

villagers for their domestic needs. Surface water sampling was carried out from

the river/nallas in the study area. The summary of important parameters are given

in Table 10.5 and Table 10.6. Overall, all the ground water samples collected from

the study area were found to be fit for human consumption; however, the

hardness, chlorides, dissolved solids and fluorides in some of the ground water

samples seem to be above acceptable limit but well within the permissible limits

and all surface water samples are meeting the class ‘A’ norms as per IS: 2296-1982

inland surface water standards. Hardness in one sample is meeting the class ‘B’ or

‘C’ norms as per IS: 2296-1992 inland surface water standards.



Table 10.5 Summary of Ground Water Analysis

Parameters Units Minimum Maximum

Drinking water Standards

IS:10500:2012

Acc’ble Per’ble

pH - 7.08 7.57 6.5-8.5 No Relaxation

TDS mg/l 355 1330 500 2000

Chlorides mg/l 10 266 250 1000

Hardness mg/l 182 598 200 600

Fluorides mg/l 0.5 1.4 1.0 1.5

Table 10.6 Summary of Surface Water Analysis

Parameters Units Minimum Maximum

IS:2296 – 1992 Inland surface water

Stds

A B C D E

pH - 7.03 7.13 6.5-8.5 6-9 6.5-8.5 6-8.5

TDS mg/l 402 424 500 - 1500 - 2100

Chlorides mg/l 52 54 250 - 600 - 600

Hardness mg/l 180 222 200 - - - -

Fluorides mg/l 1.1 1.2 1.5 1.5 1.5 - -

Baseline noise levels have been monitored at 10 locations within the study zone,

using a continuous noise measurement device. The results are presented in Table

10.7.

Table 10.7 Noise Levels – dB (A)

Parameters Minimum Maximum Standards

Residential Commercial

Day Equivalent 51.1 53.6 55 65

Night Equivalent 41.1 42.7 45 55

To determine the impact on agricultural productivity of soil due to the proposed

activity soil samples were collected at 10 locations. The summary of the results

obtained are presented in Table 10.8 and compared with Indian Council of

Agricultural Research standards.



Table 10.8 Soil Quality in Study Area

Parameters Minimum Maximum

Standard Soil Classification – (Indian

Council of Agricultural Research, New

Delhi

pH 6.95 7.18 Acidic<6.0, Normal to Saline 6.0-8.5,

Tending to become Alkaline8.6 to 9.0,

Alkaline above 9.

EC (µs/cm) 114 212 Normal<1000, Critical for germination

1000-2000, Critical for growing 2000 -

4000, Injurious to most crops>4000

Organic carbon

(%)

0.43 0.65 Low < 0.5 , Medium 0.5 – 0.75, High > 0.75

Nitrogen (kg/Ha) 189 286 Low below 280, Medium 280-560, High

above 560

Phosphates

(kg/Ha)

14 95 Low below 10, Medium 10-25, High above

25

Potassium

(kg/Ha)

145 272 Low below 110, Medium 110-280 High

above 280

10.4 Anticipated Impacts


infrastructure provision and some other infrastructure activities. The impacts due to


impacts will be mainly on air quality, water quality, soil quality and socio-economics.

Necessary control measures will be taken to minimize the impacts.

During the operation phase of the proposed project there would be impacts on the air

environment, water environment, Land environment and socio-economic aspects. The

main sources of air pollution are as follows.

1. Area source emissions from Landfill operations

2. Point source emissions from incinerator, boilers, DG set.

The area source emissions and line source emissions will be within the plant premises,

whereas point source emissions expected the proposed project, and predicted GLCs are

given in Table 10.9



Table 10.9 Post Project Scenario-Units: μg/m3

Particulars Particulate Matter

(PM)

Sulphur Dioxide

(SO2)

Oxides of Nitrogen

(NOx)

Lead

Baseline Scenario

(Max) 57.5 18.8 25.6 --

Predicted GLC (Max) 2.4 8 14 0.12

Distance (km) 0.6 0.6 Within site 0.6

Overall Scenario

(Worst Case) 59.9 26.8 39.6 0.12

NAAQ Standards

2009 100 80 80 1

10.5 Environmental Monitoring Plan

The main spirit of environmental monitoring program is aimed such that there is not

much of time lag between commencements of damage to environment and mitigation

measures to various environmental parameters that are being affected. Environmental

monitoring program has been prepared for assessing the efficiency of implementation of

Environment Management Plan and details of the same are given in Table 10.10.

Table 10.10 Environmental Monitoring during Operational Phase

S.

No

Potential Impact Action to be

Followed

Parameters for

Monitoring

Frequency of

Monitoring

1. Air Emissions Stack emissions from

Incinerator

As per CFE conditions-

Operating hours,

Temperature,

Pressure, TOC of

residues, LOI of

residues, Stack temp,

CO, PM, HCl, HF, SO2,

NOx, TOC, mercury,

heavy metals, dioxins

& furans

As per CFE

conditions

given by SPCB

or EC

conditions

given by MOEF

and CPCB

protocol for

TSDF.

Gas quality from

landfill areas


conditions

given by SPCB

or EC

conditions

given by MOEF

and CPCB

Stack emissions from

DG sets


PM, SO2, NOx.

AAQ within the

project premises.


As per CFE conditions.

Vehicle logs to be

maintained.



S.

No

Potential Impact Action to be

Followed

Parameters for

Monitoring

Frequency of

Monitoring

certificate. protocol for

TSDF. Meteorological data Wind speed, direction,

temp., relative

humidity and rainfall.

2. Noise Noise generated

from operation of

boiler, cooling

towers, etc. to be

monitored.

Spot Noise Level

recording

Periodic during

operation

phase

Once in month

by third party

3. Wastewater

discharge

(leachate)

Compliance to

wastewater

discharge standards.

pH, TSS, TDS, BOD,

COD & Oil& grease

(heavy metals if

required).

Daily at regular

intervals.

Once in a

month by third

party.

4. Solid

waste/hazardous

waste

Check compliance to

HWM rules.

Quality & quantity

monitoring.

Periodically /

CPCB norms.

5. Ground water

quality

Monitoring ground

water quality,

through piezometers.

As per guidelines. Periodically &

as per CPCB

norms.


greenbelt/green

cover development.


7. Soil quality Checking &

maintenance of good

soil quality around

Physico-chemical

parameters and

metals.

Once a year

8. Health Employees and

migrant labour

health checkups.

All relevant

parameters (BP, HIV,

chest X-ray, eye vision,

etc.) and HIV for BMW

workers.

Regular

checkups.



10.6 Risk Analysis

Risk assessment was carried out to identify and quantify major hazards and the risk

associated with various operations of the proposed project that may lead to an

emergency (disaster) affecting public safety and health. A systematic analysis of the

chemicals and their quantities of storage has been carried out to determine threshold

quantities as notified by GoI Rules, 1989. The computations of FETI for HSD at proposed

TSDF is carried out. Based on F&EI, HSD comes under “Low” category and nil toxicity. The

effects on humans due to variations in heat flux and duration of exposure have been

developed in the form of a Probit model was also evaluated. For computing the damage

distance from the tank failure area, ALOHA software is used. The results indicate that for

heat radiation of 25 KW/m2 the damage distance is found to be less than 10 m from the

accidental site, whereas for heat radiation of 12.5 KW/m2 the impact distance is 14m.

Heat radiation of intensity of 4.5 KW/m2 the damage distance is of 24 m. However, all

necessary measures to minimize the risk due to the proposed project will be taken during

design stage and also during operation period. In view of the hazardous nature of

products/process handled at the project site, BWMP has prepared (both on-site and off-

site) an Emergency Preparedness Plan. The plan is based on various probable scenarios

like fire, explosion, natural calamities etc. Besides, it has also got good infrastructure and

a dedicated team to handle emergency situations.

10.7 Project Benefits

From the proposed project the major benefits, include improving the degraded

environment by establishing an Integrated Common Hazardous Waste Treatment,

Storage, Disposal and Recycling Facilities.

The proposed project facilitates better management of the industrial hazardous

wastes.

It will be the showcase for other districts / states for management of hazardous

waste with additional benefit of green and clean Environment

It minimizes the pollution load on environment from industrial hazardous waste


closure on account of violation of rules

It reduces the number of hazardous waste dump sites in the area and also

eliminates the pollution potential

Possibility for recovery of material can be researched at common site


facility


In absence of expertise or availability of less expertise this route is confirmed to be

most viable and workable








Competitive advantage in international markets vis-à-vis grading of the products

on environmental consideration

10.8 Environmental Management Plan

The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is required to ensure sustainable

development in the area of the proposed project site. Hence, it needs proper

Environmental Management Plan (EMP) to meet these objectives. The purpose of the

Environmental Management Plan is to minimize the potential environmental impacts

from the project and to mitigate the adverse impacts. Details of Environment

Management Plan are given in Table 10.11

Table 10.11 Mitigation Measure proposed during Operation Period

Air Quality

Management

Incinerator will be provided with a stack height meeting MOEF

Guidelines, Spray dryer, Multi cyclone, Bag house, Wet scrubber

DG set will be provided with a stack height meeting MOEF Guidelines

or 1 m above the tallest structure in the project area for proper

dispersion of sulfur dioxide and oxides of nitrogen.

Internal roads will be concreted / asphalted to reduce dust emissions

Speed restriction will be followed within the project and speed

breakers will be provided at entry and exit points

Gas management system in secured landfill will be provided

Green belt will be provided along the internal roads and plant

boundary

Odour Control Dilution of odourant by odour counteraction or neutralize by spraying

Ecosorb (organic and biodegradable chemical) around odour

generation areas at regular intervals.

Covering the landfill area under operation daily with layer of earth,

clay or a similar material

Covering by using heavy duty hessian, plastics and foams odour can

be minimized.

Gas

Management

To minimize the gas generation in the landfill, the organic based

waste will be diverted to incineration to the maximum extent possible



To manage the gas generated a venting system with flaring

arrangement will be provided, if the gas generation is more it will be

directed to canteen

Water Quality

Mitigation

Measures

The leachate generated from landfill will be collected into leachate

collection wells.

The leachate collected will be sprayed back into landfill for dust

suppression, stabilization of hazardous waste, etc. the excess if any

will be disposed into spray drier of the incinerator.

The domestic wastewater will be collected and treated in septic

tank/soak pit or portable STP and reused for greenbelt

The effluent from floor washings, workshop etc., will be collected,

treated in O&G trap, settling tank and recycle back for dust

suppression, etc.,

The waste water from bio-medical sections will collected, disinfected

and after necessary treatment reused for dust suppression on landfill

area

Noise Mitigation

Measures

Acoustic Enclosure will be provided for all the high noise generating

equipment’s. All the design/installation precautions as specified by

the manufacturers with respect to noise control are strictly adhered

to major noise generating sources are insulated adequately by

providing suitable enclosures other than the regular maintenance of

the various equipment, ear plugs are provided to the personnel close

to the noise generating units. All the openings like covers, partitions

are designed properly.

Solid Waste

Mitigation

Measures

The ash coming from incineration plant area will be used as daily

cover in secured landfill

The sludge generated in the leachate pond/ solar pond will be sent to

secured land fill

Occupational

Health & Safety

Periodic health checkup for early detection and control of

communicable Diseases

Will provide preventive measures for potential fire hazards with

requisite fire detection, firefighting facilities and adequate water

storage, etc.

Provide regular training for workers in their respective fields

10.9 Cost Estimate of the Project

A detailed cost estimate of the proposed project is about Rs.35 Crores.

CHAPTER 11

DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS



Chapter 11

Disclosure of consultants

11.1. Ramky Group

Ramky group, founded in the year 1994, today spans into a specialist multi-disciplinary

organization focused in areas of civil, environmental & waste management infrastructure with

specific emphasis on ‘Public Private Partnership’ Projects. The corporate office of the group is

located at Hyderabad and the regional offices are located at Delhi, Mumbai, Ahmedabad,

Bangalore, Chennai, Bhopal and Kolkata. The major companies of the group are 1) Ramky

Infrastructure Ltd, 2) Ramky Enviro Engineers Ltd, 3) Ramky Estates & Farms Pvt. Ltd. and 4)

Smilax Laboratories Ltd.

11.2. Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited

Ramky Enviro Services Private Limited ( A subsidiary of Ramky Enviro Engineers Limited) is the

consulting arm of the Ramky Enviro group provides vital function of effectively providing the

backward linkage to the project implementation function in the form of concepts, strategies,

structuring, planning and designing infrastructure projects. Ramky is a multi and cross

disciplinary team of professionals, offering solutions at each cycle of a project. The consultancy

services offered by the RESPL are given below.

11.2.1. Consultancy Services

Facilitating in obtaining environmental clearances from MOEF, New Delhi and SEAC’s

from various states

Obtaining Consent for Establishment & Consent for Operation from state pollution

Control Boards Preparing of Environmental Impact Assessment Reports.

Environmental Audits to help industries to recycle and reuse resources and plan for low

polluting technologies.

Risk Assessment Studies for hazardous chemical storage & Process in order to devise

viable onsite and offsite emergency plans.

Identification and evaluation of hazardous Waste disposal sites.

Preparation of detailed project reports of MSW, HWMP, BMW.

Environmental management systems, training, documentation and implementation as

per ISO: 14001:1996 Standards.



Characterization and quantification of biomedical waste, municipal solid waste and

design of disposal facilities.

Environmental management strategies to mitigate adverse impacts arising out of

developmental activities.

Effluent treatment plant design after thorough review of process, reaction mass balance

and treatability studies of effluents.

Post project Monitoring network design.

Consultancy Services for setting up environmental laboratories.

Design of Sewage treatment plants.

Design of Waste treatment plants.

Health and socio- economic surveys.

Resettlement and rehabilitation plans.

Systems development for ISO:9000, OSHAS:18000, NABL, ISO:17025 standards.

11.2.2. Laboratory services

Analysis of air samples for ambient air quality and those collected from industrial

sources for both routine and industry specific pollutants.

Water and wastewater analysis for important parameters as for standard methods,

including pesticides and poly hydro carbons.

Solid and hazardous waste analysis including TCPL tests.

Monitoring of noise levels at source and in ambient air.

Development of new methods and quality assurances of results obtained.

Design and set up of laboratories.

11.2.3. Training services

Monitoring of environmental parameters – air, water, noise, soil etc.

Environmental impact assessments

Effluent treatment plant operations and maintenance

Sewage treatment plant operations and maintenance

ISO 9000&14000, OHSAS 18000 awareness, documentations, internal auditors

Establishment environmental laboratories

Pollution control in industries

Biomedical waste management



11.2.4. Field Services

Site selection and suitability studies for setting up of Industries.

Ambient air quality monitoring for all pollutants.

Noise level monitoring.

Meteorological data collection as per CPCB norms.

Stack emission monitoring for all pollutants and assessment of efficiency of control

equipment.

Water, wastewater and soil sample collection.

Assessment of efficiency of ETP and analyzing critical parameters of field.

Flora and fauna assessment through sectorial studies and damage assessment due to

development projects.

Damage assessment studies in case of oil well blowouts, major industrial accidents, etc.

11.2.5. Treatment Plant Services

Water treatment plants-design, construction, operation and maintenance.

Efficiency studies of effluent treatment plants.

Design, construction, operation and maintenance of ETP.

Upgradation/modification of ETP.

Sewage treatment plants-design, construction, operation and maintenance along with

mechanical equipment erection.

Supply of mechanical equipment.

11.2.6. Solid Waste Management Services

Industrial Waste Management

Hazardous Waste Management

Municipal Solid Waste Management

Biomedical Solid Waste Management

Annexure 1

Annexure 2

Annexure 2

A3.1

Trend analysis of base level quality before the existing facilities came into

existence, present scenario

1. Air Quality

As suggested by the committee members a comparison matrix was prepared by drawing

graphical representation of air quality around the proposed site with present scenario &

previous environmental baseline scenario.

Sampling locations are different in both monitoring durations. The graphical representations

were made for parameters like PM10, PM 2.5, NOx, SO2.

The observations made regarding PM10, PM2.5 are as follows:

The air quality during earlier baseline study was monitored in SPM and was found to

be within the standard. The air quality for the present scenario was monitored and

the PM10, PM2.5 levels were found to be within the standards

The concentrations observed were in the range of SO2 5.7 to 10.5 mg/m3 for previous

whereas the range SO2 of 10.9 to 18.8 mg/m3 for present scenario.

The concentrations observed were in the range of NOX 18.7 to 29.2 mg/m3 for previous

whereas the range NOx of 18.8 to 25.6 mg/m3 for present scenario.

The comparative graphical representations are given in the Figure 1.

Figure 1 Comparison of Air parameters- PM10, PM2.5, NOx and SO2

Annexure 2

A3.2

2. Noise

With reference to noise baseline values, the noise levels during the previous monitoring are

in the range of 44 to 74 to 49.5 to 59.1 during the present monitoring the noise values are

fairly in the same range.

The comparative graphical representations are given in the below figures…

Figure 2 Comparison of Noise levels

3. Ground Water

During previous project baseline monitoring only 5 ground water sampling locations were

identified whereas in present project around 10 Ground water samples were identified and

samples were analysed for physico chemical characteristics.

Upon observation the concentrations of TDS, total Hardness, chloride, iron, fluoride, zinc in

both the baseline monitoring found marginal variation,

Annexure 2

A3.3

Figure 3 Comparison of ground water parameters – TDS, Total Hardness, Chloride

Figure 4 Comparison of ground water parameters – Fluoride, iron, zinc

Annexure 2

A3.4

4. Surface Water Quality

With reference to surface water three samples (Ghaggar river upstream, downstream and

pond) was identified whereas during the present project baseline monitoring two samples

were collected (Ghaggar river upstream and downstream) and analysed for physico chemical

parameter.

The variation of concentrations during previous and present baseline monitoring values are

given in the following graphs

Figure 5 Comparison of Surface water parameters – Turbidity, TSS, Chlorides, Sulphates

Figure 6 Comparison of Surface water parameters – Total Dissolved Solids, Total Hardness.

Annexure 2

A3.5

5. Soil

Total 5 soil location samples were identified and analysed during the previous project baseline

monitoring whereas for the present baseline monitoring around 10 soil location samples were

identified and analysed for magnesium, available Potassium, available Phosphorus. The soil

characteristics analysed were found to be highly variable and the same is represented in the

graphs shown below.

Figure 5 Comparison of Soil Quality – Magnesium in mg/kg, Available Potassium, Available

Phosphorus in kg/ha

Annexure 3

Annexure – 3

Ground water quality analysis of the Piezometer wells installed in and around the TSDF.

Annexure – 3

Annexure 4

Annexure 5

Action Plan and Reply – Public Hearing

S. No Name of the person Questions/ query / statements of the person

Reply / clarification given by the company/ panel member

Action Plan

1 Sh. Surmukh Singh,

Sarpanch Vill. Khehri,

Tehsil Dera Bassi,

Distt. S.A.S. Nagar

(Mohali)

He said that whenever such new

plants come up they have a

positive & a negative aspect

attached to them.

He also said that whatever has

been promised in the

presentations should also be

fulfilled.

The CSR activities should not be

limited to the local village i.e.

Nimbuan but should also be

carried out in other nearby

villages.

To safeguard the environment the

company can adopt a village,

plant trees there and carry out

other environment protection

related activities.

The company should ensure that

there is no waste spillage outside

the TSDF premises.

Preference can be given to local

people for job opportunities.

Sh. Charandev Singh Mann, ADC,

stated that all are very valid

submissions & the same shall be

taken into consideration and he

shall ensure the same is done by

the company.

Sh. Sandeep Himalayan, Project

Head, Punjab Waste Management

Project stated that some of the

activities are already being

undertaken by the company.

Sh. Charandev Singh Mann, ADC

suggested that whenever such CSR

activities are undertaken with the

approval of the District

Administration since the

administration is more aware of

local requirements & then such

funds can be diverted towards

more needy areas which can be

identified by discussing with the

village panchayat.

After discussion with village panchayat, CSR activities will also be carried out in other needy villages.

An area of 6.2 acres which is 30% of total area is developed as green belt with native and odour controlling species as per CPCB guidelines.

Along the boundary a 10m wide green belt with three rows plantation shall be developed.

All along the road on both side avenue trees will be grown at the rate of 400 per every km of road at a distance 5 m.

The storage and handling of hazardous waste within the facility shall be followed as per the Hazardous and Other wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules 2016.

All the hazardous waste transportation vehicle shall be as per CPCB guidelines to avoid



Action Plan

There should be some special

quota.

Rather than doing one time

activities of “Chabeel” it is better

to provide for permanent

solutions like providing a water

purifier.

any spillage during transportation.

Employment will be provided to the local unemployed people as per their educational qualification.

2 Sh. Kamal Raj Kumar, Vill. Sundran, Tehsil Dera Bassi, Distt. S.A.S. Nagar (Mohali)

He said that whenever such new plants come up they have a positive & a negative aspect attached to them.

He did not have any objection to the Project coming up in the area but he had a few following suggestions :-

The company can provide for widows by giving them jobs or pension.

Company can establish playgrounds for children in the nearby villages.

Company can establish a drug rehabilitation centre in the nearby area.

Company can provide funds for upgrading schools by providing books, pencils etc.

Sh. Charandev Singh Mann, ADC, expressed that with the increase in population & development in a given area such disposal facilities have become very important. Just because there is waste disposal activity going on in a particular area it does not mean that it will harm the environment in the area or affect the people. In fact these environmentally sound waste disposal facilities ensure that no harm is caused to the environment.

Employment will be provided to the local unemployed people as per their educational qualification.

PMWP shall conduct Entrepreneurship Development Program to improve skills of locals.

An amount of Rs. 20 Lakhs has been allocated as budget for a period of 2 years. After the 2 year period, an amount of 2% of the annual profit shall be allocated for CSR activities like, development of schools, health immunization camps, health check-up, development or renovation of park and playgrounds.



Action Plan

3 Sh. Ranbir Singh, Village Shyampur, Tehsil Panchkula, Distt. Panchkula

He wanted to know the effect on the air quality from the emission to be generated from the incinerator.

Dr. B. Chakradhar explained that the incinerator has a scrubbing system to ensure that no harmful pollutants will escape into the atmosphere. The waste water generated from scrubber will be treated in the plant and the waste residue from it will be disposed in the landfill.

An amount of Rs. 1 Crore is allocated as capital cost for EMP. An amount of Rs. 10 lakhs shall be allocated for recurring cost for operation and maintenance of air pollution control system, effluent/leachate treatment plant etc.

As per CPCB/MOEFCC guidelines PWMP proposed 30m height for the Incinerator Stack.

Continuous online monitoring system shall be installed in stack and connected to State PCB/CPCB website.

February 2018environmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/EIA/17022018...Aue eq wag} os `JoleJeupu!...

Documents

Transcript of February 2018environmentclearance.nic.in/writereaddata/EIA/17022018...Aue eq wag} os `JoleJeupu!...